2020 Ram 1500 DT

2020 RAM 1500
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
20_DT_OM_EN_USC_N2
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App
FOURTH EDITION V2
Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF `
RAM 1500
THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
20 20 OWNER’ S M ANUAL
RAMTRUCKS.COM (U.S.) RAMTRUCK.CA (CANADA)
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S.), www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the WARNING
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
20_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 10 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 14 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..................................................... 100 3
4 SAFETY .......................................................................................................................................... 131 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 187 5

6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................286 6
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 323 7
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 376
8
9 MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................390
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................468
10
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................. 472
11
INTRODUCTION SENTRY KEY............................................................24 HEAD RESTRAINTS................................................ 38

Key Programming ............................................24 Front Head Restraints......................................39
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................ 11
Replacement Keys ...........................................24 Rear Head Restraints ......................................40
Essential Information.......................................11 General Information.........................................24 STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 40
Symbols.............................................................11 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ..................................25 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...................40
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................................ 11
To Arm The System ..........................................25 Heated Steering Wheel —
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS........................... 11 To Disarm The System .....................................25 If Equipped ......................................................40
CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER Rearming Of The System .................................26 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
LOADING ................................................................. 11 Security System Manual Override...................26 IF EQUIPPED........................................................... 41
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.......... 13 DOORS ....................................................................26 MIRRORS ............................................................... 42
Manual Door Locks ..........................................26 Inside Day/Night Mirror —
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Door Locks — If Equipped ....................27 If Equipped ......................................................42
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED ................ 14 Power Side Steps — If Equipped ....................27 Automatic Dimming Mirror —
KEYS ....................................................................... 15 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry ..............27 If Equipped ......................................................42
Key Fob .............................................................15 Automatic Door Locks — Outside Mirrors ................................................43
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 19 If Equipped........................................................30 Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming
Keyless Push Button Ignition...........................19 Child-Protection Door Lock .............................30 Mirror — If Equipped.........................................43
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) ... 21 DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED.....31 Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..........................43
How To Use Remote Start................................21 Programming The Memory Feature ................31 Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................21 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless And Trailer Tow — If Equipped.........................44
To Enter Remote Start Mode...........................22 Entry Key Fob To Memory................................32 Trailer Towing Mirrors —
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Memory Position Recall ...................................32 If Equipped ......................................................45
Driving The Vehicle ..........................................22 SEATS ......................................................................32 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................45
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive Manual Front Seat Adjustment .......................33 Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
The Vehicle .......................................................22 Manual Rear Seat Adjustment ........................34 If Equipped .......................................................45
Remote Start Comfort Systems — Power Front Seat Adjustment — Illuminated Vanity Mirror —
If Equipped........................................................22 If Equipped .......................................................35 If Equipped .......................................................46
General Information .........................................22 Heated Seats — If Equipped ............................36
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ......... 23 Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................37
How To Use Remote Start................................23 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers ........................38
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 46 CLIMATE CONTROLS .............................................53 Using HomeLink® ............................................76

Headlight Switch ..............................................46 Manual Climate Control Overview...................53 Security .............................................................76
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — Automatic Climate Control Overview ..............56 Troubleshooting Tips........................................76
If Equipped........................................................47 Climate Control Functions ...............................62 General Information.........................................77
Multifunction Lever .........................................47 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ......................................... 77
High/Low Beam Switch....................................47 If Equipped........................................................62 Storage .............................................................77
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Operating Tips .................................................63 Cupholders ......................................................82
Control — If Equipped ......................................47 WINDOWS ..............................................................64 Electrical Power Outlets...................................83
Flash-To-Pass....................................................48 Power Windows ................................................64 Power Inverter — If Equipped .........................84
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............48 Wind Buffeting .................................................66 Wireless Charging Pad —
Parking Lights And Panel Lights......................48 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ......................66 If Equipped ......................................................86
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Single Pane Power Sunroof — Overhead Sunglass Storage............................86
Automatic Headlights Only) .............................48 If Equipped........................................................66 PICKUP BOX .......................................................... 87
Headlight Delay ................................................48 Dual Pane Power Sunroof — RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED ..................................... 87
Lights-On Reminder..........................................48 If Equipped........................................................68 RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins ....88
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......................48 HOOD .......................................................................70 RamBox Safety Warning ..................................89
Turn Signals......................................................49 To Open The Hood ...........................................70 Bed Divider — If Equipped ...............................89
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................49 To Close The Hood ...........................................71 Bed Rail Tie-Down System —
Cargo Light With Bed Lights — TAILGATE.................................................................71 If Equipped ......................................................91
If Equipped........................................................49 Opening.............................................................71 EASY-OFF TAILGATE ............................................. 93
Battery Saver ....................................................50 Closing ..............................................................72 Tailgate Removal .............................................93
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 50 Multifunction Tailgate — Locking Tailgate ...............................................95
Courtesy Lights .................................................50 If Equipped .......................................................72 TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED ...... 95
Illuminated Entry .............................................51 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED ..........73 Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal ....................96
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............. 52 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® ... 73 Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation ................98
Windshield Wipers............................................52 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........75 Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ....................99
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ................53
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................. 118 Supplemental Restraint
INSTRUMENT PANEL Red Warning Lights....................................... 118 Systems (SRS) ............................................... 159
Yellow Warning Lights ................................... 121 Child Restraints............................................. 170
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT Yellow Indicator Lights .................................. 125 Transporting Pets ......................................... 184
CLUSTER — GASOLINE ........................................100 Green Indicator Lights .................................. 127 SAFETY TIPS ........................................................184
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster White Indicator Lights ................................... 128 Transporting Passengers.............................. 184
Descriptions................................................... 101 Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 129 Exhaust Gas................................................... 184
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ..... 129 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
GASOLINE .............................................................102 Onboard Diagnostic System The Vehicle ................................................... 184
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions .. 103 (OBD II) Cybersecurity ................................... 129 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 186
DIESEL...................................................................104 PROGRAMS.......................................................... 130
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .................. 105 STARTING AND OPERATING
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ..107 SAFETY STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ................. 108
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 131 ENGINES ..............................................................187
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ......................108
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 131 Automatic Transmission ............................... 187
Instrument Cluster Display Controls ............ 109
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 132 Tip Start Feature .......................................... 187
Oil Life Reset.................................................. 110
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 138 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ...................... 187
Display Menu Items ...................................... 110
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages ... 114
If Equipped .................................................... 138 Button ........................................................... 188
Displays.......................................................... 115
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Cold Weather Operation
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning
Mitigation — If Equipped ............................... 145 (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 190
Messages....................................................... 116
Tire Pressure Monitoring After Starting ................................................. 190
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning
System (TPMS) ............................................. 147 STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE.......191
Messages....................................................... 116
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................... 152 Automatic Transmission ............................... 191
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 152 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ..................... 191
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Important Safety Precautions ...................... 152 Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP
Actions — If Equipped ................................... 117
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 153 Button ........................................................... 191
Extreme Cold Weather.................................. 194
Starting Fluids ............................................... 194
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE .........195 ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR SUSPENSION ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
Cold Weather Precautions ............................ 195 SYSTEM (OFF-ROAD GROUP) — IF EQUIPPED ....217 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................227
Engine Idling .................................................. 196 Description .................................................... 217 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation .... 228
Stopping The Engine ..................................... 197 Air Suspension Modes .................................. 219 Activating Adaptive Cruise
Cooling System Tips — Automatic Instrument Cluster Display Messages ......... 220 Control (ACC) ................................................. 229
Transmission ................................................. 198 Operation ....................................................... 220 To Activate/Deactivate ................................. 229
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED) ..........198 AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........... 221 To Set A Desired ACC Speed ........................ 230
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — To Cancel ....................................................... 230
GASOLINE ENGINES ...........................................199 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 222 To Turn Off..................................................... 230
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — POWER STEERING .............................................. 222 To Resume..................................................... 230
DIESEL ENGINE ....................................................199 Electric Power Steering ................................ 222 To Vary The Speed Setting ........................... 231
PARKING BRAKE .................................................199 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINES Setting The Following Distance In ACC........ 232
Electric Park Brake (EPB).............................. 199 ONLY — IF EQUIPPED.......................................... 223 Overtake Aid .................................................. 233
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............................202 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............. 223 ACC Operation At Stop .................................. 233
Ignition Park Interlock ................................... 203 Automatic Mode ............................................ 223 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ........... 234
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Display Warnings And Maintenance ............ 234
System .......................................................... 203 Autostop......................................................... 224 Precautions While Driving
Automatic Transmission ............................... 204 To Start The Engine While In Autostop With ACC ........................................................ 235
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — Mode .............................................................. 224 General Information...................................... 238
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................208 To Manually Turn Off The Stop Start Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
System ........................................................... 225 Mode .............................................................. 238
Four-Position Electronically Shifted
To Manually Turn On The Stop Start PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
Transfer Case — If Equipped ........................ 208
Five-Position Electronically Shifted System ........................................................... 225 ASSIST...................................................................240
Transfer Case — If Equipped ........................ 210 System Malfunction ...................................... 225 ParkSense Sensors....................................... 241
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR SUSPENSION SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .................... 225 ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 241
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....................................213 To Activate ..................................................... 226 ParkSense Display ........................................ 241
To Set A Desired Speed ................................ 226 Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
Description..................................................... 213
To Vary The Speed Setting............................ 226 ParkSense ..................................................... 244
Air Suspension Modes .................................. 215
To Accelerate For Passing ........................... 227 Service The ParkSense Park Assist
Instrument Cluster Display Messages ......... 216
To Resume Speed ........................................ 227 System ........................................................... 244
Operation ....................................................... 216
To Deactivate ................................................ 227
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 245 VEHICLE LOADING ............................................. 268 DRIVING TIPS .......................................................283
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 245 Gross Vehicle Weight Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................... 283
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST Rating (GVWR) .............................................. 268 Driving Through Water ................................. 284
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....................................246 Payload .......................................................... 268 Off-Road Driving Tips .................................... 285
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)................ 268
Active Park Assist System............................. 246 Tire Size ......................................................... 268 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Rim Size ......................................................... 268 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ........................286
Operation/Display ......................................... 247 Inflation Pressure.......................................... 268 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ......286
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance Curb Weight ................................................... 268
General Information...................................... 290
Operation/Display ......................................... 251 Loading .......................................................... 268
BULB REPLACEMENT ..........................................291
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............................255 TRAILER TOWING................................................ 269
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 291
LaneSense Operation ................................... 255 Common Towing Definitions......................... 269
Replacing Exterior Bulbs............................... 293
Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 256 Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
FUSES....................................................................296
LaneSense Warning Message...................... 256 Weight ............................................................ 272
External Power Distribution Center ............. 297
Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 258 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Internal Power Distribution Center ............. 301
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ..............258 Weight Ratings) ............................................ 273
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................305
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — Trailer And Tongue Weight............................ 273
Jack Location................................................. 305
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................260 Towing Requirements .................................. 273
Removal Of Jack And Tools .......................... 306
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE Towing Tips ................................................... 278
Removing The Spare Tire ............................. 307
ENGINES ..............................................................263 SNOWPLOW ........................................................ 279
Preparations For Jacking .............................. 309
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE ..264 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 309
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel ................... 265 MOTORHOME, ETC.) ........................................... 280
To Stow The Flat Or Spare ........................... 312
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel................... 265 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Reinstalling The Jack And Tools................... 313
Diesel Exhaust Fluid...................................... 266 Vehicle ........................................................... 280 JUMP STARTING .................................................314
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage........................ 266 Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 315
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid ......................... 266 Models ........................................................... 281
Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 315
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................317
Models ........................................................... 281
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ...................................317
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................319 DEALER SERVICE ............................................... 336 TIRES .....................................................................355
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................320 Engine Oil — Gas Engine .............................. 337 Tire Safety Information ................................ 355
Two-Wheel Drive Models............................... 321 Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 338 Tires — General Information......................... 362
Four-Wheel Drive Models.............................. 322 Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............................. 338 Tire Types....................................................... 365
Emergency Tow Hooks — Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter — Diesel Spare Tires — If Equipped ............................ 366
If Equipped..................................................... 322 Engine ........................................................... 340 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........................ 368
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Tire Chains And Traction Devices ................ 368
SYSTEM (EARS) ...................................................322 Replacement — Diesel Engine...................... 341 Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 369
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................322 Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
Fuel — Diesel Engine..................................... 341 TIRE QUALITY GRADES ......................................370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Intervention Regeneration Strategy — Message Treadwear...................................................... 370
Process Flow (Diesel Engine) ....................... 342 Traction Grades............................................. 370
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
Diesel Exhaust Fluid...................................... 342 Temperature Grades..................................... 371
ENGINES ..............................................................323 Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................... 342 STORING THE VEHICLE ......................................371
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 324 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ................... 345 BODYWORK..........................................................371
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE ....327 Body Lubrication ........................................... 346 Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 371
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 346 Body And Underbody Maintenance ............. 371
B5 Biodiesel .................................................. 328 Exhaust System ............................................ 347 Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 372
Additional Maintenance — B6 To Cooling System ............................................. 348 INTERIORS ...........................................................374
B20 Biodiesel ................................................ 330 Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 374
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................331 (Diesel Engine) .............................................. 352 Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 374
3.6L Engine With Stop/Start ....................... 331 Brake System ............................................... 352 Leather Parts................................................. 375
5.7L Engine Without Stop/Start................... 332 Automatic Transmission .............................. 353 Glass Surfaces ............................................. 375
5.7L Engine With Stop/Start ........................ 333 Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle
3.0L Diesel Engine ........................................ 334 Fluid Level...................................................... 354
Checking Oil Level ........................................ 335 Transfer Case ............................................... 354
Adding Washer Fluid ..................................... 335 HOISTING ............................................................. 355
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 336
Pressure Washing ......................................... 336
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — DIESEL UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION

ENGINE ................................................................. 387 QUICK TIPS ...........................................................462
IDENTIFICATION DATA ........................................376
Engine ........................................................... 387 Introducing Uconnect.................................... 462
Vehicle Identification Number ..................... 376
Chassis........................................................... 389 Get Started .................................................... 462
BRAKE SYSTEM ..................................................376
Basic Voice Commands ................................ 463
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ..376
MULTIMEDIA Radio.............................................................. 464
Torque Specifications ................................... 376
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ........................................ 390 Media ............................................................. 464
FUEL REQUIREMENTS —
CYBERSECURITY ................................................ 390 Phone............................................................. 464
GASOLINE ENGINES ...........................................377 Voice Text Reply ............................................ 464
3.6L Engine.................................................... 377 UCONNECT SETTINGS ........................................ 391
Climate........................................................... 465
5.7L Engine.................................................... 378 Uconnect 3 Settings...................................... 391
Navigation...................................................... 465
Reformulated Gasoline ................................ 378 Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV Settings................. 405
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped ..................... 465
Materials Added To Fuel ............................... 378 Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display
Using Do Not Disturb ................................... 465
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ......................... 378 Settings.......................................................... 427
Android Auto™ — If Equipped ...................... 466
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION............ 447
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped ..................... 466
Vehicles.......................................................... 379 Safety Guidelines .......................................... 447
General Information...................................... 467
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 379 UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY ............... 448
Additional Information .................................. 467
MMT In Gasoline ........................................... 379 Introduction ................................................... 448
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 379 Radio Mode ................................................... 449 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........................ 380 Media Mode................................................... 451
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE .........380 Phone Mode .................................................. 453 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
Diesel Fuel Specifications ............................ 381 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................468
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements ....................... 381 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 459 Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 468
FLUID CAPACITIES — GASOLINE ENGINES.......383 Radio Operation ............................................ 459 Prepare A List ................................................ 468
FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESEL ENGINE ..............384 Media Mode................................................... 459 Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 468
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — GASOLINE IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
ENGINES ...............................................................384 IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 459
Engine ............................................................ 384 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ..... 461
Chassis .......................................................... 386 Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 461
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................468 WARRANTY INFORMATION ............................... 470

FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 468 MOPAR® PARTS ................................................. 470
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 468 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................... 470
In Mexico Contact.......................................... 469 In The 50 United States And
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 469 Washington, D.C............................................ 470
Customer Assistance For The Hearing In Canada ...................................................... 470
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .................... 469 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................... 471
Service Contract ........................................... 469
10
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving
off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial
and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Refer to
“Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that
FCA US LLC offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time
to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings
in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner's Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this
publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and care
about your satisfaction.
11
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
ESSENTIAL INFORMATION special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body 1
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C.
information you desire. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-Ray™,
ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these
equipment. items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete
listing of all subjects.
CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
This information is provided in fulfillment of the requirement by the United
SYMBOLS States Government, Department of Transportation, National Highway Traffic
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate Safety Administration, that “every manufacturer of trucks that are capable of
precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to “Warning accommodating slide-in campers, manufactured on or after April 1, 1973 shall
Lights and Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further provide... at the time of original purchase to the first person who purchases the
information on the symbols used in your vehicle. truck”... information on Truck Camper Loading.
A slide-in camper document is provided in your vehicle’s glove compartment
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS that contains your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), truck model, cargo
weight rating, and the forward/rearward limit of a camper. To obtain additional
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that
dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle, please visit
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
https://www.ramtrucks.com.
against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not
read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe
all Warnings and Cautions.
12
Figure 1 illustrates the dimensions describing the forward and rearward limits of the zone in which the Center of Gravity (CG) of a slide-in camper must be located,
to provide satisfactory vehicle handling and to prevent overload of the front and rear axles.
Figure 2 illustrates a proper match between truck and camper.
NOTE:
The camper Center of Gravity falls within the specified zone.
A — Forward Limit of Camper CG

B — Rearward Limit of Camper CG
13
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the NOTE:
truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of These ratings are also provided on the vehicle certification label located on the
installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer’s driver’s side B-pillar. See “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating” for
camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of more information. 1
passengers in the camper. The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper
cargo weight rating and the camper’s CG should fall within the truck’s manufacturer or an authorized dealer.
recommended CG zone when installed.
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the
front and rear wheels separately, to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads WARNING!
should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to get the total weight
injury or death.
below the ratings.
14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available while
Features/Benefits
 Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen
Access your Owner’s Information right through the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the radio
your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system vehicle is in motion, the system will display the
(if equipped).  Enhanced search and browsing capability
message “Feature not available while the vehicle
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect is in motion”.  Robust NAV application (if equipped)
Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect Apps button. Pre-Installed Features  Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites
From there, press the Vehicle User Guide icon on  Your User Guide – Updated in real-time category
your touchscreen. No Uconnect registration is  Icon and symbol glossary
required.  Touchscreen convenience
 Maintenance schedules and information  Warranty information
 Comprehensive icon and symbol glossary  Crucial driver information and assistance:
 Available when and where you need it  Operating Instructions
 Customizable interface  Warranty Information
 Multilingual  Fluid Level Standards
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will  Maintenance Schedules
be able to explore your warranty information and  Emergency Procedures
radio manual when and where you need them.  911 Contact and More
Your Uconnect system displays the Vehicle User
Guide on your touchscreen radio to assist in better TIP:
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to
understanding your vehicle. There’s no app to
Guide Touchscreen Icon download, no phone to connect and no external your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
device needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated
throughout the year, in real-time, so it never goes
out of date.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
KEYS NOTE: 5 — Lock

 In the ON/RUN position, all key fob buttons will 6 — Remote Start (If Equipped)
KEY F OB work until the vehicle reaches 2 mph (4 km/h). 7 — PANIC
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.  The key fob should not be placed next to the 8 — Emergency Key
The ignition system consists of a key fob with wireless charging pad (if equipped).
2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP In case the ignition switch does not change with
push button ignition system. The Remote Keyless the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
Entry system consists of a key fob and Keyless fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be
Enter-N-Go feature. verified by referring to the instrument cluster,
NOTE: which will display directions to follow.
 The key fob may not be detected if it is located NOTE:
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec- A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by
tronic device; these devices may block the key a message in the instrument cluster display, or by
fob’s wireless signal. the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light
no longer illuminates from key fob button pushes,
 If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless
then the key fob battery requires replacement.
Charging Pad, the key fob may not be detected
if it is placed within 15 cm (150 mm) of the pad. In a situation where the battery is low or fully depleted,
Refer to “Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped” a back up method can be used to operate the ignition
in this chapter for further information. switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side opposite
Key Fob of the emergency key) against the START/STOP ignition
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock all doors, button and push to operate the ignition switch.
tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped) as well as 1 — LED Indicator Light
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to 2 — Unlock
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld key 3 — Tailgate Lowering (If Equipped)
fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the 4 — Air Suspension Remote Lowering
vehicle to activate the system.
(If Equipped)
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors And Tailgate Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further Vehicle) — If Equipped
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
information.
once to unlock the driver’s door. Push the unlock For easy entry and loading, your vehicle
button twice within five seconds to unlock all Using The Panic Alarm can be lowered by pushing the key fob air
doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push the suspension lowering button two times.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the Panic button on the key fob. When the Panic Alarm When key fob lowering is requested, the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will is activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will vehicle will send a series of chirps and flashes to
also turn on. pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on. alert the customer that the operation has begun
NOTE: and will continue these alerts until it successfully
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes
The instrument cluster display or Uconnect lowers.
unless you turn it off by either pushing the Panic
Settings are setup for driver door first, otherwise button a second time or drive the vehicle at a The following conditions must be met for the
this will unlock all doors. speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater. vehicle to lower remotely:
To Lock The Doors And Tailgate NOTE:  The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit
Push and release the lock button on the key fob  The interior lights will turn off if you place the
(Park) ride height.
to lock all doors, the tailgate, and the RamBox ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the  The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
(if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior  All doors must be closed.
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. lights and horn will remain on.
 The key fob must be out of the vehicle.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock  You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from
the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the NOTE:
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises Ensure the vehicle is clear of all objects, pets, and
doors are locked with the key fob. This feature can
emitted by the system. people prior to remote lowering.
be turned on or turned off.
Canceling Remote Lowering
NOTE:
Vehicle lowering can be cancelled at anytime.
Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you
When vehicle lowering is cancelled, the vehicle will
are in the vehicle will activate the vehicle security
raise up to the next defined level and lock out the
alarm system. Opening a door with the vehicle
remote lowering feature until the ignition has been
security alarm system activated will cause the
cycled ON/OFF.
alarm to sound. Push the unlock button to deac-
tivate the vehicle security alarm system.
To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air 1. Remove the emergency key by pushing and
suspension lowering button one time during the holding the release button located on the
lowering process. When vehicle lowering is right side of the key fob, while pulling the
cancelled, the horn will chirp two times and the emergency key out with your other hand.
turn signal lamps will flash four times. Once raising
is completed, the horn will chirp one time. 2
NOTE:
Refer to “Active-Level Four Corner Air Suspension
System” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With Emergency Key
Remote Control 3. Hold the key fob with the button side facing
The replacement battery model is one CR2450 down, and locate the small rectangular gap on
battery. the left side between the housing and the back
Emergency Key Removal cover of the key fob. Use the emergency key or
NOTE: a small screwdriver to pry open the left side of
 Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. 1 — Emergency Key the fob cover, applying pressure until the cover
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ 2 — Emergency Key Release Button snaps open.
perchlorate for further information.
 Do not touch the battery terminals that are on 2. Completely remove the emergency key from
the back housing or the printed circuit board. the key fob.
 Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the
key fob above the top row buttons blinks when
a button is pressed. The coin battery should last
a minimum of 3 years of normal vehicle usage.
Key Fob Back Cover Removal — Left Side

4. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key

fob, which is positioned further to the edge
than the left side gap. Pry open the right side,
and remove the back cover.
Key Fob Battery Location Key Fob Battery Replacement

NOTE: 7. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top
When replacing the battery, ensure the + sign on edge of the back cover with the top of the fob,
the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the and press the edges into the interlocking
Key Fob Back Cover Removal — Right Side new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause hinges until all edges snap together with no
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean large visual gaps.
5. Remove the battery by using your thumb to it with rubbing alcohol. 8. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into
slide the battery downward and back toward
6. Replace the battery by using your thumb to place.
the key ring.
push down and slide the battery under the
small lip on the top edge of the opening. NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by
qualified technicians. If the battery requires
replacement, see an authorized dealer.
General Information La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

WARNING! siguientes dos condiciones:
The following regulatory statement applies to all
 The integrated key fob contains a coin cell Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a vehicle: cause interferencia perjudicial y
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que 2
in just two hours and can lead to death.
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is pueda causar su operación no deseada.
 If you think a battery may have been swal- subject to the following two conditions:
lowed or placed inside any part of the body, NOTE:
1. This device may not cause harmful
seek immediate medical attention. Changes or modifications not expressly approved
interference, and
by the party responsible for compliance could void
 Keep new and used batteries away from chil- 2. This device must accept any interference the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
dren. If the battery compartment does not received, including interference that may
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
cause undesired operation. IGNITION SWITCH
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR KEYLESS PUSH B UTTON I GNITION
Programming Additional Key Fobs dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de This feature allows the driver to operate the
Programming the key fob may be performed by an licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
authorized dealer. conditions suivantes: the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob is in the
NOTE: 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et passenger compartment.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to operating positions; three of which are labeled and
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
another vehicle. will illuminate when in position. The three positions
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement. are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is
START; during START, RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: The push button ignition can be placed in the

In case the ignition switch does not change with following modes: WARNING!
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or OFF  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
depleted battery. In this situation, a back up or in a location accessible to children, and do
 The engine is stopped.
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency  Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode.
key) of the key fob against the START/STOP alarm, etc.) are still available. A child could operate power windows, other
ignition button, with your foot applied on the brake ACC controls, or move the vehicle.
pedal, and push to operate the ignition switch.
 Engine is not started.  Do not leave children or animals inside parked
 Some electrical devices are available. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
RUN
 Driving position.
 All the electrical devices are available. CAUTION!
START An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
 The engine will start.
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
The engine only runs in the ON/RUN ignition
Keyless Push Button Ignition  When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
position or from a remote start request.
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
1 — OFF In case the ignition switch does not change with the
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
2 — ACC (Accessory) push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
access to an unlocked vehicle. depleted battery. In this situation, a back up method
3 — ON/RUN
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- against the START/STOP ignition button and push to
dren should be warned not to touch the parking operate the ignition switch.
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!

(GASOLINE)  Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon
HOW TO USE R EMOTE S TART Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
All of the following conditions must be met before
Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause 2
serious injury or death when inhaled.
the engine will remote start:
 Gear selector in PARK  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start System, windows, door
 Doors closed locks or other controls could cause serious
Back Up Starting Method  Hood closed injury or death.
NOTE:  Hazard switch off
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) REMOTE START ABORT M ESSAGE
vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is located
 Battery at an acceptable charge level The following messages will display in the
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s  PANIC button not pushed instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter-N-Go  Fuel meets minimum requirement remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
system from starting the vehicle.  Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
 System not disabled from previous remote start
NOTE: event  Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And  Vehicle security alarm not active  Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Operating" for further information.
 Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated  Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
 Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
TO ENTER R EMOTE S TART MODE TO EXIT R EMOTE START MODE when the remote start is activated. These features will
stay on through the duration of Remote Start or until
Push and release the Remote Start button on the WITHOUT DRIVING THE V EHICLE the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
key fob twice within five seconds. The parking Push and release the remote start button one time
lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the
NOTE:
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute The Remote Start Comfort System can be acti-
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the cycle.
vehicle has started, the engine will run for vated and deactivated through the Uconnect
15 minutes. NOTE: System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will media” for further information on Remote Start
NOTE: disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Comfort System operation.
 If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote remote start request.
Start will automatically lock the doors. GENERAL INFORMATION
 If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
TO EXIT R EMOTE START MODE A ND The following regulatory statement applies to all
the vehicle will start and then shut down in DRIVE THE V EHICLE Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
10 seconds. vehicle:
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and
 The park lamps will turn on and remain on release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
during Remote Start mode. the doors and disarm the vehicle security alarm with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
 For security, power window and power sunroof
15 minute cycle, place the ignition in the ON/RUN subject to the following two conditions:
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. position. 1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
 The engine can be started two consecutive REMOTE START C OMFORT SYSTEMS —
times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key fob. 2. This device must accept any interference
However, the ignition must be placed in the
I F E QUIPPED received, including interference that may
ON/RUN position before you can repeat the When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering cause undesired operation.
start sequence for a third cycle. wheel and driver heated seat features will
automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm weather,
the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Development
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
 Battery at an acceptable charge level
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de This system uses the key fob to start the
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux engine conveniently from outside the  PANIC button not pushed
conditions suivantes: vehicle while still maintaining security.  Fuel meets minimum requirement
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et The system has a range of approximately  System not disabled from previous remote start 2
300 ft (91 m). event
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le NOTE:  Vehicle security alarm not active
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre  Obstructions between the vehicle and the key
 Water In Fuel indicator light is not illuminated
le fonctionnement. fob may reduce this range.
 Wait To Start indicator light is not illuminated
 The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait To
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las Start indicator light to extinguish before cranking the  Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
siguientes dos condiciones: engine. This allows time for the engine pre-heat is not illuminated
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cycle to heat the cylinder air, and is normal in cold
cause interferencia perjudicial y weather. Refer to “Warning Lights And Messages” in WARNING!
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further  Do not start or run an engine in a closed
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que information on the Wait To Start indicator light and garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
pueda causar su operación no deseada. the pre-heat cycle. Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
NOTE:
HOW TO USE R EMOTE S TART can cause serious injury or death when
Changes or modifications not expressly approved All of the following conditions must be met before inhaled.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the engine will remote start:
 Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  Gear selector in PARK of the Remote Start System, windows, door
 Doors closed locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
 Hood closed
 Hazard switch off
SENTRY KEY CAUTION!

NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the compatible with some aftermarket remote programming a blank key fob to the vehicle elec-
engine. The system does not need to be armed or starting systems. Use of these systems may tronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of result in vehicle starting problems and loss of programmed.
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. security protection. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle authorized dealer.
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle GENERAL INFORMATION
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The KEY P ROGRAMMING The following regulatory statement applies to all
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
Programming key fobs may be performed at an
another vehicle. vehicle:
authorized dealer.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for REPLACEMENT KEYS with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
NOTE:
on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a subject to the following two conditions:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
electronics can be used to start and operate the 1. This device may not cause harmful
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, interference, and
that someone attempted to start the engine with
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob 2. This device must accept any interference
is used to start the engine but there is an issue CAUTION! received, including interference that may
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start cause undesired operation.
and shut off after two seconds.  Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal
unattended.
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
ten seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the  For vehicles equipped with Keyless
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer. to place the ignition in the OFF position.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM  Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle in the same exterior zone. Refer to "Keyless
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux doors, tailgate, and ignition for unauthorized Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry" in “Doors” in this
conditions suivantes: operation. When the vehicle security alarm is chapter for further information.
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et activated, interior switches for door locks are 2
 Push the lock button on the key fob.
disabled. The system will turn the horn off after
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 3. If any doors are open, close them.
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le 8 cycles if the trigger remains active and then
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre the vehicle security alarm will rearm itself. The vehicle security alarm will set when you use
le fonctionnement. the power door locks, or use the key fob to lock the
TO ARM THE SYSTEM doors. After all the doors are locked and closed,
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las the vehicle security light, in the instrument panel
siguientes dos condiciones: Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security cluster, will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to
alarm: indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y 1. Remove the key from the ignition system. is set, the vehicle security light will flash at a slower
Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And rate to indicate that the system is armed.
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar Operating" for further information.
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM
pueda causar su operación no deseada.  Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using
NOTE: the vehicle: any of the following methods:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved  Push the lock button on the interior power
1. Push the unlock button on the key fob.
by the party responsible for compliance could void door lock switch with the driver and/or 2. Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle
the user’s authority to operate the equipment. passenger door open. with a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passive entry door handle. If equipped, refer to
"Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry" in
“Doors” in this chapter for further information.
3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect

your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
DOORS WARNING!
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one MANUAL D OOR L OCKS  Do not leave children or animals inside parked
of the previously described arming sequences has vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the may cause serious injury or death.
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. lock knob down. The lock knobs will unlock when
the interior handle is used to open the doors.  For personal security and safety in the event
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you
security alarm. drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle  Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto-
security alarm will remain armed when the battery matic transmission into PARK, apply the
is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove
the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the the key fobs from vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
vehicle security alarm.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is a number of reasons. A child or others could
Door Lock Knob
taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds Front doors may be opened with the inside door be warned not to touch the parking brake,
between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the trigger handle without lifting the lock knob. brake pedal or the gear selector.
remains active and then the vehicle security Doors locked before closing will remain locked  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
alarm will rearm itself. when closed. is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
on your vehicle. Children should be warned not to touch the
The vehicle security alarm will not arm/disarm parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
if you lock/unlock the doors using the manual selector.
door lock.
(Continued)
WARNING!
POWER S IDE STEPS — I F EQUIPPED
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, The Power Side Steps will extend a step for easier
or in a location accessible to children, and do entry and exit of the vehicle.
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped When configured for “Auto” mode, the Power Side
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN Steps will deploy when any of the doors are 2
mode. A child could operate power windows, opened, or when the deploy setting is activated
other controls, or move the vehicle. through the touchscreen. When configured for
“Store” mode, the steps will stay in their position
but can also be deployed manually through the
POWER D OOR L OCKS — IF EQUIPPED “Controls” menu within the radio.
Power Door Lock Switches
The power door lock switches are on each front If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), or if
door trim panel. Use these switches to lock or If you push the power door lock switch while the
the retract setting is selected in the touchscreen,
unlock the doors. key fob is located inside the vehicle, and any front
the steps will retract.
door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
NOTE: prevents you from accidentally locking your key fob Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the in the vehicle. Removing the key fob or closing the additional information.
vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is located door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic sound if the key fob is in the ignition switch and a
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
device; these devices may block the key fob’s door is open, as a reminder to remove the key fob. E NTRY
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter-N-Go
system from starting the vehicle. The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
NOTE: NOTE:
 Passive Entry may be programmed on or off. All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
further information. unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
 If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, Key Fob In Vehicle:
resulting in a slower response time. To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
 If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock automatic door unlock feature which will function if
vehicle will re-lock and will arm the security
alarm (if equipped). NOTE: the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
 The vehicle’s security alarm can be armed/ If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door
disarmed by pushing the Passive Entry key fob doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all
lock/unlock buttons (if equipped). driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock open doors have been closed the vehicle checks
Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid
 The key fob may not be able to be detected by Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the vehicle's
Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located Passive Entry key fobs is detected inside the
media” for further information.
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec- vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key fobs
tronic device; these devices may block the key To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry
fob's wireless signal and prevent the passive With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft system automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and
entry handle from locking/unlocking the (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt
vehicle. front passenger door handle to unlock all doors ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry key fob
To Unlock From The Driver's Side: automatically. The interior door panel lock knob can be locked in the vehicle).
will raise when the door is unlocked.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front
driver door handle to unlock the driver's door
automatically. The interior door panel lock knob
will raise when the door is unlocked.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:  The LED light on the key fob will not blink if the
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs key fob battery is low or fully depleted, but a low
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front key fob battery condition will still support the
door handles, push the door handle lock button to Passive Entry system functionality. When the
lock all doors. key fob battery is low, the instrument cluster will
display a message indicating that the key fob 2
battery is low. Refer to “Keys” in this chapter for
further information.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the
key fob lock button or the lock button located on
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking the vehicle’s interior door panel.
NOTE: General Information
 After pushing the door handle lock button, you The following regulatory statement applies to all
must wait two seconds before you can lock or Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door vehicle:
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock handle. This is done to allow you to check if the This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the without the vehicle reacting and unlocking. Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
door handle lock button. This could unlock the subject to the following two conditions:
 The Passive Entry system depends on a key fob
door(s).
that is not fully discharged of its coin battery 1. This device may not cause harmful
capacity. interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de I F E QUIPPED To provide a safer environment for children riding in
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux The auto door lock feature default condition is the rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your
conditions suivantes: enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock vehicle have the Child-Protection Door Lock system.
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can blade screwdriver (or emergency key) to rotate the
be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per dial to engage and disengage the Child-Protection
written request of the customer. Please see an locks. When the system on a door is engaged, that
authorized dealer for service. door can only be opened by using the outside door
le fonctionnement.
handle even if the inside door lock is in the
Automatic Doors Unlock — If Equipped
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las unlocked position.
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle
siguientes dos condiciones:
when either front door is opened. This will occur
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no only after the vehicle has been shifted into the
cause interferencia perjudicial y PARK position after the vehicle has been driven
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar (shifted out of PARK and all doors closed).
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que Automatic Doors Unlock Programming —
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
If Equipped
NOTE: The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be
Changes or modifications not expressly approved enabled or disabled through the vehicle’s
by the party responsible for compliance could void Uconnect system.
the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for Child Lock Control
NOTE:
Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance
with local laws.
WARNING!
NOTE: PROGRAMMING T HE M EMORY FEATURE
 Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a To create a new memory profile, perform the
can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
collision. Remember that the rear doors cannot following:
 Be sure to program the radio presets prior to
be opened from the inside door handle when the 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
programming the memory settings.
Child Protection Door Locks are engaged. position (do not start the engine). 2
The driver memory settings switch is located on the
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
driver door, next to the door handle, and consists
NOTE: preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors,
of three buttons:
 After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock
adjustable pedals (if equipped), and radio
 The set (S) button, which is used to activate the station presets).
system, always test the door from the inside to memory save function.
make certain it is in the desired position. 3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch,
 The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall and then push the desired memory button
 For emergency exit with the system engaged,
either of two pre-programmed memory profiles. (1 or 2) within five seconds. The instrument
push the front door lock switch to the unlock
position, roll down the window, and open the cluster display will display which memory
door with the outside door handle. position is being set.
NOTE:
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED  Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
This feature allows the driver to save up to two in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to
different memory profiles for easy recall through recall a memory profile.
a memory switch. Each memory profile saves
 To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
desired position settings for the following features:
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
 Driver’s seat Entry Key Fob To Memory” in this section for
 Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off) further information.
Memory Switch
(if equipped)
 Adjustable pedals (if equipped)
 Side mirrors
 A set of desired radio station presets
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE NOTE:

Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
SEATS
KEYLESS ENTRY KEY F OB T O M EMORY settings by pushing the set (S) button, and then Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button on of the vehicle.
two saved memory profiles by pushing the unlock the key fob.
button on the key fob. WARNING!
MEMORY POSITION R ECALL
NOTE:  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
Before programming your key fob you must select NOTE: or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature The vehicle speed must be lower than 5 mph riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
through the Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect (8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is ously injured or killed.
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. attempted when the vehicle speed is greater than
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
To program your key fob, perform the following: 5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be displayed in the
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
instrument cluster display.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
position.
push the desired memory button number (1 or 2) killed.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2. or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
desired memory position.  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
NOTE:
and using a seat belt properly.
If a memory profile has not already been set, refer A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the
to "Programming The Memory Feature" in this memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When
section for instructions on how to set a memory a recall is canceled, the driver's seat and the
profile. adjustable pedals (if equipped) stop moving.
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the A delay of one second will occur before another
memory switch, then within five seconds push recall can be selected.
and release the button labeled (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will
display in the instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
MANUAL F RONT S EAT ADJUSTMENT WARNING!

Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward  Adjusting a seat while driving may be
Adjustment dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
Both front seats are adjustable forward or result in loss of control which could cause a
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is collision and serious injury or death. 2
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
each seat. seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Manual Recline Lever
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment WARNING!

The recline lever is located on the outboard side of
 Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly,
lift the lever, lean back to the desired position and actuating the handle. The seatback may swing
release the lever. To return the seatback to its forward and hit you causing injury.
normal upright position, lean forward and lift the  To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in the back and actuate the handle, then position
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar upright position. the seatback in the desired position.
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and
slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
once you have reached the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped MANUAL R EAR S EAT ADJUSTMENT

The seat is divided into three segments. The
outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total WARNING!
width of the seat. On some models, the back of the
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
center portion (20%) easily folds down to provide
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
an armrest/center storage compartment.
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or collision.
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped

The recliner handle is located on the front of Rear Seat Recliner Handle Locations
the rear outboard seat cushions. To adjust the NOTE:
seatback, lift upward on the handle, and slide the This feature is not available if vehicle is equipped
seat bottom forward. The lower portion of the with rear bench seat.
seatback will tilt rearward. When you reach the
desired position, release the handle. WARNING!
Center Portion Of Front Bench Seat Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
Center Portion Folded Forward

POWER F RONT S EAT ADJUSTMENT — Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

WARNING!
I F EQUIPPED The seat can be adjusted both forward and
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
Some models may be equipped with eight-way rearward. The seat will move in the direction of dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
power driver and passenger seats. The power seat the switch. Release the switch when the desired result in loss of control which could cause a
switches are located on the outboard side of the position has been reached. collision and serious injury or death. 2
driver and passenger seat cushions. There are two
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
power seat switches that are used to control the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
movement of the seat cushion and the seatback. The height of the seats can be adjusted up or Serious injury or death could result from a
down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of poorly adjusted seat belt.
seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
position has been reached. the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down the seat belt, which could result in serious
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in injury or death.
four directions. Pull upward or push downward on
the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear
of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the CAUTION!
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached. Do not place any article under a power seat or
Power Seat Switches impede its ability to move as it may cause
Reclining The Seatback damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
1 — Power Seat Switch
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward become limited if movement is stopped by an
2 — Power Seatback Switch
or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or obstruction in the seat’s path.
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on NOTE:
where you have the driver’s seat positioned when The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position. the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar.
The power lumbar switch is located on the  When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled)
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch position, the driver’s seat will move about through the programmable features in the
forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches “Multimedia” for further information.
Pushing the switch upward or downward will raise (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED
or lower the position of the support. return to its previously set position when you
place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position. On some models, the front and rear seats may be
 When you remove the key fob from the ignition,
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions
the driver’s seat will move to a position and seatbacks.
0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if
the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 inches
WARNING!
and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm)  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
its previously set position when you place the diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
ignition to the ACC or RUN position. alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
 The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled condition must exercise care when using the
when the driver’s seat position is less than seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
Power Lumbar Switch 0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. temperatures, especially if used for long
At this position, there is no benefit to the driver periods of time.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.  Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
entering and exiting the vehicle. and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
setting profile. Refer to “Driver Memory Settings — overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
If Equipped” in this chapter for further information. heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats Rear Heated Seats  Push the heated seat button a third time to
The heated seats control buttons are located on On some models, the two outboard rear seats are turn the LO setting on.
the center instrument panel below the equipped with heated seats. The heated seat  Push the heated seat button a fourth time to
touchscreen, and are also located within the switches for these seats are located on the rear of turn the heating elements off.
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. the center console.
NOTE: 2
 Push the heated seat button once to turn the  The level of heat selected will stay on until the
HI setting on. operator changes it.
 Push the heated seat button a second time  Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
to turn the MED setting on. within two to five minutes.
 Push the heated seat button a third time to  The engine must be running for the heated
turn the LO setting on. seats to operate.
 Push the heated seat button a fourth time to VENTILATED S EATS — I F EQUIPPED
turn the heating elements off.
Front Ventilated Seats
NOTE:
Rear Heated Seat Switches Located in the seat cushion are small fans that
 The engine must be running for the heated
draw the air from the passenger compartment and
seats to operate. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
move air through fine perforations in the seat
 The level of heat selected will stay on until the rear passengers to operate the seats independently.
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger
operator changes it. You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat settings.
cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start operate at three speeds, HI, MED and LO.
of heat in use.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
 Push the heated seat button once to turn the
driver’s seat can be programmed to come on
HI setting on.
during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the  Push the heated seat button a second time
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in to turn the MED setting on.
“Multimedia” for further information.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are PLASTIC G ROCERY BAG RETAINERS
located on the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen, and are also located within the Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. handles are attached to the underside of the rear seat.
To access these hooks, flip the rear seat bottom
 Press the ventilated seat button once to upward.
choose HI.
 Press the ventilated seat button a second HEAD RESTRAINTS
time to choose MED. Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
 Press the ventilated seat button a third time injury by restricting head movement in the event of
to choose LO. Rear Ventilated Seat Switches a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
 Press the ventilated seat button a fourth There are two ventilated seat switches that allow
above the top of your ear.
time to turn the ventilation off. the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. The fans operate at three speeds: WARNING!
NOTE: HI, MED, and LO.
The engine must be running for the ventilated  All occupants, including the driver, should not
seats to operate.  Push the ventilated seat button once to operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start choose HI. the head restraints are placed in their proper
On models that are equipped with remote start, the  Push the ventilated seat button a second positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
ventilated seats can be programmed to come on time to choose MED. injury in the event of a crash.
during a remote start.  Head restraints should never be adjusted
 Push the ventilated seat button a third time
This feature can be programmed through the to choose LO. while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in with the head restraints improperly adjusted
“Multimedia” for further information.  Push the ventilated seat button a fourth time or removed could cause serious injury or
to turn the ventilated seat off. death in the event of a collision.
Rear Ventilated Seats
NOTE:
On some models, the two outboard rear seats are The engine must be running for the ventilated
equipped with ventilated seats. The rear ventilated seats to operate.
seat control switches are located on the rear of the
center console.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of
the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of your head.
FRONT HEAD R ESTRAINTS 2
Your vehicle is equipped with front four way driver
and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location Forward Adjustment
head restraint, and push downward on the head To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of NOTE:
restraint. the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
NOTE: desired and release. To adjust the head restraint the center head restraint is not adjustable or
The head restraints should only be removed by rearward, pull the top of the head restraint to the removable.
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. forward most position and release. The head
If either of the head restraints require removal, see restraint will return to the rear most position. WARNING!
an authorized dealer.  All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
 Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS NOTE: To unlock the steering column, push the lever
The head restraints should only be removed by downward. To tilt the steering column, move the
The outboard head restraints are non-adjustable, qualified technicians, for service purposes only. steering wheel upward or downward as desired.
but can be folded down for improved rearward If any of the head restraints require removal, see To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
visibility. Push the button on the outboard side of an authorized dealer. the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
the head restraint to release. To return the head desired. To lock the steering column into position,
For child restraint tethering, refer to “Occupant
restraint to its upright position, push up on the push the lever upward until fully engaged.
Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further
head restraint until it locks back into place.
information.
WARNING!
STEERING WHEEL Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
Failure to follow this warning may result in
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
serious injury or death.
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping
lever is located on the steering column, below the
multifunction lever. HEATED S TEERING WHEEL —
Release Button
I F E QUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
WARNING! that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The
heated steering wheel has only one temperature
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been
lowered position could result in serious injury or turned on, it will stay on until the operator turns it
death in a collision. Always make sure the off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on
outboard head restraints are in their upright when it is already warm.
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
The center head restraint is not adjustable or Tilt/Telescoping Lever

removable.
The heated steering wheel control button is The adjustable pedal switch is located on the
located on the center instrument panel below the WARNING! instrument panel, below the headlight switch.
touchscreen, and are also located within the  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
 Press the heated steering wheel button once
to turn the heating element on.
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical 2
conditions must exercise care when using the
 Press the heated steering wheel button a steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
second time to turn the heating element off. even at low temperatures, especially if used
NOTE: for long periods.
The engine must be running for the heated  Do not place anything on the steering wheel
steering wheel to operate. that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start or steering wheel covers of any type and mate-
Adjustable Pedals Switch
On models that are equipped with remote start, the rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
heated steering wheel can be programmed to to overheat.  The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition
come on during a remote start. placed in the OFF position.
This feature can be programmed through the DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —  The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle
is in REVERSE or when the Speed Control
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information. IF EQUIPPED System or Adaptive Cruise Control systems are
on. The following messages will appear on vehi-
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow
cles equipped with an instrument cluster display
a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel
if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when
tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake
the system is locked out: “Adjustable Pedal
and accelerator pedals to move toward or away
Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjust-
from the driver to provide improved position with
able Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
the steering wheel.
NOTE: MIRRORS AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR —

 Always adjust the pedals to a position that I F E QUIPPED
allows full pedal travel. I NSIDE DAY/NIGHT M IRROR —
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
 Further small adjustments may be necessary to I F E QUIPPED and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
find the best possible seat/pedal position.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, adjusted to center on the view through the rear
 For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory and right for various drivers. The mirror should be window.
Settings, you can use your key fob or the adjusted to center on the view through the rear This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel window. glare from vehicles behind you.
to return the adjustable pedals to
pre-programmed positions. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be NOTE:
reduced by moving the small control under the The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when
 Refer to “Driver Memory Settings” in this mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
chapter for further information. the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in viewing.
the day position (toward the windshield).
WARNING! The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on
or off through the touchscreen.
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is
moving. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always adjust the pedals while the
vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable
pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable Automatic Dimming Mirror
pedal's path.
CAUTION! DRIVER' S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch.
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
DIMMING MIRROR — I F EQUIPPED
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is adjust.
and wipe the mirror clean. controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the 2
and will automatically adjust for headlight glare
four arrows for the direction that you want the
when the inside mirror adjusts.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS mirror to move.
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside

POWER M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED
mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic The controls for the power mirrors are located on
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the the driver's door trim panel.
inside mirror.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps under
the outside mirrors, they can be turned off through
the Uconnect display. For further information, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.
WARNING! Power Mirror Movement

Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying too
Power Mirror Controls
much on your passenger side convex mirror
could cause you to collide with another vehicle 1 — Mirror Direction Control
or other object. Use your inside mirror when 2 — Right Mirror Selection
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
3 — Left Mirror Selection
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles
will not have a convex passenger side mirror.
POWER F OLDING O UTSIDE M IRRORS Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors  When pushing the power fold button 10 or more
times in one minute the system shuts down for
FOR STANDARD A ND TRAILER TOW — You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
one minute to protect the motors from over
the following occurs:
I F EQUIPPED heating.
 The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be folding. Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be
 The mirrors are accidentally manually
drive position. manually folded both forward and rearward to
folded/unfolded.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located prevent damage.
 The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
between the power mirror switches L (left) and
R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will  The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
fold in, push the switch a second time and the speeds.
mirrors will return to the normal driving position. To Reset The Power Folding Mirrors:
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically 1. Using the power folding mirror switch, move
cycled, a potential extra button push is required to the mirror to its normal driving (home)
get the mirrors back to the home position. If the position.
mirror does not electrically fold, check for ice or 2. Using the power folding mirror switch, move
dirt buildup at the pivot area which can cause the mirror to the full retract position (this may
excessive drag. require multiple button pushes). This resets
them to their normal position. Folding Mirror
NOTE:
CAUTION!
 The power fold mirrors are designed to operate
while the vehicle is stationary or traveling at It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
moderate speeds. If you attempt to power fold full rearward position to resist damage when
the mirrors at high speeds they may not fully entering a car wash or a narrow location.
open or close. You should slow down to a
moderate speed and complete the operation.
Power Folding Mirror Switch

TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS — A small blindspot mirror is located next to main TILT SIDE MIRRORS I N REVERSE —
mirror and can be adjusted separately.
I F EQUIPPED I F E QUIPPED
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic
mirror head to provide a greater vision range when outside mirror positioning which will aid the
towing extra-wide loads. To change position driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front 2
inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly
rotated (flipped in or out). downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE
position. Each stored memory setting will have an
associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position.
Blindspot Mirror NOTE:
HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost This feature can be programmed through the
or ice. This feature will be activated Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
whenever you turn on the rear window “Multimedia” for further information.
Trailer Towing Position defroster (if equipped).
NOTE: Refer to “Climate Controls” in this chapter for
Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to further information.
entering an automated car wash.
I LLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR — To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun
visor downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor
I F EQUIPPED along the “Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun the desired position.
visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down
and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights will
turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover
turns off the light.
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender 4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror HEADLIGHT SWITCH Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — The headlight switch is located on the left side of operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the
If Equipped the instrument panel. This switch controls the second detent for headlight, parking light, and
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel light operation.
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block panel lights, cargo light (if equipped) and fog lights
out the sun. (if equipped).
DAYTIME RUNNING L IGHTS (DRLS) — HIGH/LOW B EAM SWITCH NOTE:

I F EQUIPPED  The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto Dim
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when panel to switch the headlights to high beam.
High Beams” within your Uconnect settings, as well
the engine is started. This provides a constant Pulling the multifunction lever back toward the
as turning the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
steering wheel will turn the low beams back on,
"lights on" condition until the ignition is placed in Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for 2
the OFF position. If the parking brake is applied, or shut the high beams off.
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn off.
 Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
the same side of the vehicle may turn off for the
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
illuminate.
cause the system to function improperly.
NOTE: High/Low Beam Switch
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAM HEADLAMP Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror
was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance.
be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, CONTROL — I F EQUIPPED
See a local authorized dealer.
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
further information. To Activate
provides increased forward lighting at night by
1. The Automatic High Beams are enabled
MULTIFUNCTION L EVER automating high beam control through the use of a
through the Uconnect system. Refer to
digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror or
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of a windshield mounted camera. These cameras detect “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
the steering column. vehicle specific light and automatically switch from high further information.
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is 2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
out of view. headlight position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you
(toward front of vehicle) to engage the high
beam mode.
Multifunction Lever
NOTE: 90 seconds after the ignition is placed in the OFF HEADLIGHT DELAY
The Automatic High Beams will not activate until position. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the
the vehicle is at or above 12 mph (20 km/h). headlight switch counterclockwise to the O (off) To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
position. headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
To Deactivate approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or NOTE: initiated when the ignition is turned off while the
rearward in vehicle) to manually deactivate The engine must be running before the headlights headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch
the system (normal operation of low beams). will come on in the Automatic mode. is cycled off. Headlight delay can be canceled by
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL L IGHTS either turning the headlight switch on then off, or by
reactivate the system. placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, from the O (off) position, rotate the headlight
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beams can also be This feature can be programmed through the
deactivated through the Uconnect system. Refer to switch clockwise to the first detent. To turn off the
parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further “Multimedia” for further information.
information. the O (off) position.
HEADLIGHTS O N WITH WIPERS LIGHTS-O N R EMINDER
FLASH-TO-P ASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
(A VAILABLE WITH A UTOMATIC If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left
on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. HEADLIGHTS O NLY) chime will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn
and remain on, until the lever is released.
on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are
FRONT FOG L IGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
AUTOMATIC H EADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn lights or low beam headlights and push in the
This system automatically turns your headlights on off when the wipers are turned off, if they were center of the headlight switch control knob.
or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the turned on by this feature. Pushing the headlight switch control knob a
system on, turn the headlight switch to the extreme second time will turn the front fog lights off.
clockwise position aligning the indicator with the NOTE:
AUTO on the headlight switch. When the system is This feature can be programmed through the
on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
This means your headlights will stay on for up to “Multimedia” for further information.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED If the vehicle’s speed is 0 mph (0 km/h), these
lights can also be turned on using the switch
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, located just inside the pickup box, on the lower
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn part of the bed light lens. A telltale will illuminate in
signal (right or left) will flash three times then the instrument cluster display when these lights
automatically turn off. are on. Pushing the switch a second time will turn 2
the lights off.
CARGO LIGHT WITH BED L IGHTS —
I F E QUIPPED NOTE:
The cargo light will automatically turn off if the
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) are vehicle is shifted into NEUTRAL or DRIVE, and will
Front Fog Light Switch turned on by pushing the cargo lights button turn back on when the vehicle is shifted into PARK
located on the lower half of the headlight switch. or REVERSE. The bed lights are not affected by
If the fog lights are off, one of the fog lights will
gear selection.
illuminate depending on the direction in which the
vehicle is turning. This will provide increased
visibility while turning, depending on the angle of
the steering wheel.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster
display will flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
If either light remains on and does not flash, or Bed Light Switch Without RamBox
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when
the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indi-
cator bulb is defective.
NOTE: Courtesy/Reading Lights

Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is The overhead console lights can also be operated
placed in the ON mode. individually as reading lights by pushing the
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is corresponding buttons.
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off.
Bed Light Switch With RamBox INTERIOR LIGHTS

The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn COURTESY LIGHTS
on for approximately 60 seconds when a key fob
unlock button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the
Entry feature. front doors are opened, the ambient dimmer
control is rotated to the highest detent, or the Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
BATTERY SAVER Dome ON button is pushed on the overhead 1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load console. Also, if your vehicle is equipped with
2 — Dome Defeat Button
shedding is provided for both the interior and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), and the unlock
button is pushed on the key fob, the courtesy 3 — Dome ON Button
exterior lights.
and dome lights will turn on.
If the ignition is in the OFF position and any door is
Three types of Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights are
left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is
available for your vehicle.
rotated all the way up to the dome on position for
10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically  Push button on/off
turn off.  Push lens on/off
 Push round puck lens on/off (if equipped with
Dual Pane Sunroof)
I LLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the puddle lamps
located beneath the outside mirrors (if equipped). 2
The lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off
once the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
position from the OFF position.
Push Lens On/Off Rear Courtesy Light Dimmer Controls The front courtesy overhead console and door
NOTE: 1 — Ambient Light Control courtesy lights will not turn off if the Dome ON
The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the 2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control button on the overhead console is pushed.
switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
have been turned off before exiting the vehicle. Dome Defeat button on the overhead console is
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is pushed.
the right dimmer control upward will increase the
turned off, they will automatically turn off after NOTE:
brightness of the instrument panel lights. Rotating
10 minutes.
the left dimmer control will adjust the interior and If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated
Dimmer Controls ambient light levels. Approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to also be turned off by pushing the Dome Defeat
NOTE:
the headlight switch located on the left side of the button.
The dimming of the touchscreen is programmable
instrument panel. through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further details.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The delay interval decreases as you rotate the
knob until it enters the low continual speed WARNING!
WINDSHIELD WIPERS position. The delay can be regulated from a Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles, could lead to a collision. You might not see other
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
in the multifunction lever. Turn the end of the lever double in duration when the vehicle speed is icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
to select the desired wiper speed. 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. warm the windshield with the defroster before
Windshield Washers and during windshield washer use.
To use the windshield washer, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, Mist Feature
inward and hold. Washer fluid will be sprayed and When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray
the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after from a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer
the washer knob is released. knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever,
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay inward briefly and release. The wipers will cycle
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first range, the wiper will operate for several seconds one time and automatically shut off.
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed after the washer knob is released. It will then resume NOTE:
wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever the intermittent interval previously selected. If the The mist feature does not activate the washer
upward to the second detent past the intermittent washer knob is pushed while in the off position, the pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
settings for high-speed wiper operation. wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three the windshield. The wash function must be used in
Intermittent Wiper System times after the wash knob is released. order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
The intermittent feature of this system was To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
designed for use when weather conditions make a system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
cycles, desirable. For maximum delay between your climate. This rating information can be found
cycles, rotate the control knob upward to the first on most washer fluid containers.
detent.
RAIN SENSING W IPERS — I F EQUIPPED  The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice, or dried salt water is present on
CLIMATE CONTROLS
This feature senses rain and snowfall on the the windshield. The Climate Control System allows you to regulate
windshield and automatically activates the wipers the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
 Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-
for the driver. The feature is especially useful for circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
cone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
road splash or overspray from the windshield located on the touchscreen (if equipped), on the
The Rain Sensing system has protection features 2
washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of sides of the touchscreen or on the instrument
the multifunction lever to one of four settings to for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate panel below the radio.
activate this feature. under the following conditions:
 Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition
MANUAL C LIMATE CONTROL O VERVIEW
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the is first placed in the ON/RUN position, the Rain
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
“Multimedia” for further information. switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
greater than 32°F (0°C).
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is  Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
the most sensitive. ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the
NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
NOTE:
not operate until the wiper switch is moved,
Position 3 should be used for normal rain condi-
vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h),
tions.
or the gear selector is moved out of the
Positions 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires NEUTRAL position. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Temperature
less wiper sensitivity. Position 4 can be used if the Controls
driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper  Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
switch in the O (off) position when not using the equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
system. Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
NOTE: operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
 The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition in the ON/RUN position, Rain Sensing
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position. wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions
(mentioned previously) exist.
Icon Description
MAX A/C Setting

Rotate the temperature control knob until it is set to MAX A/C. This is the coldest setting and puts the A/C to maximum power.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C).
Recirculation Button
Push the button on the faceplate to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when Recirculation mode is turned on. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the
inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Temperature Control
Use this control knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob
counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into
the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control knob to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you
select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.
Icon Description
Modes Control
Rotate the Mode Control Knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode Panel Mode 2
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Icon Description
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the button on the faceplate to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
The indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster turns off after a short period of time.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL NOTE:

Icons and descriptions can vary based upon
OVERVIEW vehicle equipment.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display Automatic

Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic

Temperature Controls
Icon Description
MAX A/C
Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function again will
cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE: 2
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate A/C Button
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current setting.
Touchscreen A/C Button The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when Recirculation mode is turned on. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such
as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can
be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the
inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Icon Description
Faceplate Auto Button
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. The indicator illuminates
when AUTO is on. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.
Touchscreen Auto
Button Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button

Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when front defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return
to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
Icon Description
Faceplate Temperature
Knobs
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control

Temperature control provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button (or rotate knob
if equipped) on the faceplate or touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button (or rotate knob if equipped) on the faceplate or touchscreen,
or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
Touchscreen NOTE:
Temperature Buttons  The numbers within the temperature display will only appear if the system is equipped with an automatic climate control system.
 Up and down buttons are only available on vehicles equipped with a 12-inch display.
SYNC
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC is on.
SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Icon Description
Faceplate Blower Knob
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower
control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
 Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
Touchscreen Blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Buttons
 Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Faceplate Mode Button
Modes Control
Faceplate: Push the Mode Button to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Touchscreen Mode Touchscreen: Press one of the “MODE” buttons to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be
Buttons adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Icon Description
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. 2
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button

This button turns the Climate Control System off.
CLIMATE CONTROL FUNCTIONS MAX A/C AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE C ONTROL

A/C (Air Conditioning)
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling (ATC) — I F EQUIPPED
performance.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and Automatic Operation
operator to manually activate or deactivate the air the prior settings. The button illuminates when 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
conditioning system. When the air conditioning MAX A/C is on. the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
through the outlets into the cabin. For improved In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
air conditioning and manually adjust the blower other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to the system to maintain by adjusting the driver
and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit. and passenger temperature control buttons.
select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes. Once the desired temperature is displayed,
Recirculation
the system will achieve and automatically
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead maintain that comfort level.
 On vehicles equipped with a 12-inch display, to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
reducing the blower control all the way down will feature may be unavailable (button on the
level, it is not necessary to change the
turn the climate off. touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
settings. You will experience the greatest
could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.
 For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is efficiency by simply allowing the system to
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if function automatically.
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain equipped, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in
active to prevent fogging of the windows. Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. NOTE:
Recirculation is disabled automatically if this mode  It is not necessary to move the temperature
 If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
this mode causes the LED in the control button to automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
speed if needed.
blink and then turns off. and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
 If your air conditioning performance seems
as possible.
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
 The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Winter Operation

Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric CAUTION!
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the Failure to follow these cautions can cause
performance, make sure the engine cooling
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further damage to the heating elements:
system is functioning properly and the proper
information.
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is  Use care when washing the inside of the rear
To provide you with maximum comfort in the used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners 2
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower Winter months is not recommended, because it on the interior surface of the window. Use a
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. may cause window fogging. soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
The blower will increase in speed and transition parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
into Auto mode.
Vacation/Storage
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
Manual Operation Override service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
This system offers a full complement of manual the air conditioning system at idle for about five abrasive window cleaners on the interior
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on surface of the window.
ATC display will be turned off when the system is high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication  Keep all objects a safe distance from the
being used in the manual mode. to minimize the possibility of compressor damage window.
when the system is started again.
OPERATING T IPS
Window Fogging Outside Air Intake
NOTE:
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows,
suggested control settings for various weather the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front
conditions. leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce
blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
Summer Operation airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the
The engine cooling system must be protected with air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Cabin Air Filter WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS

The windows will operate when the ignition switch
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC position, and for up
The climate control system filters out dust and
Set the mode control to to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
the position. If position or until a front door is opened.
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed. Cold Weather windshield fogging starts NOTE:
to occur, move the control The Engine Off Power Delay feature will allow the
Operating Tips Chart
to the position. power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
This feature is cancelled when either front door is
Set the mode control WINDOWS opened.
to , on, and blower
Hot Weather And on high. Roll down the POWER W INDOWS WARNING!
Vehicle Interior Is windows for a minute to Never leave children unattended in a vehicle.
Very Hot flush out the hot air. Adjust Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or
the controls as needed to in a location accessible to children, and do not
achieve comfort. leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Turn on and set the Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
Warm Weather Occupants, particularly unattended children,
mode control to the
can become entrapped by the windows while
position.
operating the power window switches. Such
Cool Sunny Operate in position. entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Set the mode control to
Cool & Humid Auto-Down
position and turn on to Power Window Switches
Conditions
keep windows clear. The power window controls located on the driver's Both the driver and front passenger window switch
door trim panel have up-down switches that give have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
you fingertip control of all power windows. There is switch past the first detent, release, and the
a single opening and closing switch on the front window will go down automatically. To cancel the
passenger door for passenger window control Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either
and on the rear doors for rear window control. the up or down direction and release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down

during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the WARNING!
switch briefly. There is no anti-pinch protection when the
To open the window part way, push the switch to window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
the first detent and release it when you want the objects from the window before closing.
window to stop. 2
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Reset Auto-Up
Protection — If Equipped Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
Pull the window switch fully upward to the second window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
detent, release, and the window will go up 1. Make sure the door is fully closed. Window Lockout Switch
automatically. 2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
To stop the window from going all the way up completely and continue to hold the switch up for
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the an additional two seconds after the window is The switch for the power sliding rear window is
switch briefly. closed. located on the overhead console.
To close the window part way, lift the window 3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
switch to the first detent and release when you detent to open the window completely and
want the window to stop. continue to hold the switch down for an additional
NOTE: two seconds after the window is fully open.
If the window runs into any obstacle during the
Auto-Up, it will reverse direction and then go back Window Lockout Switch
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window The window lockout switch on the driver's door
switch again to close the window. Any impact due allows you to disable the window control on the
to rough road conditions may trigger the auto rear passenger doors. To disable the window
reverse function unexpectedly during Auto-Up. controls on the rear passenger doors, push the
If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first window lock switch into the latched or down Rear Window Switch
detent and hold to close the window manually. position. To enable the window controls, push the
window lock switch again and return the switch to Push the switch rearward to open the glass.
the released or up position. Pull the switch forward to close the glass.
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!

A locking device in the center of the window helps
to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. SINGLE P ANE POWER S UNROOF —  Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
Squeeze the lock to release the window. I F E QUIPPED the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
WIND B UFFETING The power sunroof switches are located on the accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
overhead console between the courtesy/reading a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
lights. ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
unattended children, can become entrapped by
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
the power sunroof while operating the power
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and  In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the You could also be seriously injured or killed.
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any Always fasten your seat belt properly and
window. make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Power Sunroof Switches  Do not allow small children to operate the

sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof parts, or any object, to project through the
2 — Venting Sunroof sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof Manual Mode Pinch Protect Feature

Express To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward. This feature will detect an obstruction in the
The sunroof will move forward and automatically stop closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
at full closed position. Any release of the switch will stop operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will
the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
open automatically and stop when the full open
position is reached. This is called “Express Open.”
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. 2
again.
During Express Open operation, any other NOTE:
actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the Wind Buffeting If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
sunroof. Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
Manual Mode pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the Mode.
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward. The sunroof will move rearward and windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain Venting Sunroof — Express
automatically stop at full open position. Any release of open or partially open positions. This is a normal Push and release the Vent button within one half
the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting second and the sunroof will open to the vent
sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will
until the sunroof switch is pushed again. and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. occur regardless of sunroof position. During
If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the Express Vent operation, any other actuation of the
Closing Sunroof sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any switch will stop the sunroof.
Express window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Push the switch forward and release it within Sunshade Operation
one-half second and the sunroof will close Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
automatically from any position. The sunroof will the sunshade will open automatically as the
close fully and stop automatically. This is called clear out any debris that may have collected in the
sunroof opens. tracks.
“Express Close.” During Express Close operation,
any other actuation of the switch will stop the NOTE:
sunroof. The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Ignition Off Operation NOTE:

If the close switch is released anytime during the
WARNING!
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition teach cycle, the procedure will need to be repeated  Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either starting from the first step. with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
front door will cancel this feature. 6. Once the sunroof has stopped in the fully the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
closed position, release the close switch. accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
NOTE: a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
The sunroof is now reset and ready to use.
Ignition Off time is programmable through the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
DUAL P ANE POWER S UNROOF — unattended children, can become entrapped by
the power sunroof while operating the power
Relearn Procedure I F E QUIPPED sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
For vehicles equipped with a sunroof, there is a The power sunroof switches are located on the serious injury or death.
relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate the overhead console between the courtesy/reading  In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
sunroof when the “Express Operation” feature lights. thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
stops working. To reset the sunroof, follow these You could also be seriously injured or killed.
steps: Always fasten your seat belt properly and
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or the ON/RUN make sure all passengers are also properly
position. secured.
2. Ensure that the sunroof is in the fully closed  Do not allow small children to operate the
position. sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
3. Push and hold the close switch. The sunroof parts, or any object, to project through the
will hit the hard stop and move to the vent sunroof opening. Injury may result.
position after 10 seconds.
4. Release the close switch.
Power Sunroof Switches
5. Push and hold the close switch again within
five seconds to begin the teaching process. 1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
The sunroof will complete one full cycle and 2 — Venting Sunroof
return to the fully closed position. 3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade
Opening Sunroof Venting Sunroof — Express Opening Power Sunshade

The sunroof has two programmed open positions, Push and release the Vent button within one half The sunshade has two programmed open
comfort stop position and full open position. second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. positions, half open and full open positions. When
The comfort stop position has been optimized to This is called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless opening the sunshade from the closed position the
minimize wind buffeting when driving with side of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any sunshade will always stop at the half open position
windows closed and sunroof open. If the sunshade movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. regardless of express or manual open operation. 2
is in the closed position when initiating a sunroof NOTE: The switch must be actuated again to continue on
open command the sunshade will automatically If the sunshade was not already open, it will auto- to full open position
open to the half open position prior to the sunroof matically open prior to the roof opening to the vent Express
opening. position. Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it
Express Closing Sunroof within one-half second, the sunshade will open to
Push the switch rearward and release it within Express the half open position and stop automatically.
one-half second, the sunroof will open to the Push and release the switch again from the half
comfort stop position and automatically stop. Push the switch forward and release it within open position and the sunshade will open to the
Push the switch rearward and release it again, the one-half second and the sunroof will close full open position and stop automatically. This is
sunroof will open to the full open position and automatically from any position. The sunroof will called “Express Open”. During Express Open
automatically stop. This is called “Express Open”. close fully and stop automatically. This is called operation, any movement of the sunshade switch
During Express Open operation, any movement of “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, will stop the shade.
the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof. Manual
Manual Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the
Manual
Push and hold the switch rearward, the sunroof will shade will open to the half open position and stop
open to the comfort stop position and automatically To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in automatically. Push and hold the sunshade switch
stop. Push the switch rearward and hold it again, the forward position. Any release of the switch will rearward again and the shade will open automatically
the sunroof will open to the full open position and stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in to the full-open position. Any release of the switch will
automatically stop. Any release of the switch will stop a partially closed condition until the sunroof switch stop the movement and the sunshade will remain in a
the sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain in a is pushed again. partially opened condition until the switch is pushed
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
and held again.
Closing Power Sunshade Pinch Protect Feature Ignition Off Operation

If the sunroof is open or vented the sunshade This feature will detect an obstruction in the The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
cannot be closed beyond the half open position. closing of the sunroof during the Express Close to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
Pushing the sunshade close switch when the operation. If an obstruction in the path of the switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at half sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically front door will cancel this feature.
open position will first automatically close sunroof retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. NOTE:
prior to the sunshade closing. NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Express If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
Push the sunshade switch forward and release it within Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and “Multimedia” for further information.
one-half second. If the sunroof is in closed position the the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
sunshade will full close automatically from any position. Wind Buffeting HOOD
If the sunroof is open or vented the sunshade will close Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
to the half open position and stop; push and release the pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
TO OPEN THE H OOD
sunshade switch forward again to automatically close ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the To open the hood, two latches must be released.
both the sunroof and sunshade completely. This is windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, open or partially open positions. This is a normal
any movement of the switch will stop the sunshade. occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
Manual occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front
Push and hold the sunshade switch forward. If the and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
sunroof is in closed position the sunshade will full close If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
from any position. If the sunroof is open or vented the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
sunshade will close to the half open position and stop; window.
pushing and holding the sunshade switch forward Sunroof Maintenance
again will close both the sunroof and sunshade
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
completely. Any release of the switch will stop the
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and Hood Release Lever Location
movement and the sunshade will remain in a partially
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
closed condition until the switch is pushed again.
tracks.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the Electronic Tailgate Release — If Equipped
steering wheel at the base of the instrument WARNING!
The key fob may be equipped with an
panel. Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving electronic release feature for the
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it tailgate, allowing hands-free tailgate
the hood and push the safety latch lever to the could open when the vehicle is in motion and opening. To activate, push and release
left to release it, before raising the hood. block your vision. Failure to follow this warning the Tailgate Release button on the key fob twice 2
could result in serious injury or death. within five seconds. The tailgate door will unlatch,
and slowly lower into the open position.
CAUTION! If equipped, a button on the center overhead

console inside the vehicle can be used to release
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the the tailgate. An indicator light may also signal when
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at the tailgate is open (if equipped).
the front center of the hood to ensure that both For the tailgate to lower, the vehicle must be:
latches engage.
 In PARK or NEUTRAL
 Stationary (0 mph / 0 km/h)
TAILGATE NOTE:
Safety Latch Location
OPENING The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover (if equipped) may
prevent Electronic Tailgate Release if installed.
TO CLOSE THE H OOD The power tailgate may be opened by pushing the The Tonneau Cover must be removed or folded up
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from tailgate release pad located on the tailgate door. before releasing the tailgate. Refer to “Tri-Fold
the point where the props no longer hold the hood The tailgate damper strut will lower the tailgate to Tonneau Cover — If Equipped” in this chapter for
open. the open position (if equipped). further information.
CLOSING Closing
Always close the narrower swing door first, then
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both
close the wider swing door. The swing doors must
sides are latched.
be latched closed before the tailgate can be
NOTE: lowered.
Pull back on the tailgate firmly after closing to
NOTE:
ensure it is securely latched.
 When the swing doors are open, the maximum
MULTIFUNCTION T AILGATE — load placed on a door cannot exceed 180 lbs
I F EQUIPPED (82 kg).
Swing Door Release Handle  Pull back on the swing doors firmly after closing
The multifunction tailgate (if equipped) is a
to ensure they are securely latched.
60/40 split tailgate with two swing doors to allow Once the wider swing door is opened, pull the
for closer access to the pickup box with the doors release handle on the inboard side of the narrower WARNING!
open. door to open.
Opening To prevent serious injury or death:
The tailgate must be latched closed to open the  Always keep hands away from the hinge
swing doors. Push the paddle down, then pull the sides of the swing doors and where the doors
release handle beneath the tailgate lowering meet when opening and closing the doors.
handle. This opens the larger of the two doors. Your hand or someone else’s hand could be
pinched.
 Never operate the vehicle with the swing
doors open.
 Never hang from or sit on the swing doors.
Swing Door Release Handle

CAUTION!
NOTE: BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
 Always check both swing doors are latched Alarm is active.
HOMELINK®
before starting vehicle. Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
WARNING! garage before you begin programming.
 Vehicle damage may occur if doors are not
securely latched.  Your motorized door or gate will open and For more efficient programming and accurate 2
close while you are programming the universal transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if recommended that a new battery be placed in the
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED people, pets or other objects are in the path of hand-held transmitter of the device that is being
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with programmed to the HomeLink® system.
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
a garage door opener that has a “stop and To erase the channels, place the ignition in the
transmitters that operate devices such as garage
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety ON/RUN position, and push and hold the two
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home
standards. This includes most garage door outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered
opener models manufactured after 1982. 20 seconds or until the orange indicator flashes.
by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
Do not use a garage door opener without
The HomeLink® buttons that are located on the these safety features. NOTE:
sun visor designate the three different HomeLink®  Erasing all channels should only be performed
channels.  Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
when programming HomeLink® for the first
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
time. Do not erase channels when programming
garage while programming the transceiver.
additional buttons.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
 If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
NOTE: Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that assistance.
has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink® Buttons HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 6. Return to the vehicle and push the
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches programmed HomeLink® button twice
For programming garage door openers that were
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button (holding the button for two seconds each
manufactured after 1995. These garage door
you wish to program while keeping the time). If the garage door opener/device
openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or
HomeLink® indicator light in view. activates, programming is complete.
“TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. 3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you NOTE:
NOTE: want to program while you push and hold the If the garage door opener/device does
hand-held transmitter button. not activate, push the button a third time
It is NOT the button that is normally used to open
(for two seconds) to complete the training.
and close the door. The name and color of the 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
button may vary by manufacturer. indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will To program the remaining two HomeLink®
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remain-
has received the frequency signal from the ing button. DO NOT erase the channels.
hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons
after the indicator light changes from slow to Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
rapid. (Rolling Code)
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To reprogram a channel that has been previously
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can trained, follow these steps:
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
is attached to the garage door opener/device
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or
until the indicator light begins to flash after
“TRAINING” button. On some garage door
Training The Garage Door Opener 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
openers/devices there may be a light that blinks
when the garage door opener/device is in the 3. Without releasing the button proceed with
1 — Door Opener
LEARN/TRAIN mode. “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and
2 — Training Button follow all remaining steps."
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
(Non-Rolling Code) 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
For programming Garage Door Openers
manufactured before 1995. To reprogram a channel that has been previously (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
trained, follow these steps: you wish to program while keeping the
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. HomeLink® indicator light in view.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® 2
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after button, while you press and release (“cycle”)
you wish to program while keeping the
20 seconds. Do not release the button. your hand-held transmitter every two seconds
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
until HomeLink® has successfully accepted
3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with the frequency signal. The indicator light will
want to program while you press and hold the “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
hand-held transmitter button. follow all remaining steps. trained.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® P ROGRAMMING programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
has received the frequency signal from the longer in rare cases. The garage door may
hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to open and close while you are programming.
after the indicator light changes from slow to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission. 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
rapid.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require button and observe the indicator light.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light. transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after NOTE:
several seconds of transmission – which may not  If the indicator light stays on constantly,
 If the indicator light stays on constantly, be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the programming is complete and the garage
programming is complete and the garage signal during programming. Similar to this door/device should activate when the
door/device should activate when the Canadian law, some US gate operators are HomeLink® button is pressed.
HomeLink® button is pressed. designed to time-out in the same manner.
 To program the two remaining HomeLink®
 To program the two remaining HomeLink® It may be helpful to unplug the device during the buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining cycling process to prevent possible overheating of button. DO NOT erase the channels.
button. DO NOT erase the channels. the garage door or gate motor.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device SECURITY If you have any problems, or require assistance,
for programming, plug it back in at this time. please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
turn in your vehicle. assistance.
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
To reprogram a channel that has been previously WARNING!
for 20 seconds until the orange indicator flashes.
trained, follow these steps:
Note that all channels will be erased. Individual  Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. channels cannot be erased. dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled garage while programming the transceiver.
until the indicator light begins to flash after when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS  Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step If you are having trouble programming transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
2 and follow all remaining steps. HomeLink®, here are some of the most common people, pets or other objects are in the path of
solutions: the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
USING H OMELINK®  Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener a garage door opener that has a “stop and
To operate, push and release the programmed hand-held transmitter. reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for  Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door standards. This includes most garage door
the programmed device (i.e. garage door opener, Opener to complete the training for a Rolling opener models manufactured after 1982.
gate operator, security system, entry door lock, Code. Do not use a garage door opener without
home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held these safety features.
 Did you unplug the device for programming and
transmitter of the device may also be used remember to plug it back in?
at any time.
GENERAL INFORMATION La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
cause interferencia perjudicial y
vehicle:
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que 2
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following NOTE:
two conditions:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
1. This device may not cause harmful by the party responsible for compliance could void Glove Compartment
interference, and the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button
2. This device must accept any interference (If Equipped)
received, including interference that may INTERNAL EQUIPMENT 2 — Upper Glove Compartment
STORAGE 3 — Lower Glove Compartment
dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Development Glove Compartment If equipped with a covered upper glove
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de The glove compartment is located on the compartment, push the release button to open.
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux passenger side of the instrument panel and
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
conditions suivantes: features both an upper and lower storage area.
release handle.
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, NOTE:
et Not all vehicles are equipped with a door over the
Door Storage
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout upper storage area. Front Door Storage — If Equipped
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le Storage areas are located in the door trim panels.
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
le fonctionnement.
Storage compartments are located in both the
driver and passenger rear door trim panels.
Center Storage Compartment —

WARNING!
If Equipped
 In a collision, the latch may open if the total
The center storage compartment is located
weight of the items stored exceeds about
between the driver and passenger seats. The
10 lbs (4.5 kg). These items could be thrown
storage compartment provides an armrest and
about endangering occupants of the vehicle.
contains both and upper and lower storage area.
Items stored should not exceed a total of
10 lbs (4.5 kg).
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the

armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage area Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin
contains a USB power outlet located at the rear of
1 — Wireless Charging Pad
the area that can be used to power small electrical
devices, refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” in this 2 — Power Inverter
section for further information. 3 — Storage Area
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle
to open the lower storage bin. The lower bin
WARNING!
Center Storage Compartment contains a power inverter outlet located in the
forward portion of the lower bin. There is also a “fill Do not operate this vehicle with a console
WARNING! line” located along the rear inside wall of the lower compartment lid in the open position. Driving
bin. Contents above the “fill line” may interfere with the console compartment lid open may
 This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on with cupholder placement if equipped with a result in injury in a collision.
the armrest could be seriously injured during premium center console.
vehicle operation, or a collision. Only use the
center seating position when the armrest is
fully upright.
(Continued)
Premium Center Console — If Equipped

The premium center console is equipped with two
front storage bins located in front of the center
storage compartment. These storage bins may be
equipped with tandem doors. Push the front bin to
access the cupholders. Or push the rear bin to 2
access the coinholder/small storage bin.
Tandem Doors Open Position Push Release Button To Slide Tray

1 — Front Bin Open Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped
2 — Rear Bin Open If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
storage can be found by folding down the center
Push the release button at the front of the seatback. A console storage area and cupholders
cupholder bin to slide tray rearward for access of are available. With the seatback in the upright
front lower storage bin, or forward to access the position, lifting the seat bottom also reveals a
Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped rear lower storage bin with the center console lid in storage location.
the open position.
1 — Push Front Bin Access
2 — Push Rear Bin Access
Front Bench Seat Storage

There is a storage drawer located in the lower Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin —
center of the instrument panel. It can be released If Equipped
by pushing the access button above it. The drawer
is actuator assisted once the access button is In-floor storage bins are located in front of the
pushed. Pull drawer outward to the fully open second row seats and can be used for extra
position. storage. The storage bins have removable liners
that can be easily removed for cleaning.
To open the in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the
handle of the latch and open the lid.
Rear Console Latch Location
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and
passenger front seats are pockets that can be
used for storage.
Storage Drawer
1 — Access Button
2 — Storage Drawer In-Floor Storage Bin Latch
Rear Console Storage — If Equipped

If vehicle is equipped with “Smart Fold”, the center
portion of the 40/20/40 rear seat will fold forward
for rear seat cupholders and a storage compartment.
Lift up on the console latch to access.
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
NOTE: NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to The maximum load limit for each hook is 250 lbs
fully open the lid. (113 kg).
Below Rear Seat Storage — If Equipped
1. For additional storage below the rear seats,
unlatch the lock mechanism in the center of
2
the seat base by rotating it to either side, and
fold the front of the base forward.
Fold Seat Base Forward

2. Then, flip the inside of the base upward into
the upright position, locking into place,
Opened Storage Bin creating and extended storage area.
Each storage bin also contains two hooks for

securing cargo. These hooks should be used to
secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Rotate Lock Mechanism
Flip Inside Of Base Upward
In-Floor Storage Bin Hooks

Fully Extended Storage Area Front Cupholders Front Cupholders With Bench Seat
NOTE: NOTE: Rear Cupholders — If Equipped

The rear seats do not need to be folded up to If the vehicle is equipped with a premium center Rear seat cupholders can be found on the rear of
access this feature. console with double (tandem) doors, push the front the center console near the floor.
bin door to access the cupholders.
CUPHOLDERS Vehicles Equipped With 40/20/40 Seats
Some vehicles may also be equipped with rear
cupholders located in the center armrest.
Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located on the backside of the
center portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the
For vehicles equipped with a center console, two
center section of the front seat to gain access to
cupholders are located in front of the console
the cupholders.
storage bin.
Rear Armrest Cupholder

If your vehicle is equipped with “Smart Fold”, the

entire center section of the 40/20/40 seat folds CAUTION!
forward for access of cupholders and console  Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
storage. (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps)
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced. 2
 Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered Power Outlet Fuse Locations
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 1 — F54 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Battery
Fed Position
An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the tray 2 — F54 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Ignition
Rear Armrest Cupholder With Smart Fold on top of the center stack. This power outlet only Fed Position
works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC 3 — F48 Fuse 10 A Red Port Power or Rear USB
ELECTRICAL P OWER OUTLETS position.
(Charge Only)
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can
provide power for in-cab accessories designed When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any
for use with the standard “cigar lighter” plug. equipment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle.
The 12 Volt power outlets and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be
Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
outlet indicating “12V DC”, together with either a protect the battery against discharge.
key symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the ignition must be
in the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to
provide power. The battery symbol indicates that
the outlet is connected to the battery, and can Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
provide power at all times.
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts

WARNING! CAUTION! Maximum) power inverter located on the rear of
To avoid serious injury or death:  After the use of high power draw accessories, the center console. This inverter can power cellular
or long periods of the vehicle not being started phones, electronics and other low power devices
 Only devices designed for use in this type of
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain high-end
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt video game consoles exceed this power limit, as
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
outlet. will most power tools.
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
 Do not touch with wet hands. battery. All power inverters are designed with built-in
 Close the lid when not in use and while driving overload protection. If the power rating of
the vehicle. POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED 400 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter shuts
down. Once the electrical device has been
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) inverter removed from the outlet the inverter should reset.
electric shock and failure. may be located inside the center console towards the
right hand side, just under the Wireless Charging Pad
(if equipped). This inverter can power cellular phones,
CAUTION! electronics and other low power devices requiring
 Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power up to 400 Watts. Certain high-end video game
power from the vehicle's battery, even when consoles exceed this power limit, as will most power
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu- tools.
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
 Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the NOTE:
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit- 400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not
tently and with greater caution. each outlet. If three outlets are in use, 400 Watts
(Continued) is shared amongst the devices plugged in.
Center Console Power Inverter Outlet

If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) inverter

may be located inside the RamBox of your vehicle.
The inverter can be turned on by the Instrument Panel
Power Inverter switch located to the left of the steering
wheel. The RamBox inverter can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring 2
power up to 400 Watts. Certain high-end video game
consoles exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools.
The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is
only found on vehicles equipped with a RamBox. Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch Center Stack Power Inverter
The switch only controls on/off operation of the
power outlet in the RamBox; it does not control If equipped with a front bench seat, there may be To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the
on/off operation of the power outlets located a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) inverter located device. The outlet turns off when the device is
inside the cabin of the vehicle. to the right of the center stack, just below the unplugged.
climate controls. This inverter can power cellular NOTE:
phones, electronics and other low power devices
 The Center Stack Power Inverter is only available on
requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain high-end
video game consoles exceed this power limit, as vehicles equipped with a front bench seat.
will most power tools.  The Power Inverter only turns on if the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
 Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter shuts down if the power rating is
exceeded.
RamBox Power Inverter

WARNING!
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi OVERHEAD SUNGLASS S TORAGE
wireless charging pad located inside of the center
To avoid serious injury or death: console just below the CD player (if equipped). At the front of the overhead console, a
This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge compartment is provided for the storage of one
 Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. pair of sunglasses.
your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that
 Do not touch with wet hands. uses magnetic induction to transfer power to your From the closed position, push the door latch to
mobile device. open the compartment.
 Close the lid when not in use.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
electric shock and failure. with Qi wireless charging functionality, an
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate can
WIRELESS C HARGING PAD — be purchased from your mobile phone provider
or a local electronics retailer. Please see your
I F EQUIPPED phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
anti-slip mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your
mobile phone in place and an LED indicator light.
CAUTION! Overhead Sunglass Door
The key fob should not be placed on the The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
charging pad or within 15 cm (150 mm) of it.
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and
damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close
proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from
Wireless Charging Pad being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
vehicle from starting.
PICKUP BOX above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead

dividers to form the floor.
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the
inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and
The pickup box has many features designed for behind both wheel housings. Place wooden boards
utility and convenience. WARNING! across the box from side to side to create separate
load compartments in the pickup box.
 The pickup box is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower 2
sit in seats and use seat belts. sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up
to 1,000 lbs (450 kg) total.
 Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds
may need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box
that may result in vehicle damage. If wide building storage and cargo management system consisting
materials are to be frequently carried, the installa- of three features:
tion of a support is recommended. This will  Integrated box side storage bins
Pick Up Box Features restrain the cargo and transfer the load to the
pickup box floor.  Cargo divider
1 — Upper Load Floor Indents  Bed rail tie-down system
 If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg)
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
of material suspended above the wheelhouse, NOTE:
3 — Cleats Bed rail tie-down system is also available for
supports must be installed to transfer the
weight of the load to the pickup box floor or vehicles not equipped with a RamBox.
NOTE: vehicle damage may result. The use of proper
If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or supports will permit loading up to the rated
Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you payload.
must use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets that
 Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in
are available from an authorized dealer.
an accident causing serious or fatal injury.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of
plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place
lumber across the box in the indentations provided
RAMBOX INTEGRATED B OX S IDE To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked,
CAUTION!
push and release the button located on the lid. The
STORAGE BINS RamBox lid will open upward to allow hand access. Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of Lift the lid to fully open. could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the
the pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide NOTE: lid is required to stay open for extended periods of
watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up to RamBox will not open when the pushbutton is time, it is recommended that the bin lights be turned
150 lbs (68 kg) of evenly distributed cargo. pushed if the RamBox is locked. off manually using the on/off switch.
The interior of the RamBox will automatically

illuminate when the lid is opened. The timing can
be adjusted through your touchscreen.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs
(to allow water to drain from bins). To remove plug,
pull up on the edge. To install push plug downward
into drain hole.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins RamBox Push Button And Keyhole Lock If equipped, a power inverter can be found inside
the RamBox.
CAUTION! 1 — Keyhole Lock
Refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” in this chapter
2 — Push Button
Failure to follow the following items could cause for further information.
damage to the vehicle: NOTE:
 Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
properly secured. dividers. These accessories (in addition to other
RamBox accessories) are available from Mopar.
 Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lbs
(68 kg) per bin.
Locking And Unlocking RamBox RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Push and release the lock or unlock button on the Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
Release Lever — If Equipped
key fob to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate personal injury or damage to your vehicle: As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover
and the RamBox (if equipped). Refer to “Keys” in Emergency Release is built into the storage bin
this chapter for further details. To unlatch the WARNING! cover latching mechanism.
storage bin manually, insert the emergency key 2
into the keyhole and turn clockwise. Always return  Always close the storage bin covers when your
the key to the upright (vertical) position before vehicle is unattended.
removing it from the keyhole.  Do not allow children to have access to the
storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
CAUTION! children may not be able to escape. If trapped
 Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched in the storage bin, children can die from suffo-
before moving or driving vehicle. cation or heat stroke.
 Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should  In an accident, serious injury could result if the
be minimized to prevent damage to the lid and storage bin covers are not properly latched.
latching/hinging mechanisms.  Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
 Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to covers open.
heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that shift due NOTE:
 Keep the storage bin covers closed and In the event of an individual being locked inside
to vehicle motion. In order to minimize potential latched while the vehicle is in motion.
for damage, secure all cargo to prevent move- the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
ment and protect inside surfaces of bin from  Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the
heavy/sharp objects with appropriate padding. glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin
cover latching mechanism.
BED DIVIDER — IF EQUIPPED
The bed divider has two functional positions:
 Storage Position
 Divider Position
Storage Position 2. With the side gates open, position the divider 4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure
fully forward in the bed against the front panel. the side gates in the closed position.
The storage position for the bed divider is at the
front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed
cargo area when not in use.
To install the bed divider into the storage position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
handle vertically to release the divider side
gates.
Storage Position Side Gates Closed

3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the 5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to
outboard ends to be positioned in front of the secure the panel into place.
cargo tie down loops.
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your
cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving
around the bed. There are 11 divider slots along
Center Handle And Lock the bed inner panels which allow for various
positions to assist in managing your cargo.
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
3 — Unlocked Position
4 — Locked Position
Cargo Tie Down Loop
To install the bed divider into a divider position, 2. With the side gates open, position the divider
perform the following: so the outboard ends align with the intended
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked slots in the sides of the bed.
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
handle vertically to release the divider side
gates. 2
Side Gates Closed

5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel
into place.
Aligning Gate To Slots
BED RAIL T IE-D OWN SYSTEM —
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the
outboard ends are secured into the intended I F E QUIPPED
Center Handle And Lock slots of the bed.
CAUTION!
1 — Center Handle Lock 4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure
2 — Handle the side gates in the closed position. The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
3 — Unlocked Position 250 lbs (113 kg), or 500 lbs (227 kg) total per
rail, and the angle of the load on each cleat
4 — Locked Position
should not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal,
or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
NOTE: Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)

This feature is available for vehicles both To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove
equipped, or not equipped, with a RamBox. the end cap screw located in the center of the end
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the cap, using a #T30 Torx head driver. Remove the
bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo. end cap and slide the cleat off the end of the rail.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly

1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
Adjustable Cleats Cleat Removal (Standard Box Rail) End Cap Screw Location If Equipped With Tonneau Cover
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in To remove the cleats from the utility rail, slide the
one of the detents, along either rail, in order to cleat forward to access the cut out at the end of the
keep cargo properly secure. box rail, then remove the cleat.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn
the nut counterclockwise, approximately three
turns. Then pull out on the cleat and slide it to the
detent nearest the desired location. Make sure the
cleat is seated in the detent and tighten the nut.
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover) EASY-OFF TAILGATE 3. Without latching, rotate the tailgate to nearly
closed. Then, while providing support to the
Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the
release button located beneath the end cap while To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an tailgate, slide it slowly to the right, removing
pulling the cap away from the rail. The cleat can overhang, the tailgate can be removed. the tailgate from the left pivot.
now be removed by sliding it off the end of the rail. NOTE: NOTE:
The electric connector at the bottom of the tailgate Rest the tailgate on the bumper so that the entire 2
must be disconnected prior to removing the tailgate is secure and supported.
tailgate.
TAILGATE REMOVAL
To remove the tailgate, follow the instructions
below:
1. Open the tailgate to a 45° angle.
2. Lift up on the right side of the tailgate, lifting it
off of the pivot.
End Cap Release Button If Not Equipped With Tonneau
Cover
Slide Tailgate To The Right
Lift Right Side Off Of Pivot
Pull End Cap Away From Rail

4. Let the tailgate rest on the support cables

while having the tailgate naturally slide
forward on the bumper.
Locking Tab Disconnected Body Side Harness

6. Disconnect the wiring harness by pushing on 7. Connect the body side plug (provided in the
the two release tabs, ensuring the connector glove compartment) to the body side wiring
Tailgate Only Supported By Cables bracket does not fall into the sill. harness and insert the bracket back into the sill.
5. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by

pushing inward in the locking tab.
Connected Wiring Harness Body Side Plug (One Piece)

1 — First Release Tab
Connector Bracket Location 2 — Second Release Tab
8. Connect the tailgate plugs (provided in the NOTE:

glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring Make sure tailgate is supported by you and/or a
WARNING!
harness to ensure that the terminals do not second person when removing support cables. To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
corrode. the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap
or Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of 2
leaks.
LOCKING TAILGATE
The tailgate can be locked using the key fob lock
button.
Locking Tang
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
Tailgate Plugs (Two Pieces) Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri-Fold
11. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle. Tonneau Cover which consists of different
1 — Large Plug features:
2 — Small Plug NOTE:
 Easy Tri-Fold cover
 Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck
pickup box.  Tonneau fore aft locator
9. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against
 If the tailgate is closed with the wire harness  Crossbar inside bed locator
the forward-facing surface of the tailgate.
This will prevent damaging the connector disconnected, the tailgate can only be opened  Front and rear clamps
and bracket when storing or reinstalling the by removing the inside panel and unlatching the  Stowage strap
tailgate. locking mechanism manually.
 Locking capability
10. Raise the tailgate slightly, and remove the
support cables by releasing the lock tang from
the pivot.
TRI-F OLD TONNEAU COVER R EMOVAL

To remove the Tonneau Cover follow the following
steps:
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear pair of
Tonneau Cover clamps located on the
underside of the Cover (left and right side).
Slide Locking Lever Inward Released Position

3. Holding the yellow bumper, push the fully
released clamp to the center and pull up.
Push the handle firmly, and listen for a clicking
sound to confirm the clamps are in the
properly Stowed Position.
Clamped Position
2. Slide the locking lever toward the outside of
the truck bed to release the clamp and pull the
handle downward into the Released Position.
Do this for both the left and right side. Pull Handle Downward
Stowed Position
4. Lift up on the third panel and fold it onto the 6. Once in the third panel position, repeat steps NOTE:
second panel. “1” and “2” on the front set of clamps. Fold the panel gently. It is not recommended to
NOTE: allow the panels to drop under their own weight.
When folding the second and third panels, the 7. Make sure to clip both stowage straps to
sections MUST be held together to avoid damage prevent the Tonneau Cover panels from
to the cover material. unfolding. 2
Second Panel Position

5. Lift up on the second and third panel and fold
them onto the first panel.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage Fully Folded Tonneau Cover

1 — Stowage Strap
2 — Tonneau Cover Bumper And Seat
8. With two people, remove the cover.
NOTE:
 Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded
completely, and the stowage straps are
Third Panel Position (Tri-Folded) engaged, before removing.
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together

 You can drive the vehicle with a fully folded Tonneau NOTE:
Cover. To do so, make sure both front latches and Make sure the J Hook (1) locates itself under the
both stowage straps are engaged. Damage to the truck flange.
Tonneau Cover or vehicle might occur if the latches
or stowage straps are not engaged.
TRI-F OLD TONNEAU COVER
I NSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover follow these steps:
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the
Released Position
truck bed and push the cover forward against
the front of the truck bed. The Tonneau Cover 3. Holding the lower end of the clamp, push it to
centers itself when placed on the vehicle. the center and pull up. Push the handle firmly
2. Slide the locking lever toward the outside of and listen for a clicking sound to confirm the Clamped Position
the truck bed and release the clamp, and pull clamps are set to the Clamped Position.
the handle downward into the Released 4. Disengage the stowage straps.
Position. Do this for both the left and right side. 5. Unfold Tonneau Cover to the second panel
position.
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position.
J Hook Under Truck Flange

1 — Fully Engaged Swing Lever
Slide Locking Lever Inward
7. Repeat steps “2” through “3” for the rear pair

of clamps.
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the 2
Tonneau Cover is properly installed on the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure can result in
detachment of the Tonneau Cover from the
vehicle and/or damage to the vehicle/Tonneau
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together Cover.
Second Panel Position
6. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover. NOTE:
Unfold the panel gently. It is not recommended to TRI-F OLD TONNEAU C OVER C LEANING
NOTE:
When unfolding the center and rear panels, the allow the panels to drop under their own weight. For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use
sections MUST be held together to avoid damage Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar
to the cover material. Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
Fully Unfolded Position
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage

100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster — Gasoline

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT C LUSTER 4. Oil Pressure Gauge

WARNING!
DESCRIPTIONS  The pointer should always indicate the
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
oil pressure when the engine is running.
1. Tachometer A continuous high or low reading under others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions normal driving conditions may indicate a coolant. You may want to call an authorized
per minute (RPM x 1000). lubrication system malfunction. Immediate dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. Refer
service should be obtained from an autho- to “Cooling System Pressure Cap” in “Servicing
2. Voltmeter And Maintenance” for further information if you
rized dealer.
 When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the decide to look under the hood. 3
gauge indicates the electrical system
NOTE:
voltage. The pointer should stay within the In vehicles equipped with Stop/Start, an oil
pressure indication of zero is normal during an
normal range if the battery is charged. If the CAUTION!
pointer moves to either extreme left or right Autostop.
5. Speedometer Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
and remains there during normal driving,
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
the electrical system should be serviced.  Indicates vehicle speed.
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
NOTE: 6. Temperature Gauge vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
In vehicles equipped with Stop/Start, a reduced  The pointer shows engine coolant tempera- the pointer drops back into the normal range.
voltage may be present during an Autostop. ture. The pointer positioned within the If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the
3. Instrument Cluster Display normal range indicates that the engine engine off immediately and call an authorized
 When the appropriate conditions exist, cooling system is operating satisfactorily. dealer for service.
this display shows the instrument cluster  The pointer will likely indicate a higher
display messages. Refer to “Instrument temperature when driving in hot weather, 7. Fuel Gauge
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your up mountain grades, or when towing a  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
Instrument Panel” for further information. trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
the upper limits of the normal operating position.
range.
 The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — Gasoline

PREMIUM I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER WARNING!

5. Fuel Gauge
DESCRIPTIONS A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
 The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
1. Tachometer others could be badly burned by steam or boiling position.
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
 The fuel pump symbol points to
per minute (RPM x 1000). dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. Refer
the side of the vehicle where the
to “Cooling System Pressure Cap” in “Servicing
2. Instrument Cluster Display fuel door is located.
And Maintenance” for further information if you
 When the appropriate conditions exist, decide to look under the hood. 3
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your CAUTION!
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
3. Speedometer damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
 Indicates vehicle speed. reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
4. Temperature Gauge
the pointer drops back into the normal range.
 The pointer shows engine coolant tempera- If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the
ture. The pointer positioned within the engine off immediately and call an authorized
normal range indicates that the engine dealer for service.
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
 The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster — Diesel

I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS WARNING!

6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
 The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of
1. Tachometer Driving with a hot engine cooling system could Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads required to maintain normal vehicle operation
per minute (RPM x 1000). “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle and emissions compliance. If something is
2. Engine Coolant Temperature with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer wrong with the gauge, a DEF Warning Message
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer or Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be
 This gauge shows the engine coolant tempera- remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately displayed. Refer to “Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
ture. The gauge pointer will likely show higher and call an authorized dealer for service. Warning Messages” in this chapter for further
3
temperatures when driving in hot weather, up
information.
mountain grades, or in heavy stop and go
traffic. If the red Warning Light turns on while 3. Instrument Cluster Display
WARNING!
driving, safely bring the vehicle to a stop, and  The instrument cluster display features a driver
turn off the engine. DO NOT operate the vehicle interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
until the cause is corrected. Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
Panel” for further information. coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
WARNING! for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
look under the hood yourself, refer to “Dealer
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or  The pointer should always indicate some oil Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”. Follow the
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling pressure when the engine is running. A contin- warnings under the “Cooling System Pressure Cap”
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer uous high or low reading under normal driving paragraph.
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to conditions may indicate a lubrication system
look under the hood yourself, refer to “Dealer malfunction. Immediate service should be
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”. Follow the obtained from an authorized dealer.
warnings under the “Cooling System Pressure Cap”
paragraph. 5. Speedometer
 Indicates vehicle speed.
 The DEF gauge may also not immediately 7. Fuel Gauge

WARNING! update after a refill if the temperature of the  The gauge shows the level of fuel in the
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge line heater will possibly warm up the DEF ON/RUN position.
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the fluid and allow the gauge to update after a
period of run time. Under very cold condi- The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
tions, it is possible that the gauge may not vehicle where the fuel door is located.
If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the reflect the new fill level for several drives.
engine off immediately and call an authorized  Outside temperature can affect DEF
dealer for service. consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F
(-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle
NOTE: can stay on a fixed position and may not
move for extended periods of time. This is a
 The gauge may take up to five seconds to
normal function of the system.
update after adding a gallon or more of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank.
If you have a fault related to the DEF
system, the gauge may not update to the
new level. See an authorized dealer for
service.
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
Premium Instrument Cluster — Diesel

I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS capacity in the tank above the Full mark 5. Fuel Gauge
that’s not represented in the gauge. You  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
1. Tachometer may not see any movement in the reading – fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions even after driving up to 2,000 miles in some ON/RUN position.
per minute (RPM x 1000). cases.
 The fuel pump symbol points to the side
2. Instrument Cluster Display  The gauge may take up to five seconds to of the vehicle where the fuel filler door is
update after adding a gallon or more of located.
 When the appropriate conditions exist,
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank.
this display shows the instrument cluster
If you have a fault related to the DEF system,
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
the gauge may not update to the new level. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Cluster Display” in this chapter for further
See an authorized dealer for service. Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
information.
 The DEF gauge may also not immediately cluster display, which offers useful information to
3. Speedometer the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
update after a refill if the temperature of the
 Indicates vehicle speed. DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF opening/closing of a door will activate the display for
4. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge line heater will possibly warm up the DEF viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers, in
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
 The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of designed to display important information about
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is period of run time. Under very cold condi-
tions, it is possible that the gauge may not your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
required to maintain normal vehicle opera- interactive display located on the instrument panel,
tion and emissions compliance. If something reflect the new fill level for several drives.
your instrument cluster display can show you how
is wrong with the gauge, a DEF Warning  Outside temperature can affect DEF
systems are working and give you warnings when
Message or Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F they are not. The steering wheel mounted controls
will be displayed. Refer to “Diesel Exhaust (-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle allow you to scroll through the main menus and
Fluid (DEF) Warning Messages” in this can stay on a fixed position and may not submenus. You can access the specific information
chapter for further information. move for extended periods of time. This is a you want and make selections and adjustments.
NOTE: normal function of the system.
 The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed
with a large amount of full reserve. So the
level sensor will indicate a full reading even
before the tank is completely full. To put it
another way, there’s additional storage
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY  Trip Info Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
CONTROLS  Stop/Start — If Equipped Using the left or right arrow buttons allow you to
 Trailer Tow — If Equipped cycle through the submenu items of the Main
The instrument cluster display features a driver menu item.
interactive display that is located in the instrument  Audio
NOTE:
cluster.  Messages
 Holding the up/down or left/right arrow button
 Screen Setup will loop the user through the currently selected
 Vehicle Settings — If Equipped menu or options presented on the screen. 3
The system allows the driver to select information  Main menu and submenus wrap for continuous
by pushing the following instrument cluster display scrolling.
control buttons located on the left side of the  Upon returning to a main menu, the last
steering wheel. submenu screen viewed within that main menu
will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
Base Instrument Cluster Display  Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls km/h).
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen For Screen Setup:
 OK button allows user to enter menu and
The instrument cluster display menu items may submenus.
consist of the following:  Within each submenu layer, the up and down
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons arrows will allow the user to select the item of
 Speedometer
interest.
 Vehicle Info Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
 Driver Assist — If Equipped Using the up or down arrow buttons allow you to
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
 Fuel Economy
 Pushing the OK button makes the selection and 3. Push and release the right arrow button to Vehicle Info
a confirmation screen will appear (returning the access the ”Oil Life” screen.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
user to the first page of the submenu). 4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the
 Pushing the left arrow button will exit each If conditions are met, the gauge and numeric instrument cluster display. Push and release the
submenu layer and return to the main menu. display will update to show 100%. If conditions left or right arrow button to scroll through the
are not met a pop-up message of “To reset oil information submenus and push and release
OIL L IFE R ESET life engine must be off with ignition in run” will the OK button to select or reset the resettable
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change be displayed (for five seconds), and the user submenus.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will remain at the Oil Life screen.
 Tire Pressure
will display in the instrument cluster display for five 5. Push and release the up or down arrow button
 Trans Temp (Automatic only)
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate to exit the submenu screen.
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil  Oil Temperature
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which NOTE:  Oil Life
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, If the indicator message illuminates when you start
 Air Suspension — If Equipped
dependent upon your personal driving style. the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.  Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN  Oil Pressure — If Equipped
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push  Battery Voltage — If Equipped
and release the OK or arrow buttons. To reset the Push and release the up or down arrow button until
 Gauge Summary — If Equipped
oil change indicator system (after performing the the desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following the instrument cluster display.  Engine Hours
procedure: Speedometer Driver Assist — If Equipped
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the Push and release the up or down arrow button until The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the the speedometer menu item is highlighted in the ACC and LaneSense systems.
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK Push and release the up or down arrow button
the engine). button to cycle the display between mph and km/h. until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the
2. Push and release the down arrow button to instrument cluster display.
scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature  Driver Override Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B information will display
The instrument cluster display displays the current  System Off the following:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system settings.  ACC Proximity Warning  Distance
The information displayed depends on ACC system  Average Fuel Economy
status.  ACC Unavailable Warning
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise  Elapsed Time
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one of Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Push and hold OK button to reset all information.
Operating.”
the following displays in the instrument cluster Stop/Start — If Equipped 3
display: LaneSense — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
Adaptive Cruise Control Off The instrument cluster display displays the current the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read LaneSense system settings. The information instrument cluster display. The screen will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” displayed depends on LaneSense system status the Stop/Start status.
and the conditions that need to be met. For further
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in
Trailer Tow
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed “Starting And Operating.” Push and release the up or down arrow button until
setting has not been selected, the display will read the Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted in the
Fuel Economy instrument cluster display. Push and release the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push and release the up or down arrow button until right or left arrow buttons to cycle through the
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
the Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted in the following trailer trip information:
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the OK
instrument cluster display:  Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold
button to reset Average Fuel Economy.
the OK button to reset the distance.
ACC SET
 Current Fuel Economy Gauge
 Trailer Brake
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
 Average Fuel Economy Value
instrument cluster.  Output
 Range To Empty
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC  Type
activity occurs, which may include any of the Trip Info  Gain
following: Push and release the up or down arrow button until
 Distance Setting Change the Trip menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right or left
 System Cancel
arrow buttons to enter the submenus of Trip A and
Audio Screen Setup  Oil Pressure – If Equipped

Push and release the up or down arrow button until NOTE:  Coolant Temp – If Equipped
the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the The Screen Setup feature can only be used while  Oil Temperature – If Equipped
instrument cluster display. This menu will display the vehicle is in PARK (P).  Battery Voltage – If Equipped
the audio source information, including the Song Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
name, Artist name, and audio source with an  Transmission Temperature – If Equipped
Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the
accompanying graphic. instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK  Oil Life – If Equipped
Phone Call Status button to enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts Center
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
 None
pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up will allows you to change what information is displayed in
the instrument cluster as well as the location that  Compass
remain until the phone is answered or ignored.
information is displayed.  Outside Temp
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items  Time
previous media source information displayed Upper Left  Range To Empty
on the screen. When the pop-up is no longer  None  Average Econ
displayed, the display will return to the last used
screen.  Compass (default setting – Premium)  Current Econ
Stored Messages  Outside Temp (default setting – Base)  Trip A Distance
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the  Time  Trip B Distance
Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows  Range To Empty  Trailer Trip – If Equipped
the number of stored warning messages. Push and  Average Econ  Audio
release the right or left arrow buttons to cycle through
 Current Econ  Speedometer (default setting)
stored messages.
 Trip A Distance  Menu Title
 Trip B Distance
 Trailer Trip – If Equipped
 Trailer Brake – If Equipped
Upper Right Left Side – If Equipped Lower Left – If Equipped

 None  None  None
 Compass (default setting – Base)  Range To Empty  Compass
 Outside Temp (default setting – Premium)  Average Econ  Outside Temp
 Time  Oil Temp  Time
 Range To Empty  Transmission Temp  Range To Empty
 Average Econ  Coolant Temp  Average Econ 3
 Current Econ  Oil Life  Current Econ
 Trip A Distance  Menu Icon (default setting)  Trip A Distance
 Trip B Distance Right Side – If Equipped  Trip B Distance
 Trailer Trip – If Equipped  None  Trailer Trip
 Trailer Brake – If Equipped  Range To Empty  Trailer Brake
 Oil Pressure – If Equipped  Average Econ  Oil Pressure
 Coolant Temp – If Equipped  Oil Temp  Coolant Temperature
 Oil Temperature – If Equipped  Transmission Temp  Oil Temperature
 Battery Voltage – If Equipped  Coolant Temp  Battery Voltage (default setting)
 Transmission Temperature – If Equipped  Oil Life  Transmission Temperature
 Oil Life – If Equipped  Menu Icon (Default)  Oil Life
Lower Right – If Equipped Favorite Menus DIESEL P ARTICULATE F ILTER (DPF)

 None  Speedometer MESSAGES
 Compass  Vehicle Info
This engine meets all required diesel engine emissions
 Outside Temp  Driver Assist (show/hide) – If Equipped standards. To achieve these emissions standards, your
 Time  Fuel Economy (show/hide) vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and
exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly
 Range To Empty  Trip Info (show/hide)
integrated into your vehicle and managed by the
 Average Econ  Stop/Start Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM manages
 Current Econ  Trailer Tow (show/hide) engine combustion to allow the exhaust system’s
 Trip A Distance  Audio (show/hide)
catalyst to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM)
pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.
 Trip B Distance  (Stored) Messages
 Trailer Trip  Screen Setup WARNING!
 Trailer Brake Current Gear A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
 Oil Pressure (default setting)  Off (Default) materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your
 Coolant Temperature  On
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle
 Oil Temperature Odometer in areas where your exhaust system can contact
 Battery Voltage  No Decimal Point (Default) anything that can burn.
 Transmission Temperature  Decimal Point
 Oil Life Defaults
 Cancel
 Restore
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to  Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed — NOTE:
additional maintenance required on your vehicle or This message indicates that the Diesel Particu- Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing
engine. Refer to the following messages that may late Filter (DPF) self-cleaning is completed. your oil and resetting the oil change indicator by
be displayed on your instrument cluster: If this message is displayed, you will hear one 0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust
 Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway chime to assist in alerting you of this condition. filter from performing it's cleaning routine. This will
Speeds to Remedy — This message will be displayed  Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now — shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
in the instrument cluster if the exhaust particulate This messages indicates regeneration has been and reduced engine power. Only an authorized
filter reaches 80% of its maximum storage capacity. disabled due to a system malfunction. At this dealer will be able to correct this condition.
Under conditions of exclusive short duration and low point the engine Powertrain Control Module
3
speed driving cycles, your diesel engine and exhaust (PCM) will register a fault code, the instrument
CAUTION!
after-treatment system may never reach the condi- panel will display a MIL light. See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
tions required to cleanse the filter to remove the exhaust system could occur soon with continued
trapped PM. If this occurs, the “Exhaust Filter XX% CAUTION! operation.
Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds to Remedy”
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display. If this message is displayed, you will hear
exhaust system could occur soon with continued DISPLAYS
operation.
one chime to assist in alerting you of this condition. When the appropriate conditions exist, the
By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds for instrument cluster display displays the following
up to 20 minutes, you can remedy the condition in  Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See Dealer —
messages:
the particulate filter system and allow your diesel This message indicates the PCM has derated the
engine to limit the likelihood of permanent damage  System Setup Unavailable – Vehicle Not in Park
engine and exhaust after-treatment system to
cleanse the filter to remove the trapped PM and to the after-treatment system. If this condition is not  System Setup Unavailable – Vehicle in Motion
restore the system to normal operating condition. corrected and a dealer service is not performed,  Exhaust Filter Full Safely Drive at Highway
extensive exhaust after-treatment damage can Speeds To Remedy
 Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process
occur. To correct this condition it will be necessary to
Exhaust Filter XX% Full — This message indi-  Exhaust Filter XX% Full – Power Reduced See Dealer
have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
cates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is
 Exhaust Service Required – See Dealer Now
self-cleaning. Maintain your current driving
condition until regeneration is completed.  Exhaust System – Filter XX% Full Service
Required See Dealer
 Exhaust System – Regeneration In Process cluster during vehicle start up with the current DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID (DEF) FAULT
Exhaust Filter XX% Full allowed mileage and accompanied by a single
chime. The remaining mileage can be pulled up WARNING M ESSAGES
 Exhaust System – Regeneration Completed
anytime in the “Messages” list within the instru- There are different messages which are displayed
 Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low ment cluster display. if the vehicle detects that the Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Refill Soon
 Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF — This (DEF) system has been filled with a fluid other than
 Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF message will display when DEF driving range is less DEF, has experienced component failures, or when
 Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF than 200 miles. It is also displayed at 150 miles and tampering has been detected.
 Service DEF System See Dealer 100 miles. DEF fluid top off is required within the When the DEF system needs to be serviced the
displayed mileage. The message will be displayed in following warnings will display:
 Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer
the instrument cluster display during vehicle start up
 Service DEF System See Dealer — This message
 Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF with an updated distance mileage, and it will be
will display when the fault is initially detected
See Dealer accompanied by a single chime. Starting at
and each time the vehicle is started. The
 Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System See 100 miles, remaining range will be continuously
message will be accompanied by a single chime
Dealer displayed while operating the vehicle. Chimes will
and the Malfunction Indicator Light. We recom-
also accompany the 75, 50 and 25 mile remaining
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID (DEF) mend you drive to the nearest authorized dealer
distances. The DEF Low telltale will be on continu-
and have your vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING MESSAGES ously until DEF fluid is topped off.
If not corrected in 50 miles, vehicle will enter
 Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF — This message the “Engine Will not restart in XXX mi Service
Your vehicle will begin displaying warning
will display when the DEF driving range is less than DEF See dealer” warning stage and message.
messages when the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
one mile, DEF fluid top off is required or the engine
level reaches a driving range of approximately  Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This
will not restart. The message will be displayed in the
500 miles (800 km). If the following warning message will display if the DEF system has
instrument cluster display during vehicle start up,
message sequence is ignored, your vehicle may detected the incorrect fluid has been introduced
and it will be accompanied by a single chime.
not restart unless DEF is added with in the to the DEF tank. The message will be accompa-
The DEF Low telltale will be illuminated continuously
displayed mileage shown in the cluster message. nied by a single chime. We recommend you
until DEF fluid tank is filled with a minimum of
 Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low drive to your nearest authorized dealer and
two gallons of DEF.
Refill Soon — This message will display when have your vehicle serviced immediately. If not
DEF driving range is less than 500 miles, DEF corrected in 30 miles, vehicle will enter the
fluid top off is required within the displayed “Engine Will not restart in XXX mi Service DEF
mileage. The message will be displayed in the See dealer” warning stage and message.
 Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF  Engine Will Not Start Service DEF System See may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
See Dealer — This message is first displayed if Dealer — This message will display when the restart after the current drive cycle.
the fault detected is not serviced after 50 miles fault detected is not serviced after the Engine When load reduction is activated, the message
of operation. It is also displayed at 150 miles, will not restart Service DEF System See Dealer “Battery Saver On Some Systems May Have
125 miles and 100 miles. System service is message is displayed on the next subsequent Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument
required within the displayed mileage. The restart. Your engine will not start unless your cluster.
message will be displayed during vehicle start vehicle is serviced by an authorized dealer.
up with an updated distance mileage, and it will The message will be accompanied by a single These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
be accompanied by a single chime. Starting at chime. Your Malfunction Indicator Light will low state of charge and continues to lose electrical 3
100 miles, remaining range will be continuously be continuously illuminated. If the message charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
displayed while operating the vehicle. Chimes appears and you can not start the engine, we sustain.
will also accompany the 75, 50 and 25 mile recommend having your vehicle towed to the NOTE:
remaining distances. We recommend you drive nearest authorized dealer immediately.  The charging system is independent from load
to the nearest authorized dealer and have your reduction. The charging system performs a diag-
vehicle serviced immediately. BATTERY SAVER O N/BATTERY S AVER nostic on the charging system continuously.
 Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System See MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL L OAD  If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
Dealer — This message will display if DEF system REDUCTION ACTIONS — I F EQUIPPED indicate a problem with the charging system.
issue detected is not serviced during the allowed Refer to “Battery Charge Warning Light” in
period. Your engine will not restart unless your This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
vehicle is serviced by an authorized dealer. This Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
message will be displayed when under 1 mile the electrical system and status of the vehicle
battery. The electrical loads that may be switched off
until engine will not start and each time the
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
vehicle is started, and will be continuously In cases when the IBS detects charging system
affected by load reduction:
displayed. The message will be accompanied by a failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
single chime. Your Malfunction Indicator Light will deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will  Heated Seats / Vented Seats / Heated Wheel
be continuously illumined. We highly recommend take place to extend the driving time and distance  Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
you drive to the nearest authorized dealer if the of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
 HVAC System
message appears while engine is running. turning off non-essential electrical loads.
 115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk  Audio and Telematics System
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or

more of the following conditions:
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
“Battery Saver Mode”) The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
 The charging system cannot deliver enough
During a trip: the instrument panel together with a dedicated
electrical power to the vehicle system because
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
the electrical loads are larger than the capability  Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible: These indications are indicative and precautionary and
of charging system. The charging system is still
 Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior). as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or
functioning properly.
 Check what may be plugged in to power
alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s
 Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volt AC, USB ports.
cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts,  Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature). the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will
115 Volt AC, USB ports) during certain driving  Check the audio settings (volume). display first if applicable. The system check menu may
conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stop- appear different based upon equipment options and
ping). After a trip:
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
 Check if any aftermarket equipment was may not appear.
 Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
and similar devices. accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review RED WARNING LIGHTS
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
 Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by currents). Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
long parking periods). This warning light indicates when
 Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
 The vehicle was parked for an extended period driving time and parking time). the driver or passenger seat belt is
of time (weeks, months). unbuckled. When the ignition is first
 The vehicle should have service performed if placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
 The battery was recently replaced and was not the message is still present during consecutive
charged completely. position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
 The battery was discharged by an electrical load driving pattern did not help to identify the cause. driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
left on when the vehicle was parked. remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
 The battery was used for an extended period will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
with the engine not running to supply radio, will sound.
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and for further information.
similar devices.
Air Bag Warning Light condition has been corrected. If the problem is related Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
This warning light will illuminate to
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
felt during each stop. failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
check when the ignition is placed in the
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the system is required.
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
3
fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have in the master cylinder has dropped below a illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as specified level. should then turn off unless the parking brake is
soon as possible. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
Brake Warning Light NOTE: authorized dealer.
This warning light monitors various brake The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level The light also will turn on when the parking brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
conditions. The vehicle should have service is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
parking brake application. If the brake
performed, and the brake fluid level checked. position.
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is NOTE:
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock necessary. This light shows only that the parking brake is
Brake System reservoir. applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
WARNING! cation.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) immediately.
system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
Hood Open Warning Light temperature reading does not return to normal, Oil Temperature Warning Light
turn the engine off immediately and call for
This warning light will illuminate when the This warning light will illuminate to
service.
hood is ajar/open and not fully closed. indicate the engine oil temperature is
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of high. If the light turns on while driving,
Emergency” for further information. stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
NOTE:
Battery Charge Warning Light as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
return to normal levels.
chime. This warning light will illuminate when the
Vehicle Security Warning Light — battery is not charging properly. If it stays Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
If Equipped on while the engine is running, there may Light
be a malfunction with the charging This warning light will illuminate to indicate
This light will flash at a fast rate for system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as a problem with the Electronic Throttle
approximately 15 seconds when the possible. Control (ETC) system. If a problem is
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
This indicates a possible problem with the detected while the vehicle is running, the
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
electrical system or a related component. light will either stay on or flash depending on the
disarmed.
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Oil Pressure Warning Light
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the
Light This warning light will illuminate to transmission is placed in the PARK position. The
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the light should turn off. If the light remains on with the
This warning light warns of an light turns on while driving, stop the
overheated engine condition. If the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon however, see an authorized dealer for service as
engine coolant temperature is too high, as possible, and contact an authorized dealer.
this indicator will illuminate and a single soon as possible.
A chime will sound when this light turns on.
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the NOTE:
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
four minutes or until the engine is able to cool, corrected. This light does not indicate how much pedals are pressed at the same time.
whichever comes first. oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is Tailgate Open Warning Light
running, immediate service is required and you CAUTION!
This warning light will illuminate when the
may experience reduced performance, an Continuous driving with the Transmission
tailgate is open.
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
vehicle may require towing. The light will come eventually cause severe transmission damage
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or NOTE: or transmission failure.
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
a bulb check. If the light does not come on during chime.
starting, have the system checked by an Door Open Warning Light 3
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
authorized dealer. This indicator will illuminate when a door
This warning light will illuminate when the is ajar/open and not fully closed.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Trailer Brake has been disconnected.
Light
This warning light will turn on when NOTE:
Transmission Temperature Warning If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Light — If Equipped chime.
Steering (EPS) system. Refer to “Power
This warning light will illuminate to warn
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
This may occur with strenuous usage Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
WARNING! such as trailer towing. If this light turns
Warning Light — If Equipped
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
Continued operation with reduced assist could slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK or This warning light will illuminate to
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light indicate a fault in the ACC system.
should be obtained as soon as possible. turns off, you may continue to drive normally. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise
WARNING! Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
WARNING!
If Equipped Warning Light — If Equipped
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
This light will illuminate when a fault is This warning light will indicate when the
above, can reach higher temperatures than in
detected with the air suspension system. Electronic Stability Control system is
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if
Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the
you drive slowly or park over flammable substances
instrument cluster will come on when the
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
Warning Light (MIL) result in death or serious injury to the driver,
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
occupants or others.
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator out with the engine running. If the “ESC Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Light” comes on continuously with the engine
Diagnostic System called OBD II that running, a malfunction has been detected in the
CAUTION!
monitors engine and automatic ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
transmission control systems. This warning light Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
position before engine start. If the bulb does not vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, as soon as possible to have the problem
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. severe catalytic converter damage and power diagnosed and corrected.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas loss will soon occur. Immediate service is  The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light required. Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
the light stays on through several typical driving Electronic Park Brake Warning Light  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
This warning light will illuminate to
normally and will not require towing. sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to not functioning properly and service is  This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate required. Contact an authorized dealer. ESC event.
loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage.
The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible if this occurs.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Service LaneSense Warning Light — Should one or more tires be in the condition
Warning Light — If Equipped If Equipped mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
This warning light indicates the Electronic This warning light will illuminate when the
Stability Control (ESC) is off. LaneSense system is not operating and CAUTION!
requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer. Do not continue driving with one or more flat
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
was turned off previously. If Equipped 3
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light will illuminate when the the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
windshield washer fluid is low. authorized dealer as soon as possible.
The LaneSense system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque
warnings when the vehicle starts to drift Low Fuel Warning Light Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
out of its lane unintentionally without the be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
use of a turn signal. When the fuel level reaches inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
approximately 1.5 gal (5.5 L) this light manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
 When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift will turn on, and remain on until fuel is
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires
added. of a different size than the size indicated on the
from solid green to solid yellow.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane Warning. should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
has been approached and is in a lane departure for those tires.
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
from solid white/green to flashing yellow. Warning Light As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
 Refer to “LaneSense – If Equipped” in “Starting The warning light switches on and a System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
And Operating” for further information. message is displayed to indicate that telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly
the tire pressure is lower than the underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
recommended value and/or that slow pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
guaranteed. significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and CAUTION! is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping The TPMS has been optimized for the original have the brake system inspected by an authorized
ability. equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and dealer.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for warning have been established for the tire size Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light —
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
If Equipped
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to using replacement equipment that is not of the This warning light will illuminate to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels indicate when a rear axle locker fault has
telltale. can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire been detected.
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is Light — If Equipped
After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
recommended that you take your vehicle to an This warning light will illuminate to
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
authorized dealer to have your sensor function indicate a fault in the Forward Collision
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
checked. Warning System. Contact an authorized
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This dealer for service.
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When Light Mitigation” in “Safety” for further information.
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
Brake System (ABS). The light will turn If Equipped
on when the ignition is placed in the This warning light will illuminate when the
variety of reasons, including the installation of
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and Stop/Start system is not functioning
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
may stay on for as long as four seconds. properly and service is required. Contact
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction If the ABS light remains on or turns on while an authorized dealer for service.
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or system is not functioning and service is required
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to as soon as possible. However, the conventional
continue to function properly. brake system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped height. Protection Mode will automatically be Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator
selected to “protect” the air suspension system, air Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
suspension adjustment is limited due to payload.
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light This light will illuminate when the air
stays on or comes on during driving, it Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — suspension system is set to the Off-Road
means that the 4WD system is not If Equipped 2 setting.
functioning properly and that service is required.
This indicator light will illuminate to For further information, refer to “Active-Level Four
We recommend you drive to the nearest service
indicate when Trailer Merge Assist has Corner Air Suspension System — If Equipped” in
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately. 3
been activated. “Starting And Operating”.
Speed Control Fault Warning Light Refer to “Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)” in “Safety” Air Suspension Normal Height Indicator
This warning light will illuminate to for further information. Light — If Equipped
indicate the Speed Control System is
not functioning properly and service is
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light This light will illuminate when the air
required. Contact an authorized dealer. This indicator light will illuminate when suspension system is set to the Normal
TOW/HAUL mode is selected. setting.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS For further information, refer to “Active-Level Four
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Cargo Light — If Equipped Corner Air Suspension System — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating”.
Light — If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the
This indicator light illuminates to indicate cargo light is activated by pushing the cargo Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
that Forward Collision Warning is off. light button on the headlight switch. Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator suspension system is set to the
Air Suspension Payload Protection Light — If Equipped Aerodynamic setting.
Indicator Light — If Equipped This light will illuminate when the
This indicator light will illuminate to air suspension system is set to the
indicate that the maximum payload may Off-Road 1 setting.
have been exceeded or load leveling For further information, refer to “Active-Level Four
cannot be achieved at its current ride Corner Air Suspension System — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating.”
Entry/Exit Indicator Light — If Equipped 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
is automatically lowered from ride height in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL
position downward for easy entry and exit and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked mode and the front and rear driveshafts
of the vehicle. together forcing the front and rear wheels to are disengaged from the powertrain.
rotate at the same speed.
For further information, refer to “Active-Level Four Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator
Corner Air Suspension System — If Equipped” in 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped Light — If Equipped
“Starting And Operating”.
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle The Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. Indicator will illuminate if the vehicle is
Indicator Light — If Equipped The front and rear driveshafts are low on Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF). Refer
mechanically locked together forcing the to “Starting And Operating” for further
This light will blink and alert the driver
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. information.
that the vehicle is changing to a higher
Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio
ride height.
to provide increased torque at the wheels. Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If This indicator light will illuminate for
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further approximately two seconds when the
Indicator Light — If Equipped ignition is turned to the RUN position. Its
information on four-wheel drive operation and
This light will blink and alert the driver duration may be longer based on colder
proper use.
that the vehicle is changing to a lower operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start
ride height. 4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped until telltale is no longer displayed
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle Refer to “Starting The Engine” in “Starting And
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
is in the four-wheel drive HIGH mode. Operating” for further information.
This light indicates when the rear axle The front and rear driveshafts are
lock has been activated. mechanically locked together forcing the
NOTE:
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if the
intake manifold temperature is warm enough.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will No Target Detected Indicator Light — This indicator light will illuminate when
illuminate when there is water detected If Equipped the front fog lights are on.
in the fuel filter. If this light remains on,
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain
Cruise Control is SET and there is no Turn Signal Indicator Lights
the water from the fuel filter to prevent engine
target vehicle detected.
damage, and please see an authorized dealer. When the left or right turn signal is
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If activated, the turn signal indicator
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further 3
CAUTION! will flash independently and the
information. corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
The presence of water in the fuel system circuit
ECO Mode Indicator Light will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
may cause severe damage to the injection
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up
system and irregular engine operation. If the This light will turn on when ECO Mode is (right).
indicator light is illuminated, contact an active.
authorized dealer as soon as possible to bleed NOTE:
the system. If the above indications come on  A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
immediately after refuelling, water has probably Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
been poured into the tank: switch the engine off This indicator light will illuminate when turn signal on.
immediately and contact an authorized dealer. the parking lights or headlights are
 Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
turned on.
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped  If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on the
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates side of the activated turn signal will also illumi-
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With nate to provide additional light when turning.
solid green when both lane markings
Target Light — If Equipped have been detected and the system is
This will display when the ACC is set and “armed” and ready to provide visual and
a target vehicle is detected. torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further And Operating” for further information.
information.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
If Equipped With 7 Inch Instrument Light — If Equipped
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Cluster Display This indicator shows when the Hill
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the speed Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned
control is set. This light will illuminate when the vehicle on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC is
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control armed. HDC can only be armed when the
(ACC) has been turned on but not set. transfer case is in the “4WD LOW” position and the
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If vehicle speed is less then 20 mph (32 km/h). If
Operating” for further information. Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further these conditions are not met while attempting to
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — information. use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
If Equipped flash on/off.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when This indicator light will illuminate when LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” the cruise control is ready, but not set. When the LaneSense system is ON, but
mode. Refer to “Stop/Start System in Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
“Starting and Operating” for further Operating” for further information. illuminates solid white. This occurs when
information. only left, right, or neither lane line has
Speed Control SET Indicator Light — been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped If Equipped With 3.5 Inch Instrument system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle Cluster Display an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
is in the four-wheel drive auto mode, detected lane line.
and the front axle is engaged, but the This light will turn on when the speed
vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. control is set. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
Four-wheel drive will be automatically engaged And Operating” for further information.
when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And
For further information on four-wheel drive Operating” for further information.
operation and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel
Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating.”
BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS If any of these systems require service, the OBD II need to access this information to assist with the
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions
High Beam Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other system.
This indicator light will illuminate to information to assist your service technician in
indicate that the high beam headlights making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually WARNING!
are on. With the low beams activated, be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
 ONLY an authorized service technician should
push the multifunction lever forward dealer for service as soon as possible.
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward CAUTION! 3
service your vehicle.
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever  If unauthorized equipment is connected
further damage to the emission control
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to to the OBD II connection port, such as a
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
pass” scenario. driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.  Be possible that vehicle systems,
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated running, severe catalytic converter damage
occur that may result in an accident
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
involving serious injury or death.
system monitors the performance of the emissions, service is required.
engine, and transmission control systems. When  Access, or allow others to access, infor-
these systems are operating properly, your vehicle mation stored in your vehicle systems,
will provide excellent performance and fuel ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM including personal information.
economy, as well as engine emissions well within (OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
current government regulations.
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access “Multimedia”.
to information related to the performance of your
emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
 The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, position or start the engine. This means that
you must do the following: your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to can proceed to the I/M station.
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
control system. Failure to pass could prevent but do not crank or start the engine. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
vehicle registration. NOTE: authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to was recently serviced or had a battery failure or
For states that require an Inspection and replacement, you may need to do nothing more than
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies start this test over.
drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for
the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the
functioning and is not on when the ON position, you will see the “Malfunction above test routine may then indicate that the system
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on as part is now ready.
ready for testing. of a normal bulb check.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently things will happen: normal vehicle operation you should have your
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
replacement. If the OBD II system should be  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle then return to being fully illuminated until you
MIL is on with the engine running.
may fail the test. turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
131
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES  Brake pedal pulsations
WARNING!
 A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS) stop  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
increased vehicle stability and brake performance planing.
under most braking conditions. The system WARNING!
 The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic 4
vehicle control during braking. must never be exploited in a reckless or
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that ence caused by improperly installed or high
user’s safety or the safety of others.
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle output radio transmitting equipment. This inter-
is started and driven. During this self-check, you ference can cause possible loss of anti-lock
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some braking capability. Installation of such equip- ABS is designed to function with the Original
related motor noises. ment should be performed by qualified profes- Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
sionals. may result in degraded ABS performance.
ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels begin to lock. Road  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. turn on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN
increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s). Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
You also may experience the following when ABS need to slow down or stop.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on
activates:  The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
 The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
a short time after the stop) increase braking or steering efficiency beyond functioning and that service is required. However,
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle the conventional brake system will continue to
 The clicking sound of solenoid valves
brakes and tires or the traction afforded. operate normally if the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
(Continued) Light” is on.
132 SAFETY
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
brake system should be serviced as soon as assistance. To receive the benefit of the system,
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. you must apply continuous braking pressure during
manages the distribution of the braking torque
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not the stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
between the front and rear axles by limiting
come on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible. is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
released, the BAS is deactivated.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before
SYSTEM WARNING!
the front axle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing The Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) system
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
(BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control including those resulting from excessive speed in monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
work together to enhance both vehicle stability and vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
control in various driving conditions. dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
user's safety or the safety of others. brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC). reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
Brake Assist System (BAS) Brake System Warning Light severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
and may stay on for as long as four seconds. objects or other vehicles.
emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects
an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or NOTE:
and amount of brake application, and then applies comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help system is not functioning properly and that immediate mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete expla-
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the does not come on when the ignition is turned to the ON/ nation of the available ESC modes.
RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
SAFETY 133
 Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more

WARNING! than appropriate for the steering wheel position. WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road  Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less  Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
conditions and driving conditions, influence than appropriate for the steering wheel position. maintain your vehicle, may change the
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, may negatively affect the performance of the
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as
especially those that involve leaving the roadway ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
soon as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
or striking objects or other vehicles. The suspension, braking system, tire type and size
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
when the TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any 4
or the safety of others. vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
WARNING! vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system enhances injury and death.
directional control and stability of the vehicle under  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
various driving conditions. ESC corrects for the natural laws of physics from acting on the
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
ESC Operating Modes
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent NOTE:
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. accidents, including those resulting from exces- Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle sive speed in turns, driving on very slippery ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
maintain the desired path. surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot ESC On
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to control due to inappropriate driver input for the
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for
does not match the intended path, ESC applies the driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
should only be used for specific reasons as noted
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
in the following paragraphs.
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
(Continued)
134 SAFETY
Partial Off Full Off — If Equipped

WARNING!
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
a more spirited driving experience is desired. only and should not be used on any public roadways. In  The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC OFF” on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
vehicle becomes stuck. the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will prevent all accidents, including those resulting
sound, the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will illuminate, from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slip-
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
and the “ESC OFF” message will display in the pery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator
instrument cluster. To turn ESC on again, momentarily prevent collisions.
Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch and the push the “ESC OFF” switch.
“ESC OFF Indicator Light” will turn off. NOTE: ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
NOTE: System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial And ESC OFF Indicator Light
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
Multiple momentary button pushes may be predetermined speed the system will return to ESC
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
required to return to ESC On. “Full Off”.
mode. It should go out with the engine
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
WARNING! (if equipped). Light” comes on continuously with the engine running,
 When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function- a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If
WARNING! this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and
ality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section, has been  In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will reduction and stability features are disabled. at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency problem diagnosed and corrected.
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
offered by the ESC system is reduced. to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as
mode is intended for off-highway or off-road soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
use only. becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
(Continued) Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active.
SAFETY 135
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” HDC Has Three States:  N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not  D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. activate).
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the  1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
prevailing road conditions. 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but  2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
activation conditions are not met, or driver
NOTE: is actively overriding with brake or throttle  3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
 The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator application).  4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively  5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
on momentarily each time the ignition is placed controlling vehicle speed).
in the ON/RUN mode.  6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
 Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN Enabling HDC  7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h) 4
mode, the ESC system will be on even if it was HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the  8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
turned off previously. following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:  9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking  Driveline is in 4L Range NOTE:
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
 Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive target speed selection, but will not affect the gear
following the maneuver that caused the ESC  Park brake is released
chosen by the transmission. When actively
activation.  Driver door is closed controlling HDC the transmission will shift appro-
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates Activating HDC priately for the driver-selected set speed and corre-
the customer has elected to have the sponding driving conditions.
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a Driver Override
if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The
reduced mode.
set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and The driver may override HDC activation with
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The throttle or brake application at any time.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
speed off-road driving while in 4L Range. HDC HDC Target Set Speeds
maintains vehicle speed while descending hills  P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will
during various driving situations. HDC controls not activate.
vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
 R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
136 SAFETY
Deactivating HDC Feedback To The Driver Hill Start Assist (HSA)

HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
of the following conditions occur: HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on
 The driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle to the driver about the state HDC is in. an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
or brake application.  The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the
and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does
 The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
activated. This is the normal operating condition not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
for HDC. system will release brake pressure and the vehicle
 The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient will roll down the hill as normal.
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when the The following conditions must be met in order for
grade.
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable condi- HSA to activate:
 The vehicle is shifted to PARK. tions are not met.  The feature must be enabled.
Disabling HDC  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for  The vehicle must be stopped.
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the several seconds, then extinguish when HDC
 The park brake must be off.
following conditions occur: disables due to excess speed.
 The driver door must be closed.
 The driver pushes the HDC switch.  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when
HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes.  The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
 The driveline is shifted out of the 4L Range.
The flashing will stop and HDC will activate  The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
 The park brake is applied.
again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently. direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
 The driver door opens. gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R)
 The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph WARNING! gear).
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
 The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph controlling vehicle speed when descending hills.
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately). The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a
 HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
safe vehicle speed.
SAFETY 137
 HSA will work in REVERSE (R) gear and all Towing With HSA Disabling And Enabling HSA
forward gears. The system will not activate if the
Hill Start Assist (HSA) will also provide assistance This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). For
to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer. change the current setting, proceed as follows:
vehicles equipped with a manual transmission,
if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.  If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
WARNING! display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
WARNING!  If you use a trailer brake controller with your “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and further information.
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,  If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer
may not be enough brake pressure to hold to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for further information. 4
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s For vehicles not equipped with an instrument
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other cluster display, perform the following steps:
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
vehicles, people, and objects, and most apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to 1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels
importantly brake operation to ensure safe releasing the brake pedal. pointing straight forward).
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while  HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the 2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P).
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. 3. Apply the park brake.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a Also, be certain to place the transmission in 4. Start the engine.
collision or serious personal injury. PARK.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than
 Failure to follow these warnings can result in a one-half turn to the left.
collision or serious personal injury.
6. Push the “ESC OFF” switch located in the lower
switch bank below the climate control four times
within 20 seconds. The “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” should turn on and turn off two times.
138 SAFETY
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and

then an additional slightly more than one-half
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the
turn to the right. BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer
8. Turn the ignition to the off mode and then back and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to I F E QUIPPED
to on. If the sequence was completed properly, stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will blink several once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two
times to confirm HSA is disabled. radar-based sensors, located inside the taillights, to
NOTE:
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles,
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
feature to its previous setting. trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to
Traction Control System (TCS) “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the further information.
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine
pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce power may be reduced and you may feel the
engine power to provide enhanced acceleration brakes being applied to individual wheels to
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across Off” or “Full Off” modes.
a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will WARNING!
Rear Detection Zones
apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
allow more engine torque to be applied to the When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes. system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
and enters standby mode when the vehicle is in
PARK.
SAFETY 139
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning
The zone length starts at the outside rearview mirror light located in the outside mirrors, in addition to
and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system radio volume. Refer to “Modes Of Operation” in
monitors the detection zones on both sides of this section for further information.
the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
 The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver Radar Sensor Locations 4
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are If the system detects degraded performance due
outside the detection zones. to contamination or foreign objects, a message will
 The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may warn you of a blocked sensor and the warning
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the indicators in side view mirrors will be on. The
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a warning indicators will remain illuminated until
motorcycle or any small object remains at the blockage clearing conditions are met. First clear Warning Light Location
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time the taillights around the sensors of the blockage.
(more than a couple of seconds). After removing the blockage, the following The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
procedure can be used to reset the system: three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
The vehicle’s taillights, where the radar sensors
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and  Cycle the ignition from ON to OFF and then
system will issue an alert during these types of
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system back ON.
zone entries.
can function properly. Do not block the taillights If the blockage message is still present after
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check
racks, etc.). again for a blockage.
140 SAFETY
Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Passing

Overtaking Traffic The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc.
Side Monitoring
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the However, occasionally the system may alert on
Entering From The Rear warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in such objects. This is normal operation and your
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph vehicle does not require service.
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with (24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes.
Overtaking/Approaching
SAFETY 141
Rear Cross Path (RCP) NOTE:

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces be obscured by vehicles parked on either side.
where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be If the sensors are blocked by other structures or
blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is driver.
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
view of the cross traffic, and if an oncoming vehicle the driver is alerted using both the visual and
is detected, alert the driver. audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
Opposing Traffic 4
For information on how Blind Spot Monitoring WARNING!
functions when pulling a trailer, refer to “Trailer
Merge Assist” in this section. Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
WARNING! driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
The BSM system is not designed to detect
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your RCP Detection Zones other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving serious injury or death.
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
serious injury or death. speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
142 SAFETY
Modes Of Operation NOTE: Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind Spot
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the blind
Three selectable modes of operation are available
BSM system, the radio is also muted. spot zone to work while pulling a trailer. Trailer
in the Uconnect System.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall Merge Assist consists of three sub functions:
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a  Automatic Trailer Detection
detected object is present. Whenever an audible  Trailer Length Detection
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only alert is requested, the radio is also muted.
Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state  Trailer Merge Warning
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side always requests the chime.
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when Blind Spot Alert Off
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
the system will respond with both visual and audible
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM, RCP,
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
or Trailer Merge Assist systems.
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected be recalled and used.
object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
corresponds to an alert present on that side of the Trailer Merge Assist
vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. NOTE: 1 — Vehicle
Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear Cross 2 — Trailer
on the same side at the same time, both the visual and Path is disabled.
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible
alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
SAFETY 143
Automatic Trailer Detection Trailer Length Detection NOTE:

There are two modes of operation for the detection Once the trailer presence has been established. Fifth wheel or gooseneck trailers are not supported
of the trailer length: The trailer length will be established (by making a by Trailer Merge Assist.
 Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is 90 degree turn) and then the trailer length
selected, the system will use the blind spot category (example 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be
sensors to automatically determine the pres- displayed. This can take up to 30 seconds after
ence and length of a trailer. The presence of a completing the turn.
trailer will be detected using the blind spot radar NOTE:
within 90 seconds of forward movement of the During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is at a
vehicle. The vehicle must be moving above standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a new
6 mph (10 km/h) to activate the feature. Once “trailer detection request” is enabled by the 4
the trailer has been detected, the system will system once the vehicle resumes motion.
default to the maximum blind spot zone until the Maximum length supported by the Trailer Merge
length has been verified. You will see “Auto” in Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m). Trailer length is
the instrument panel cluster . Trailer Length Detection
considered the forward most portion of the trailer
 Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is hitch to the rearward most portion of the body, 1 — Trailer Length
selected, the system will default to the bumper, or ramp of the trailer. 2 — Trailer Hitch
maximum blind spot zone regardless of Maximum width supported by the Trailer Merge 3 — Trailer Width
what size trailer is attached . Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer width is
NOTE: measured at the widest portion of the trailer and
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is may include wheels, tires, finders, or rails.
placed in the OFF position. To change this setting,
it must be selected through the Uconnect Settings.
144 SAFETY
Trailer length will be identified and placed into one be heard and radio volume reduced. Refer to General Information
of the following categories: “Modes Of Operation” in this section for further
 Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind spot zone information.
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
will be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) . NOTE: vehicle:
 Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft  The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT alert This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
(3 m to 6 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
to 20 ft (6 m) . that are outside the detection zones. Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
 Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to  The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may subject to the following two conditions:
9 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the 1. This device may not cause harmful
30 ft (9 m) . side mirror warning indicator lamps when a interference, and
 Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
(9 m to 12 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
to MAX distance . (more than a couple of seconds).
 Crowded areas such as parking lots, neighbor-
NOTE:
hoods, etc. may lead to an increased amount of Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m) of
false alerts. This is normal operation. dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Development
actual length. Trailers that are the same size as the
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), could be
WARNING! licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
subject to being placed in the category above or
conditions suivantes:
below the correct one. The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
Trailer Merge Warning to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
The BSM system is not designed to detect 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the blind
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
spot function to cover the length of the trailer, plus
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
a safety margin, to warn the driver when there is a
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your le fonctionnement.
vehicle in the adjacent lane. The driver is alerted by
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
the illumination of the BSM warning light located in
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
the outside mirror on the side the other vehicle is
detected. In addition, an audible (chime) alert will
SAFETY 145
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las NOTE:

siguientes dos condiciones: FCW monitors the information from the forward
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
cause interferencia perjudicial y Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que be provided with audible and visual warnings as
pueda causar su operación no deseada. well as a possible brake jerk warning.
NOTE: If the driver does not take action based upon these
Changes or modifications not expressly approved progressive warnings, then the system will provide
by the party responsible for compliance could void a limited level of active braking to help slow the FCW Message 4
the user’s authority to operate the equipment. vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
When the system determines a collision with the
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW) the system determines that the driver intends to
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
WITH MITIGATION — I F EQUIPPED avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate NOTE:
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) with and provide additional brake force as required.  The minimum speed for FCW activation is
Mitigation system provides the driver with audible 3 mph (5 km/h).
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument
below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide  The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn
the maximum braking possible to mitigate the other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign
the driver when it detects a potential frontal
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision posts based on the course prediction. This is
collision. The warnings and limited braking are
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
intended to provide the driver with enough time to
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at and functionality.
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
standstill for two seconds and then release the
 It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
brakes.
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking events within a key cycle, the Active
Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until
the next key cycle.
146 SAFETY
 The FCW system is intended for on-road use NOTE:  Far

only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW  When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Far”
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec- warn the driver of a possible collision with the setting and the system status is “Only Warning”,
essary warnings to the surroundings. vehicle in front. this allows the system to warn the driver of a
 FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as  When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system possible more distant collision with the vehicle
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects from warning the driver of a possible collision in front using audible/visual warnings.
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects with the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”,  More cautious drivers that do not mind
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading “FCW OFF” will be displayed in the instrument frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed. cluster display.  Medium
 FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail-  When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this
able screens.  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
prevents the system from providing limited “Medium” setting and the system status is
active braking, or additional brake support if the “Only Warning”, this allows the system to warn
WARNING! driver is not braking adequately in the event of the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended a potential frontal collision. in front using audible/visual warnings.
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW  When FCW status is set to “Warning and  Near
detect every type of potential collision. The driver Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by driver of a possible collision with the vehicle  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Near”
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. in front using audible/visual warnings and it setting and the system status is “Only Warning”,
Failure to follow this warning could lead to applies autonomous braking. this allows the system to warn the driver of a
serious injury or death. possible closer collision with the vehicle in front
 The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full On” using audible/visual warnings.
from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system
 This setting provides less reaction time than the
Turning FCW On or Off is turned off, it will reset to “Full On” when the
vehicle is restarted. “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display more dynamic driving experience.
in the control settings. Refer to “Uconnect FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.  More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer
 To turn the FCW system on, press the forward programmable through the Uconnect System. this setting.
collision button once. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
 To turn the FCW system off, press the forward further information.
collision button once.
SAFETY 147
FCW Limited Warning General Information La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited The following regulatory statement applies to all
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a vehicle: cause interferencia perjudicial y
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, the with Innovation, Science and Economic Development cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
active braking may not be fully available. Once the Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is pueda causar su operación no deseada.
condition that limited the system performance is subject to the following two conditions:
no longer present, the system will return to its full NOTE:
performance state. If the problem persists, see an 1. This device may not cause harmful
authorized dealer. interference, and 4
2. This device must accept any interference the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster cause undesired operation. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
displays: SYSTEM (TPMS)
 ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Development The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
 Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
This indicates there is an internal system fault. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal suivantes: NOTE:
conditions, have the system checked by an 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
authorized dealer. instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
le fonctionnement. graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values in a different color, or the
Uconnect radio will display a TPMS message, when this
occurs you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
148 SAFETY
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by turn off. The system will automatically update
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the CAUTION!
This means that when the outside temperature system receives the updated tire pressures. The  The TPMS has been optimized for the original
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
pressure should always be set based on cold above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to and warning have been established for the tire
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire receive this information. size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for NOTE: system operation or sensor damage may result
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need when using replacement equipment that is not
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) of the same size, type, and/or style. After-
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum above the recommended cold placard pressure in market wheels can cause sensor damage.
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.  Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s For example, your vehicle may have a recommended the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the cold (parked for more than three hours) placard sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
vehicle is driven — this is normal and there should pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient market tire sealant it is recommended that you
be no adjustment for this increased pressure. temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to
pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop have your sensor function checked.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is
warning limit for any reason, including low always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning
temperature effects and natural pressure prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
loss through the tire. stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the NOTE:
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold  The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the placard pressure value. care and maintenance or to provide warning of
low TPMS Warning Light illuminates, increase the a tire failure or condition.
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard
 The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
SAFETY 149
 Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- receiver module.
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the NOTE:
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. It is particularly important for you to check the tire
 The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility and to maintain the proper pressure.
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu- The TPMS consists of the following components:
rate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation
 Receiver module
has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.  Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors Low Tire Pressure Display 4
 Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire  Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual messages, which display in the instrument possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
tire pressure in the tire. cluster condition (those in a different color in the instrument
 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure placard pressure inflation value as shown in the
"Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives
Warnings the updated tire pressures, the system will
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring System automatically update, the graphic display in the
(TPMS) Warning Light” will illuminate in instrument cluster will return to its original color, and
the instrument cluster and a chime will the “Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light”
sound when tire pressure is low in one or will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the TPMS to receive this information.
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display pressure values in a different color. An "Inflate to
XX" message will also be displayed.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
150 SAFETY
NOTE:  Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need materials that may block radio wave signals Compact Spare
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)  Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels  The non-matching full size spare or compact
above the recommended cold placard pressure in or wheel housings spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pres-
 Using tire chains on the vehicle
Warning Light off. sure in the non-matching full size spare or
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
Service TPMS Warning compact spare tire.
sensors
If a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure  If you install the non-matching full size spare or
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPMS compact spare tire in place of a road tire that
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light” will flash
sensor location condition. When a system fault has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
occurs due to an incorrect TPMS sensor location, limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime.
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
Warning Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds Light and a “LOW TIRE” message will remain on
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic
of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in
sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster in the instrument cluster will still display a pres-
place of the pressure value to indicate which
will display a “Tire Pressure Temporarily sure value in a different color and an “Inflate to
sensor is not being received.
Unavailable” message in place of the tire pressure XX” message.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will display screen. If the ignition switch is cycled, this
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the sequence will repeat, providing the system fault  After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
system fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light” will no longer “Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light” Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will
flash, and the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer flash and the tire pressure display flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
will no longer display, and a pressure value will screen will be displayed showing the tire pressure on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault values the correct locations. display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
can occur due to any of the following: a minimum of five seconds and then display
 Signal interference due to electronic devices or
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) sensors
SAFETY 151
 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a NOTE: Operation:

chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring  Only one tire can be filled at a time when using  The horn will chirp to let the user know when
System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and the Tire Fill Alert system. to stop filling the tire, when it reaches recom-
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, mended pressure.
 The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
and the instrument cluster will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the  The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
minimum of five seconds and then display system is in deactivation mode (if equipped). over filled and will continue to chirp every five
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. The system will be activated when a positive seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire.
increase in tire pressure is detected by the TPMS  The horn will chirp once again when enough air
 Once you repair or replace the original road tire
while inflating the tire. The ignition must be in the is let out to reach proper inflation level.
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
RUN mode, with the transmission in PARK (P).
non-matching full size spare or compact spare,  The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is 4
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, NOTE: then under-inflated and will continue to chirp
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) It is not required to have the engine running to every five seconds if the user continues to
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the enter Tire Fill Alert mode. deflate the tire.
instrument cluster will display a new pressure The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the General Information
value instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit The following regulatory statement applies to all
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle
pressure display screen will be displayed in the vehicle:
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
instrument cluster.
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
to receive this information. If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating and with Innovation, Science and Economic
the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in a null spot Development Canada license-exempt RSS
Tire Fill Alert preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being standard(s). Operation is subject to the
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire received. In this case, the vehicle may need to be following two conditions:
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the moved either forward or backward slightly to exit
1. This device may not cause harmful
tire. the null spot.
interference, and
The customer may choose to disable or enable the
Tire Fill Alert feature through use of the customer
settings in the radio.
152 SAFETY

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS information) must be secured in the
appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de Some of the most important safety features in your booster seat in a rear seating position.
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux vehicle are the restraint systems: 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
conditions suivantes:
OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et front passenger seat, move the seat as far
FEATURES back as possible and use the proper child
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le  Seat Belt Systems restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre section for further information).
 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
le fonctionnement. 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
 Child Restraints
behind them or under their arm.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las Some of the safety features described in this
5. You should read the instructions provided with
siguientes dos condiciones: section may be standard equipment on some
your child restraint to make sure that you are
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no models, or may be optional equipment on others.
using it properly.
cause interferencia perjudicial y If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS shoulder belts properly.
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
Please pay close attention to the information in 7. The driver and front passenger seats should
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint be moved back as far as practical to allow the
NOTE: system properly, to keep you and your passengers front air bags room to inflate.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved as safe as possible. 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
by the party responsible for compliance could void Here are some simple steps you can take to vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
the user’s authority to operate the equipment. minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
1. Children 12 years old and under should into the space between occupants and the
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a door and occupants could be injured.
vehicle with a rear seat. 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the modified to accommodate a disabled person,
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for
Restraints” in this section for further customer service contact information.
SAFETY 153
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied).
WARNING! The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking
(BeltAlert)
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
to a child 12 years or younger, including a Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
child in a rear-facing child restraint. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle the START or ON/RUN position.
to buckle their seat belts. 4
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a Initial Indication
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. Change Of Status
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
SEAT BELT S YSTEMS signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when
even on short trips. Someone on the road may will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN
be a poor driver and could cause a collision that position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
includes you. This can happen far away from home and remain on until both outboard front seat belts active when the outboard front passenger seat is
or on your own street. are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front animal or other items are placed on the outboard
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. passenger seat is unoccupied. front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
vehicle should be belted at all times. speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
154 SAFETY
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or WARNING! WARNING!
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with  In a collision, you and your passengers can  Two people should never be belted into a
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is suffer much greater injuries if you are not single seat belt. People belted together can
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn properly buckled up. You can strike the inte- crash into one another in a collision, hurting
on and remain on until the driver and outboard rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
Lap/Shoulder Belts sure you and others in your vehicle are matter what their size.
buckled up properly.
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
WARNING!
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-  A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely ously injured or killed. of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
with you under normal conditions. However, in a won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown part of your seat belt as low as possible and
seat belts.
out of the vehicle. keep it snug.
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
 A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
WARNING! and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
including the driver, should always wear their
 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
more severe injuries in a collision. The air without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
provided at their seating position to minimize
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t dealer immediately and have it fixed.
of a crash.
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even  A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
though you have air bags.  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
(Continued) could ride too high on your body, possibly
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
causing internal injuries. Always buckle your
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too. (Continued)
(Continued)
SAFETY 155
WARNING! WARNING!
 A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too collision and leave you with no protection.
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
Wear your seat belt snugly. checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
 A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
collision, or if you have questions regarding
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your Pulling Out The Latch Plate 4
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
facility for inspection.
your strongest bones will take the force in a “click.”
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
 A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if and adjust the seat.
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
and shoulder belt are meant to be used the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
together. seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
(Continued) Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
156 SAFETY
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
low across your hips, below your abdomen.
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
lap/shoulder belt.
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it
is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of the anchor point.
sliding under the seat belt in a collision. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded Adjustable Anchorage
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate. As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it position, and if you are taller than average, you will
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
no longer twisted. position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage locked in position.
Positioning The Lap Belt
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, NOTE:
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
upward or downward to position the seat belt away equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or the upward position without pushing or squeezing
shoulder belt. down to the position that serves you best. the release button. To verify the shoulder belt
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button anchorage is latched, pull downward on the
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
retract to its stowed position. If necessary, position.
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
SAFETY 157
Seat Belt Extender Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

WARNING!
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
your injuries in a collision much worse. You upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
might suffer internal injuries, or you could lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
to keep your passengers safe, too. enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
 Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder a different occupant, it must be removed.
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. WARNING! 4
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the  ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
shoulder belt. Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
required in order to properly fit the original
 Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. Extender if, when worn, the distance between pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender an accident is reduced for the mother and the
 Always make all seat belt height adjustments buckle and the center of the occupant’s body unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
when the vehicle is stationary. is LESS than 6 inches. Position the lap belt snug and low below the
 Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
can increase the risk of serious injury or death Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
when the lap belt is not long enough and only behind the back or under the arm.
use in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
158 SAFETY
Seat Belt Pretensioner Switchable Automatic Locking webbing to retract completely in this case and
Retractors (ALR) then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
with pretensioning devices that are designed The seat belts in the passenger seating positions occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into
to remove slack from the seat belt in the event are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking the buckle until you hear a "click."
of a collision. These devices may improve the Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
performance of the seat belt by removing slack restraint system. For additional information, refer In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
work for all size occupants, including those in child Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
restraints. of this manual. The figure below illustrates the Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
locking feature for each seating position. restraint is installed in a seating position that has
NOTE:
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
and under should always be properly restrained in
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant WARNING!
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
replaced immediately. front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
Energy Management Feature child in a rear-facing child restraint.
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
with an Energy Management feature that may help Automatic Locking Retractor — (ALR) Locations
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
controlled manner.
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear
a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the
SAFETY 159
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode Air Bag System Components
WARNING!
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
belt.  Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat  Air Bag Warning Light
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward
belt or children who are using booster seats.  Steering Wheel and Column
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
The locked mode is only used to install
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt  Instrument Panel
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This that have a harness for restraining the child.  Knee Impact Bolsters
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Locking Mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL R ESTRAINT  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
4
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode SYSTEMS (SRS)  Supplemental Side Air Bags
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and  Front and Side Impact Sensors
Some of the safety features described in this
allow it to retract completely to disengage the  Seat Belt Pretensioners
section may be standard equipment on some
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
models, or may be optional equipment on others.  Seat Track Position Sensors
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
 Occupant Classification System
WARNING! The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Air Bag Warning Light
 The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the The ORC monitors the readiness of the
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System electronic parts of the air bag system
feature or any other seat belt function is not Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the whenever the ignition switch is in the
working properly when checked according to following Air Bag System Components: START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition
the procedures in the Service Manual. switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position,
 Failure to replace the seat belt assembly the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
could increase the risk of injury in collisions. not inflate.
(Continued) The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
160 SAFETY
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the In this condition the air bags may not be ready to Front Air Bags
instrument panel for approximately four to eight inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is dealer service the air bag system immediately.
for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
WARNING! bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air
it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either instrument panel could mean you won’t have the bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after light does not come on as a bulb check when the “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
initial startup. ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning an authorized dealer service the air bag system
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect immediately.
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
following occurs, have an authorized dealer If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected,
service the air bag system immediately. which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
 The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that
 The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
four to eight-second interval. a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag 2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
 The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit- Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on
tently or remains on while driving. while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine For additional information regarding the Redundant Air
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know Your
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. Instrument Panel” section of this manual.
SAFETY 161
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately

WARNING! during an impact that requires air bag deployment. WARNING!
 Being too close to the steering wheel or instru- A low energy output is used in less severe collisions.  Do not put anything on or around the air bag
ment panel during front air bag deployment A higher energy output is used for more severe covers or attempt to open them manually. You
could cause serious injury, including death. Air collisions. may damage the air bags and you could be
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort- This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or injured because the air bags may no longer be
ably extending your arms to reach the steering front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects functional. The protective covers for the air
wheel or instrument panel. whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is bag cushions are designed to open only when
buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the the air bags are inflating.
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
front air bag can cause death or serious injury This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or more severe injuries in a collision. The air 4
to a child 12 years or younger, including a front passenger seat track position sensors that bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
child in a rear-facing child restraint. may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
Air Bags based upon seat position. deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
This vehicle is equipped with a right front though you have air bags.
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle passenger Occupant Classification System (“OCS”)
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
seated weight input, as determined by the OCS.
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
WARNING!
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
Features
 No objects should be placed over or near the air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage air bag on the instrument panel or steering including some that may produce substantial
driver and front passenger air bags. This system wheel because any such objects could cause vehicle damage — for example, some pole
provides output appropriate to the severity and harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
type of collision as determined by the Occupant enough to cause the air bag to inflate. collisions.
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
(Continued)
information from the front impact sensors
(if equipped) or other system components.
162 SAFETY
On the other hand, depending on the type and The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists  The front passenger seat is occupied by a
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in of the following: rear-facing child restraint; or
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)  The front passenger is not properly seated or his
that produce a severe initial deceleration. or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period
 Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle Sensor located in the front passenger seat of time.
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether  Air Bag Warning Light Front Passenger Seat Front Passenger Air
or not an air bag should have deployed. Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor Occupant Status Bag Output
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located Rear-facing child Reduced-power
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is restraint deployment
position, away from an inflating air bag. located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Child, including a child
Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. Reduced-power
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the in a forward-facing
The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine deployment OR
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large child restraint or
the front passenger’s most probable classification. Full-power deployment
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the booster seat*
The OCM communicates this information to the ORC.
front air bags.
The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Full-power deployment
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant Properly seated adult OR reduced-power
passenger side of the instrument panel separate classification. In order for the OCS to operate as deployment
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to designed, it is important for the front passenger to be
Reduced-power
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Unoccupied seat
deployment
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may
the driver and front passenger. reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger * It is possible for a child to be classified as an
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that: adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to
Front Passenger Seat  The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has ride in the front passenger seat and never install a
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety very light objects on it; or child restraint system, including a rear-facing child
system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide  The front passenger seat is occupied by a small restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output passenger, including a child; or
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight,
as determined by the OCS.
SAFETY 163
properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
WARNING! Properly seated passengers are: seated weight on the front passenger seat
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in  Sitting upright The front passenger’s seated weight must be
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
 Facing forward
front air bag can cause death or serious injury Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
to a child 12 years or younger, including a  Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet death. The OCS determines the most probable
child in a rear-facing child restraint. comfortably on or near the floor classification of the occupant that it detects.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the  Sitting with their back against the seatback and The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing the seatback in an upright position or increased seated weight, which may result in an
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that 4
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger
 Children 12 years or younger should always seat may result in a reduced-power deployment of
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
with a rear seat. the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front
probable classification. The OCS estimates the seated Air Bag.
weight on the front passenger seat and where that
weight is located. The OCS communicates the Seated Properly
classification status to the ORC. The ORC uses the
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
classification to determine whether the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adjusted. adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that
important for the front passenger to be seated
the OCS is working improperly.
164 SAFETY
Examples of improper front passenger seating The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
include: probable classification. If an occupant in the front
 The front passenger’s weight is transferred to passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm may provide an output signal to the OCS that is
rest or instrument panel). different from the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, for example:
 The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
 The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
 The front passenger carries or holds an object Not Seated Properly
while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
 Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
 Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
 Accessories that may change the seated weight Not Seated Properly
on the front passenger seat are attached to the
front passenger seat.
 Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly

SAFETY 165
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel  Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
WARNING! aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
 If a child restraint system, child, small teen- front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS  Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is may affect the operation of the air bag system.  At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
seated improperly, the occupant may provide
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, System (SRS) component or SRS related
an output signal to the OCS that is different
or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes component or fastener be modified or replaced
from the occupant’s properly seated weight
on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized with any part except those which are approved
input. This may result in serious injury or death
dealer for service immediately. by FCA US LLC.
in a collision.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical
 Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, WARNING!
with the seatback in an upright position, your
OCS components that may affect the Passenger 4
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS  Unapproved modifications or service proce-
back against the seatback, sitting upright,
to properly classify the seated weight of a front seat dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
passenger, the OCS components must function as related components, seat cover or cushion
your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
designed. Do not make any modifications to the may inadvertently change the air bag deploy-
 Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back- front passenger seat components, assembly, or to ment in case of a frontal collision. This could
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to an passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli-
provide an output signal to the OCS that is authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat sion. A modified vehicle may not comply with
different than the occupant’s properly seated accessories may be used. required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
weight input, which may result in serious injury The following requirements must be strictly dards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
or death in a collision. followed: Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
 Placing an object on the floor under the front  Do not modify the front passenger seat  If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from assembly or components in any way. for persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
working properly, which may result in serious rized dealer.
 Do not use prior or future model year seat
injury or death in a collision. Do not place any
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
objects on the floor under the front passenger
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
seat.
Always use the correct seat cover and cushion
specified for the vehicle.
166 SAFETY
Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable

Curtains (SABICs)
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
front occupants for improved interaction with the Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
front air bags. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
WARNING! trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
 Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee or “AIRBAG.”
impact bolsters in any way.
 Do not mount any accessories to the knee Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc. When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam
Supplemental Side Air Bags into the space between the occupant and the door.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such
a high force that it could injure occupants if they
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) an even greater risk of injury from a deploying Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats. air bag. Label Location
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
WARNING!
outboard side of the seats. injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
Do not use accessory seat covers or place in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to performance could be adversely affected and/or body structure.
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat objects could be pushed into you, causing
belts and body structure. serious injury.
SAFETY 167
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side Side Impacts

windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside WARNING!
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint  Occupants, including children, who are up
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to Controller (ORC) determines whether the against or very close to Side Air Bags can
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular be seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
properly, or if items are positioned in the area impact event is appropriate, based on the severity including children, should never lean on or
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid sleep against the door, side windows, or area
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. the ORC in determining the appropriate response where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or to impact events. The system is calibrated to in an infant or child restraint.
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the  Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
side windows in certain side impact events. vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag priate) are necessary for your protection in all 4
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air collisions. They also help keep you in position,
WARNING! Bags deploy independently; a left side impact away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
 Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle pants must wear their seat belts properly and
or other cargo up high enough to block the
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether sit upright with their backs against the seats.
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. Children must be properly restrained in a child
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
remain free from any obstructions. collisions, including some collisions at certain the size of the child.
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
 In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
not install any accessory items in your vehicle Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal WARNING!
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after- collisions where the front air bags deploy.
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add  Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
roof racks that require permanent attach- Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt against the door or window. Sit upright in the
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time center of the seat.
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the than it takes to blink your eyes.
 Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
vehicle for any reason. deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
(Continued)
168 SAFETY
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or If A Deployment Occurs
WARNING! complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
The front air bags are designed to deflate
 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead side windows in certain rollover or side impact
immediately after deployment.
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side events.
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain NOTE:
Air Bag System Components Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt NOTE: sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
even though you have Side Air Bags. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the air bag system.
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring If you do have a collision which deploys the air
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo- bags, any or all of the following may occur:
NOTE: nents listed below:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior  The air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are
Rollover Events  Air Bag Warning Light
similar to friction rope burns or those you might
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are  Steering Wheel and Column get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.
designed to activate in certain rollover events.  Instrument Panel They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) They are not permanent and normally heal
 Knee Impact Bolsters quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags cantly within a few days, or if you have any blis-
and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
tering, see your doctor immediately.
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags  As the air bags deflate, you may see some
 Supplemental Side Air Bags
and seat belt pretensioners should have deployed. smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
 Front and Side Impact Sensors by-product of the process that generates the
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover  Seat Belt Pretensioners non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
sensing system determines if a rollover event  Seat Track Position Sensors
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose,
may be in progress and whether deployment is or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the
 Occupant Classification System area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation,
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
both sides of the vehicle. cleaning.
SAFETY 169
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have  Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has NOTE:
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, power After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.  Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
WARNING! from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners Response System engine compartment and on the ground near the
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting
 Unlock the power door locks
bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt the system and starting the engine. If there are no
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices
retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized
any of these other functions in response to the (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Enhanced Accident Response System: by following the procedure described below. If you
Restraint Controller System serviced as well. 4
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door Enhanced Accident Response System
NOTE:
 Cut off battery power to the: Reset Procedure
 Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.  Engine In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
 Electric Motor (if equipped) System functions after an event, the ignition switch
 After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
to an authorized dealer immediately.  Electric power steering to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
Enhanced Accident Response System  Brake booster leaks in the engine compartment and on the
In the event of an impact, if the communication  Electric park brake ground near the engine compartment and fuel
network remains intact, and the power remains tank before resetting the system and starting the
 Automatic transmission gear selector
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the engine.
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced  Horn
Accident Response System perform the following  Front wiper
functions:  Headlamp washer pump
 Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
 Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped)
170 SAFETY
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR) identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
WARNING! (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
 Modifications to any part of the air bag system certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
could cause it to fail when you need it. You air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
could be injured if the air bag system is not will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems other parties, such as law enforcement, that have
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo- performed. The EDR is designed to record data related the special equipment, can read the information if
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
CHILD R ESTRAINTS
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front  How various systems in your vehicle were Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add after- operating; all times, including babies and children. Every
market side steps or running boards. state in the United States, and every Canadian
 Whether or not the driver and passenger safety province, requires that small children ride in
 It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the belts were buckled/fastened; proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone  How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
who works on your vehicle that it has an air accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
bag system. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
 Do not attempt to modify any part of your air crash statistics, children are safer when properly
These data can help provide a better
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
or may not function properly if modifications are understanding of the circumstances in which
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer crashes and injuries occur.
WARNING!
for any air bag system service. If your seat, NOTE:
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
be serviced in any way (including removal or non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi- to hold even an infant on your lap could become
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, so great that you could not hold the child, no
manufacturer approved seat accessories may age, and crash location) are recorded. However, matter how strong you are. The child and others
be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag other parties, such as law enforcement, could could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
system for persons with disabilities, contact an in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
authorized dealer. the child’s size.
SAFETY 171
There are different sizes and types of restraints for Before buying any restraint system, make sure that NOTE:
children from newborn size to the child almost it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable  For additional information, refer to http://
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check Safety Standards. You should also make sure that www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. call: 1–888–327–4236
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the  Canadian residents should refer to Transport
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the Canada’s website for additional information:
labels attached to the child restraint. http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
4
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
Infants and Toddlers have not reached the height or weight limits of their
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or who have
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
child restraint
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
Larger Children restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
the height or weight limit of their booster seat
172 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints

WARNING! WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear
old or until they reach either the height or weight front of an air bag. A deploying passenger support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of front air bag can cause death or serious injury is not designed to manage the crash forces of this
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant to a child 12 years or younger, including a type of car seat. In a crash, the support leg may
carriers and convertible child seats. child in a rear-facing child restraint. not function as it was designed by the car seat
manufacturer, and your child may be more
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
severely injured as a result.
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
until they reach the weight or height limit of the child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
SAFETY 173
Older Children And Child Restraints 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
WARNING! shoulder between the neck and arm?
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat  After a child restraint is installed in the 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward touching the child’s thighs and not the
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child or rearward because it can loosen the child stomach?
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for restraint attachments. Remove the child
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
children who are over two years old or who have restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
trip?
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of position. When the vehicle seat has been
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a  When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor- this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder 4
weight or height allowed by the child seat. ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
All children whose weight or height is above the loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and or slouching can move the belt out of position.
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat cause serious personal injury. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
Children Too Large For Booster Seats correctly.
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster Children who are large enough to wear the
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long WARNING!
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
WARNING! their back is against the seatback, should use the
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
 Improper installation can lead to failure of an the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in which may result in serious injury or death.
seat belt alone:
a collision. The child could be badly injured or A child must always wear both the lap and
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
back of the vehicle seat?
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint. 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is
(Continued)
still sitting all the way back?
174 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Combined Weight of Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Anchors LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Restraint Seat Belt Only
Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
SAFETY 175
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren LATCH Positions For Installing Child
(LATCH) Restraint System Restraints In This Vehicle
Crew Cab Full Bench, Quad Cab Full Bench And 60/40 4
LATCH Label Split Bench LATCH Positions
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Seating Position)
system has three vehicle anchor points for installing Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower Seating Position)
anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback and one top tether
anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
176 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
65 lbs child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
(29.5 kg) and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined
restraint?
weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to
No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner Quad Cab or Crew with Full bench rear seat: Use the seat belt and
No
LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions? tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH
No lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
anchorage?
center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
Yes the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child
passenger seat?
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
SAFETY 177
Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
The lower anchorages are round bars There are tether strap anchorages
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
that are found at the rear of the seat located behind each of the rear seats.
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
cushion where it meets the seatback,
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
below the anchorage symbols on the
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH 4
All Quad Cabs Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat:
No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages Available
WARNING!
Outboard Tether Anchorage  Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position
is not approved for installing child seats using
the LATCH attachments. You must use the
Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side (Example Shown) seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
seat in the center seating position.
 Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
Center Tether Anchorage Over Head Rest

178 SAFETY
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
Anchorages Available on the tether strap of the child seat so that (ALR) Seat Belt:
If a child restraint installed in the center position you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages. When using the LATCH attaching system to install
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
outboard position, do not use that outboard 2. Place the child seat between the lower being used by other occupants or being used to
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks anchorages for that seating position. If the secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not second row seat can be reclined, you may a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
install a child seat in that outboard position. recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
WARNING! can be moved forward and rearward in the belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
position to make room for the child seat. You child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
more than one child restraint. Please refer to
may also move the front seat forward to allow behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
“To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint”
more room for the child seat. through the child restraint belt path and then
for typical installation instructions.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
selected seating position. toys and that they should not play with them.
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to the top tether anchorage. See the section WARNING!
described here.
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Top  Improper installation of a child restraint to the
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
Restraint tether anchor. restraint. The child could be badly injured or
If the selected seating position has a Switchable 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow restraint rearward and downward into the turer’s directions exactly when installing an
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See seat. Remove slack in the straps according to infant or child restraint.
the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. (Continued)
Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
each seating position has.
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
SAFETY 179
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
WARNING! are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Child Restraints In This Vehicle
 Child restraint anchorages are designed to Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
withstand only those loads imposed by portion of the seat belt tight around the child
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
circumstances are they to be used for adult clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
items or equipment to the vehicle. retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
Installing Child Restraints Using The into the retractor.
Vehicle Seat Belt 4
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
of a lap/shoulder belt. additional information on ALR.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
WARNING! Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information. Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
 Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
180 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the Weight limit of the Child Restraint a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight
seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
Yes restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
the front passenger seat?
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No Head restraints may not be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
No
belt against the belt path of the child restraint? retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A 1. Place the child seat in the center of the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor seating position. If the second row seat can hear a “click.”
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
(ALR): raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a tight against the child seat.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
of a lap/shoulder belt. wish to move it to its rear-most position to part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat
make room for the child seat. You may also belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the
WARNING! move the front seat forward to allow more webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the
room for the child seat. webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
 Improper installation or failure to properly This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the Locking mode.
the restraint. The child could be badly injured retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
or killed. child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
SAFETY 181
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any WARNING!
Tether Anchorage
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front
step 5. WARNING! of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car 12 years or younger, including a child in a
tighten the lap portion around the child
seat to any location in front of the car seat, rear-facing child restraint.
restraint while you push the child restraint
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether
and the seating position has a top tether that seating position, located behind the top of strap loops located between the rear glass and the
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors back of the rear seat. There is a tether strap loop 4
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. Refer and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint located behind each seating position. Follow the
to “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top System” for the location of approved tether steps below to attach the tether strap of the child
Tether Anchorage” in this section for directions anchorages in your vehicle. restraint.
to attach a tether anchor. Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly 1. Reach between the rear seat and rear glass
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at to access the tether strap loop.
the belt path. It should not move more than
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
the tether strap so that it will reach over the
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check seat back, through the space between the
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. head restraint and the seat back, through the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over to
the tether strap loop behind the center seat.
182 SAFETY
3. Pass the tether strap hook through the space

between the head restraint and the seat back
behind the child seat, through the tether strap
loop behind the seat and over to the center
tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And Center Tether Strap Loop Location
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
NOTE: the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back and headrest, through the tether
If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
strap loop behind the seat and over to the
and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop tether strap loop behind either the right or left
of both child seats should be connected to the
outboard seat.
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap center tether strap loop. This is the correct way to
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap tether two outboard child seats.
according to the child seat manufacturer’s Center Seat:
instructions. 1. Reach between the rear seat and rear glass
to access the tether strap loop.
SAFETY 183
3. Pass the tether strap hook over the headrest

behind the child seat, through the tether strap
loop behind the seat and over to the right or
left outboard tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown 4
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child
Installing Three Child Restraints: seat manufacturer’s instructions, tightening
the right and left tether straps before the
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear center tether strap.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
seat. Route the tether straps following the
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap directions for right and left seating positions,
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap above. WARNING!
according to the child seat manufacturer’s 2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap  An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
instructions. loop, but do not tighten the straps yet. lead to increased head motion and possible
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
Route the tether strap following the directions position directly behind the child seat to
for the center seating position, above. secure a child restraint top tether strap.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
loop. seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
184 SAFETY
TRANSPORTING P ETS EXHAUST GAS Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about WARNING!
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system
panic braking or in a collision. carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat and odorless. Breathing it can make you deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that unconscious and can eventually poison you. loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to
are secured by seat belts. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is
SAFETY TIPS confined areas any longer than needed to raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as
move your vehicle in or out of the area. required.
TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS
 If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift- SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all I NSIDE THE VEHICLE
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT Seat Belts
WARNING! use the recirculation mode. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up the engine running, adjust your heating or must be replaced immediately. Do not
may cause serious injury or death. cooling controls to force outside air into the disassemble or modify the system.
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
sion, people riding in these areas are more conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
likely to be seriously injured or killed. dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
Program facility for inspection.
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your engine exhaust system.
seat belts.
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
SAFETY 185
Air Bag Warning Light position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or
clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your WARNING!
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to vehicle in other ways.  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is WARNING! ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
while driving, have the system inspected at an
or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere for interference. If your floor mat interferes with
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: and place the floor mat in your trunk. 4
remains on while driving, have an authorized  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using
dealer service the vehicle immediately. the passenger’s side floor area.
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
for further information. over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
Defroster using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode  ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
cause a loss of vehicle control.
and place the blower control on high speed. You FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any
should be able to feel the air directed against the other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an addi-  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if tional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
your defroster is inoperable. change the position of the floor mat and may
 ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your cause interference with the accelerator,
Floor Mat Safety Information vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot brake, or clutch pedals.
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. be properly attached and secured to your
(Continued)
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific
Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using make, model, and year of your vehicle.
the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of (Continued)
186 SAFETY
WARNING!
PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD Door Latches
 If the vehicle carpet has been removed and

MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to Tires Fluid Leaks

the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are Check area under the vehicle after overnight
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
each pedal to check for interference with the Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
re-install the floor mats. be located and corrected immediately.
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
 It is recommended to only use mild soap and wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
always check your floor mat has been properly Lights
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
187
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE WARNING!
 If equipped with an 8-speed transmission,
starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible
ENGINES  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, unless the Manual Park Release has been acti-
or in a location accessible to children, and do vated. For the Manual Park Release operation
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, refer to Manual Park Release in “In Case Of
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten Emergency”.
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
your seat belt.
mode. A child could operate power windows,
The starter should not be operated for more other controls, or move the vehicle.
TIP START F EATURE
than 10-second intervals. Waiting a few seconds Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition
between such intervals will protect the starter from  Do not leave children or animals inside parked
switch briefly to the START position and release it. 5
overheating. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
The starter motor will continue to run and will
may cause serious injury or death.
automatically disengage when the engine is
WARNING! running.
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode,
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock This feature allows the driver to operate the
position. Apply the brake before shifting into any
the vehicle. ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
driving range.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in
NOTE: the passenger compartment.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
 This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must
for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be pressed to shift out of PARK.
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
START/STOP button must be held for two Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
START/STOP B UTTON seconds or three short pushes in a row with NEUTRAL Position)
To Turn On The Engine Using The the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
ENGINE START/STOP Button before the engine will shut off. The ignition will to an ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC,
remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector and RUN. To change the ignition modes without
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the OFF mode. these directions:
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the 1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
starter will disengage automatically after the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle place the ignition to the ACC mode.
10 seconds. Not In Park” message and the engine will 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of second time to place the ignition to the
prior to the engine starting, push the button the PARK position, or it could roll. RUN mode.
again. 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
NOTE: time to return the ignition to the OFF mode.
NOTE: If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is START/STOP button is pushed once with the AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and 8-Speed
obtained without pumping or pressing the accel- vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine
will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC
Transmission Only
erator pedal.
position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
(1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark. placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on
Button
See AutoPark section for further details. the following pages occur. It is a back up system and
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push should not be relied upon as the primary method by
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode. The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
NOTE: If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the

WARNING! For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the vehicle may AutoPark.
 Driver inattention could lead to failure to place engine will turn off and the ignition switch will AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the ignition 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver
The MESSAGE “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift
that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in turns the ignition switch OFF.
to P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if
the Instrument Cluster Display and near the If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
gear selector. If the “P” indicator is blinking, vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added AutoPark. WARNING!
precaution, always apply the parking brake
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
when exiting the vehicle. If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
are met:
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the
 AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not  Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
designed to replace the need to shift your 8-speed transmission 5
A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll.
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
 Vehicle is not in PARK As an added precaution, always apply the
should not be relied upon as the primary
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.  Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
4WD LOW — If Equipped
 Driver’s door is ajar
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
 Brake pedal is not depressed
the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark. vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then The MESSAGE “AutoPark Disabled” will be
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster. displayed in the instrument cluster.
are met:
NOTE: Additional customer warnings will be given when
 Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be all of these conditions are met:
8-speed transmission
displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the
 Vehicle is not in PARK “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” to  Vehicle is not in PARK
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less not be seen. In these cases, the gear selector must  Driver’s door is ajar
be returned to “P” to select desired gear.  Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range
 Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run,
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning WARNING! but not have enough power to continue running
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into  Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into when the ignition button/key is released. If this
PARK or the Driver’s Door is closed. the throttle body air inlet opening in an occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is attempt to start the vehicle. This could result pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
in PARK by looking for the "P" in the Instrument in flash fire causing serious personal injury. accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key once
Cluster Display and near the gear selector. As an the engine is running smoothly.
 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
added precaution, always apply the parking brake get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto- If the engine shows no sign of starting after a
when exiting the vehicle. matic transmission cannot be started this 10 second period of engine cranking with the
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to
If Engine Fails To Start
converter and once the engine has started, 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the procedure.
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor  If the vehicle has a discharged battery, COLD WEATHER OPERATION
and hold it there while the engine is cranking. booster cables may be used to obtain a start (B ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine from a booster battery or the battery in
is flooded. another vehicle. This type of start can be To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump use of an externally powered electric engine block
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs,
information. recommended.
release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal AFTER S TARTING
Starting” procedure.
CAUTION! The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE WARNING!

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, both  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, Start the engine with the transmission gear
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat or in a location accessible to children, and do selector in the PARK (P) position. Apply the brake
belts. not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped before shifting to any driving range.
The starter is allowed to crank for up to 25-second with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN Tip Start Feature
intervals. Waiting a few minutes between such mode. A child could operate power windows, Do not press the accelerator. Place the ENGINE
intervals will protect the starter from overheating. other controls, or move the vehicle. START/STOP button briefly to the RUN position and
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked release it. The starter motor will continue to run
WARNING! and will automatically disengage when the engine
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
 Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a may cause serious injury or death. is running.
complete stop, then shift the automatic transmis-
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
sion into PARK and apply the parking brake. NOTE: 5
 Always make sure the ENGINE START/STOP Engine start up in very low ambient temperature This feature allows the driver to operate the
button is in the OFF mode, key fob is removed could result in evident white smoke. This condition ENGINE START/STOP button with the push of a
from the vehicle and vehicle is locked. will disappear as the engine warms up. button, as long as the Remote Start/Keyless
Enter-N-Go key fob is in the passenger
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with CAUTION! compartment.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for  The engine is allowed to crank as long as NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE
25 seconds. If the engine fails to start during this
a number of reasons. A child or others could
period, please wait at least two minutes for the
START/STOP B UTTON
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, starter to cool before repeating start procedure. Observe the instrument panel telltales when
brake pedal or the gear selector. starting the engine.
 If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
(Continued) on, DO NOT START engine before you drain the NOTE:
water from the fuel filter to avoid engine Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
damage. Refer to “Draining Fuel/Water obtained without pumping or pressing the accel-
Separator Filter” in “Servicing And Mainte- erator pedal.
nance” for further information.
To Turn On The Engine Using The NOTE: NOTE:

ENGINE START/STOP Button Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P). obtained without pumping or pressing the accel- START/STOP button is pushed once with the
erator pedal. vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC
the ENGINE START/STOP button once. To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
NOTE: (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark. Refer to
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
A delay of the start, up to five seconds is possible “AutoPark” in this chapter for further information.
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
under very cold conditions. The "Wait to Start" ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
telltale will be illuminated during the pre-heat 2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode. Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
process, When the engine “Wait To Start” light 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE NEUTRAL Position)
goes off the engine will automatically crank. START/STOP button must be held for two seconds The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle to an ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC,
CAUTION! speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine and RUN. To change the ignition modes without
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, will shut off. The ignition will remain in the ACC starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow
DO NOT START the engine before you drain the mode until the gear selector is in PARK and the these directions:
water from the fuel filter to avoid engine damage. button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
Refer to “Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter” 4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
information. with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), place the ignition to the ACC mode.
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
3. The system takes over and attempts to start Not In Park” message and the engine will second time to place the ignition to the RUN
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of mode.
starter will disengage automatically after the PARK position, or it could roll. 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
25 seconds. time to return the ignition to the OFF mode.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the button
again.
AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and 8-Speed If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off The MESSAGE “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Transmission Only the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark. Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions NOTE:
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations are met: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
on the following pages occur. It is a back up system  Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the
and should not be relied upon as the primary 8-speed transmission “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” to
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle not be seen. In these cases, the gear selector must
 Vehicle is not in PARK
into PARK. be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.  Ignition switched from RUN to ACC vehicle may AutoPark.
NOTE: AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
WARNING! For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
 Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will The MESSAGE “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift 5
change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the ignition to P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if
the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
turns the ignition switch OFF.
that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
the Instrument Cluster Display and near the If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the WARNING!
gear selector. If the “P” indicator is blinking, vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added AutoPark.
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the
precaution, always apply the parking brake AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
when exiting the vehicle. are met: A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll.
 AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not  Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an As an added precaution, always apply the parking
designed to replace the need to shift your 8-speed transmission brake when exiting the vehicle.
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and  Vehicle is not in PARK
should not be relied upon as the primary
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.  Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
 Driver’s door is ajar
 Brake pedal is not depressed
4WD LOW — If Equipped EXTREME COLD WEATHER WARNING!

AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
The engine block heater is a resistance heater  Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
installed in the water jacket of the engine. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Disabled” will be It requires a 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with may cause serious injury or death.
displayed in the instrument cluster. a grounded, three-wire extension cord. Its use is
Additional customer warnings will be given when recommended for environments that routinely fall  When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
all of these conditions are met: below -10°F (-23°C). It should be used when the the wireless ignition node is in the “OFF”
vehicle has not been running overnight or longer mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
 Vehicle is not in PARK and lock the vehicle.
periods and should be plugged in two hours prior
 Driver’s door is ajar to start. Its use is required for cold starts with  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
 Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range temperatures under -20°F (-28°C). access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be NOTE: dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning The engine block heater cord is a factory installed for a number of reasons. A child or others could
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
PARK or the Driver’s Door is closed. are available from an authorized Mopar dealer. be warned not to touch the parking brake,
 A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housing brake pedal or the gear selector.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the "P" in the Instrument aids in preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
Cluster Display and near the gear selector. As an a built-in thermostat. or in a location accessible to children, and do
added precaution, always apply the parking brake  A Diesel Pre-Heat system both improves engine not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
when exiting the vehicle. starting and reduces the amount of white with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
smoke generated by a warming engine. mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
STARTING FLUIDS
The engine is equipped with a glow plug preheating
system. If the instructions in this manual are
followed, the engine should start in all conditions
and no type of starting fluid should be used.
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS *No. 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where
extended arctic conditions (0°F/-18°C) exist.
Observe the following when the diesel engine is Operation in ambient temperature below
32°F (0°C) may require special considerations.
NOTE:
operating.
The following charts suggest these options:  Use of Climatized ULSD Fuel or Number 1 ULSD
 All message center lights are off. Fuel results in a noticeable decrease in fuel
 Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off. Fuel Operating Range economy.
 Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated. NOTE:  Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number 2 ULSD
Use “Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels (ULSD)” ONLY. and Number 1 ULSD Fuels which reduces the
 Voltmeter operation:
temperature at which wax crystals form in fuel.
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This is caused by the  The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the
glow plug heating system. The number of cycles pump at the fuel station.
and the length of the cycling operation is controlled  The engine requires the use of “Ultra Low Sulfur
5
by the engine control module. Glow plug heater Diesel Fuel”. Use of incorrect fuel could result in
operation can run for several minutes, once the engine and exhaust system damage. Refer to
heater operation is complete the voltmeter needle “Fuel Requirements” in “Technical Specifica-
will stabilize. tions” for further information.
 If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not
available, and you are operating below (20°F/-6°C),
in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar Premium
Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recom-
mended to avoid gelling (see Fuel Operating
Range Chart).
Engine Oil Usage
Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the correct engine oil viscosity.
Fuel Operating Range Chart.

Winter Front Cover Engine Warm-Up ENGINE IDLING

Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is Avoid prolonged idling, long periods of idling may
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the engine be harmful to your engine because combustion
up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel
pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up. may not burn completely. Incomplete combustion
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate the allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings,
engine at moderate speeds for five minutes before cylinder head valves, and injector nozzles. Also, the
full loads are applied. unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the
oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
Winter Front Cover

A winter front or cold weather cover can be used in
ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C), especially
during extended idle conditions. This cover is
equipped with four flaps for managing total grille
opening in varying ambient temperatures. If a winter
front or cold weather cover is to be used the flaps
should be in the full open position to allow air flow
to the cooling module and automatic transmission
oil cooler. When ambient temperatures drop below
0°F (-17°C) the four flaps need to be closed.
A suitable cold weather cover is available from
your Mopar dealer.
STOPPING THE ENGINE

After full load operation, idle the engine for a few minutes before shutting it down. This idle period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat
away from the turbocharger.
NOTE:
Refer to the following chart for proper engine shutdown.
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine

Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool None
Stop and Go Medium 0.5
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 1.0
5
City Traffic Maximum GCWR 1.5
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR 2.0
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot 2.5
NOTE:
Under certain conditions the engine fan will run after the engine is turned off. These conditions are under high load and high temperature conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS — AUTOMATIC CAUTION! ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
TRANSMISSION If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings, The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
To reduce the potential for engine and shut the engine off immediately. Failure to do so permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
transmission overheating in high ambient could result in immediate and severe engine heater cord to a ground-fault interrupter protected
temperature conditions, take the following actions: damage. 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord. The engine block heater
 City Driving — When stopped, shift the transmis-
cord is routed under the hood on the passenger
sion into NEUTRAL (N) and increase engine idle Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed side of the vehicle between engine air cleaner
speed. Parts assembly and the cowl.
 Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
All engine failures give some warning before For diesel engines, its use is recommended for
 Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission the parts fail. Be on the alert for changes in environments that routinely fall below -10°F (-23°C). It
gear. performance, sounds, and visual evidence that the should be used when the vehicle has not been running
 Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily. engine requires service. Some important clues are: for long periods of time and should be plugged in two
 Engine misfiring or vibrating severely hours prior to start. Its use is required for cold starts
NOTE: with temperatures under -20°F (-28°C).
If the coolant temperature is too high the A/C will  Sudden loss of power
automatically turn off. To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
 Unusual engine noises
use of an externally powered electric engine block
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil  Fuel, oil or coolant leaks heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
Pressure  Sudden change, outside the normal operating recommended.
If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Light turns on while range, in the engine operating temperature
driving, stop the vehicle and shut down the engine WARNING!
 Excessive smoke
as soon as possible. A chime will sound when the Remember to disconnect the cord before
light turns on.  Oil pressure drop
driving. Damage to the 110–115 Volt electrical
NOTE: cord could cause electrocution.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not show how much oil is NOTE:
in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
The block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
under the hood.
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during its first
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or
GASOLINE ENGINES few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This no load operation will extend the time before the
should be considered a normal part of the break-in engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and not interpreted as a problem. Please check and power may be seen at this time.
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
vehicle.
during the break in period. Add oil as required. is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
desirable. DIESEL ENGINE quality grades refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within The diesel engine does not require a break-in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good period due to its construction. Normal operation is NOTE:
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low allowed, providing the following recommendations
5
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. are followed: MUST NEVER BE USED.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory  Warm up the engine before placing it under
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
load. PARKING BRAKE
 Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
periods. ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”  Use the appropriate transmission gear to Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park
in “Technical Specifications”. prevent engine lugging. Brake System (EPB) that offers simple operation,
 Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature
and some additional features that make the
CAUTION! indicators. parking brake more convenient and useful.
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral  Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent
Oil in the engine or damage may result. the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before
 Vary throttle position at highway speeds when leaving the vehicle, make sure that the park
carrying or towing significant weight. brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
You can engage the park brake in two ways: can be applied even when the ignition switch is NOTE:
 Manually, by applying the park brake switch. OFF but the BRAKE telltale light will not illuminate, When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
however, it can only be released when the ignition front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
 Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake is in the ON/RUN mode. and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
feature in the customer programmable features the park brake before placing the gear selector in
section of the Uconnect settings. NOTE:
The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB switch PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
The park brake switch is located on the instrument locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the
panel to the left of the steering wheel (below the the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
released or applied position. The light will extin-
headlamp switch). should always be applied whenever the driver is
guish upon releasing the switch.
not in the vehicle.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage whenever WARNING!
the transmission is placed into PARK. If your foot is
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount  Never use the PARK position as a substitute
of brake pedal movement while the park brake is for the parking brake. Always apply the
engaging. parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
The park brake will release automatically when the
or damage.
ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or
REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an  When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
attempt is made to drive away. key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Electric Park Brake Switch To release the park brake manually, the ignition  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
switch must be in the ON/RUN mode. Put your foot access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the
on the brake pedal, then push the park brake dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring
switch down momentarily. You may hear a slight for a number of reasons. A child or others could
sound from the back of the vehicle while the park
whirring sound from the back of the vehicle while be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
brake engages. Once the park brake is fully
the parking brake disengages. You may also notice be warned not to touch the parking brake,
engaged, the BRAKE telltale light in the instrument
a small amount of movement in the brake pedal. brake pedal or the gear selector.
cluster and an indicator on the switch will
Once the park brake is fully disengaged, The (Continued)
illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while
BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster and
you apply the park brake, you may notice a small
the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake
If exceptional circumstances should make it Auto Park Brake

WARNING! necessary to engage the park brake while the
The electric park brake can be programmed to be
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pressure
applied automatically whenever the vehicle is at
or in a location accessible to children, and do on the electric park brake switch for as long as
a standstill and the automatic transmission is
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless engagement is desired. The BRAKE telltale light
placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. will illuminate, and a continuous chime will sound.
disabled by customer selection through the
A child could operate power windows, other The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
customer programmable features section of the
controls, or move the vehicle. automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
Uconnect Settings.
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in
Any single auto park brake application can be
before driving; failure to do so can lead to motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release
brake failure and a collision. to a complete stop using the parking brake, when
position while the transmission is placed in PARK.
the vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h)
 Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving the parking brake will remain engaged. SafeHold
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or 5
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in WARNING! Brake System that will engage the park brake
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured while
and cause damage or injury. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake the ignition is in ON/RUN.
to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to The park brake will automatically engage if all of
CAUTION! the brake system. Be sure the parking brake is the following conditions are met:
fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so  The vehicle is at a standstill.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on can lead to brake failure and a collision.
with the parking brake released, a brake system  There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system or accelerator pedal.
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric
 The seat belt is unbuckled.
Park Brake system, a yellow EPB fault light will
illuminate. This may be accompanied by the BRAKE  The driver door is open.
telltale light flashing. In this event, urgent service of
the electric park brake system is required. Do not
rely on the parking brake to hold the vehicle
stationary.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing

the Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door
Service Mode has requirements that must be met
in order to be activated:
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
is open. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be  The vehicle must be at a standstill. WARNING!
enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF  The park brake must be unapplied.  Never use the PARK position as a substitute
position and back to ON again.  The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
Brake Service Mode While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault
guard against vehicle movement and possible
lamp will flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an injury or damage.
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the park brake  Your vehicle could move and injure you and
for which you have the knowledge and the right
system to normal operation: others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
equipment. You should only enter Brake Service
move the transmission gear selector out of
Mode during brake service.  Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be  Press the brake pedal with moderate force. sure the transmission is in PARK before
necessary for you or your technician to push the exiting the vehicle.
 Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
electric park brake system, this can only be done  The transmission may not engage PARK if the
WARNING! vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
after retracting the Electric Park Brake actuator.
Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily You can be badly injured working on or around complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
by entering the Brake Service Mode through the a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for verify that the transmission gear position
Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu which you have the knowledge and the right indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
based system will guide you through the steps equipment. If you have any doubt about your blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle stopped, and the PARK position is properly
perform rear brake service. to a competent mechanic. indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! WARNING!
I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to which requires the transmission to be in PARK before
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a the ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned without placing the transmission in PARK. This system
control of the vehicle and hit someone or not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
something. Only shift into gear when the transmission gear selector. ignition is in the OFF mode.
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly NOTE:
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
pressing the brake pedal. The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
 Unintended movement of a vehicle could not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all mode. A child could operate power windows,
in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC mode) 5
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while other controls, or move the vehicle.
before exiting the vehicle.
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
the parking brake, shift the transmission into CAUTION!
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
I NTERLOCK SYSTEM
 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against Shift Interlock (BTSI) system that holds the
unwanted movement.  Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
 When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
idle speed. PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.  Before shifting into any gear, make sure your pedal must be pressed.
(Continued) foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
NOTE: is stopped or moving at low speeds.
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when Gear Ranges
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
The transmission is controlled using a rotary Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
electronic gear selector located on the instrument from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
pedal when shifting between these gears.
panel. The transmission gear range (PRND) is NOTE:
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
displayed both above the gear selector and in the After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual
instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
downshifts can be made using the Electronic
rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake ating. This is especially important when the engine
Range Select (ERS) shift control. Pressing the
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or is cold.
GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the steering wheel)
NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at PARK (P)
while in the DRIVE position will select the highest
low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
available transmission gear, and will display that This range supplements the parking brake by
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the
gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. locking the transmission. The engine can be
gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
Refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation” started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
DRIVE range for normal driving.
in this section for further information. Some while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
NOTE: models will display both the selected gear limit, brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
In the event of a mismatch between the gear and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
selector position and the actual transmission gear
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
parking brake.
the position indicator will blink continuously until
the selector is returned to the proper position, or When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
the requested shift can be completed. before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with
on an uphill grade.
environmental and road conditions. The transmission
electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few
shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt.
This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers). Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the WARNING! WARNING!
transfer case is in a drive position.  The transmission may not engage PARK if the  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
When exiting the vehicle, always: vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
 Apply the parking brake.
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
 Shift the transmission into PARK.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
 Turn the engine off. blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
 Remove the key fob.
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
WARNING!  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Children should be warned not to touch the
 Never use the PARK position as a substitute NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
for the parking brake. Always apply the idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing sion gear selector. 5
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
guard against vehicle movement and possible quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
injury or damage. control of the vehicle and hit someone or
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
something. Only shift into gear when the
 Your vehicle could move and injure you and mode. A child could operate power windows,
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to other controls, or move the vehicle.
pressing the brake pedal.
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
sure the transmission is in PARK before injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all CAUTION!
exiting the vehicle. vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
(Continued) PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
always come to a complete stop, then apply
this can damage the drivetrain.
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the  Before moving the transmission gear selector
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
unwanted movement. damage to the gear selector could result.
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C]
that you have properly engaged the transmission CAUTION! or below), transmission operation may be modified
into the PARK position: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any depending on engine and transmission temperature as
 Look at the transmission gear position display other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), can cause severe transmission damage. once the transmission temperature has risen to a
and is not blinking. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And suitable level.
Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in Transmission Limp Home Mode
 With brake pedal released, verify that the gear
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
selector will not move out of PARK. Transmission function is monitored electronically for
REVERSE (R) abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
DRIVE (D) could result in transmission damage, Transmission
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
This range should be used for most city and Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may
to a complete stop.
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely
NEUTRAL (N) transmission automatically upshifts through all forward degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations,
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply characteristics under all normal operating conditions. turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
the parking brake and shift the transmission into When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
PARK if you must exit the vehicle. when operating the vehicle under heavy loading instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be
WARNING! winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/ necessary.
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) In the event of a momentary problem, the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe shift control (refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS) transmission can be reset to regain all forward
practices that limit your response to changing Operation" in this section for further information) to gears by performing the following steps:
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, NOTE:
of the vehicle and have a collision. using a lower gear range will improve performance and In cases where the instrument cluster message indi-
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting cates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
and heat buildup. shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle. You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
any vehicle speed. When the transmission gear WARNING!
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible.
If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will operate Do not downshift for additional engine braking
automatically, shifting between all available gears. on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the Tapping the GEAR- switch (on the steering wheel) lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
engine turns OFF. will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in causing a collision or personal injury.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top
5. Restart the engine. available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the
GEAR- or GEAR+ switch will change the top When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the available gear. When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying
problem is no longer detected, the a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission
transmission will return to normal operation. shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to
activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve
NOTE:
performance and reduce the potential for 5
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
transmission overheating or failure due to
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
excessive shifting.
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, an authorized
dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation Electronic Range Select (ERS)
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control 1 — GEAR + Switch
allows the driver to limit the highest available gear
2 — GEAR – Switch
when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example,
if you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth
gear), the transmission will not shift above fourth To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR+
gear (except to prevent engine overspeed), but will switch until the gear limit display disappears from TOW/HAUL Switch
shift through the lower gears normally. the instrument cluster.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in FOUR-P OSITION E LECTRONICALLY For additional information on the appropriate use
the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL of each transfer case mode position, see the
mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a S HIFTED TRANSFER CASE — information below:
second time restores normal operation. Normal I F E QUIPPED 2WD
operation is always the default at engine start-up.
This is an electronically shifted transfer case and is Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case normal street and highway driving on dry hard
pushed each time the engine is started.
Switch), which is located on the instrument panel. surfaced roads.
WARNING! 4WD HIGH
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range provides
driving in icy or slippery conditions. The torque to the front driveshaft (engages four-wheel
increased engine braking can cause the rear drive) which allows front and rear wheels to spin at the
wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing around same speed. This provides additional traction for loose
with the possible loss of vehicle control, which or slippery road surfaces only.
may cause an accident possibly resulting in 4WD LOW
personal injury or death.
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque (increased
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
torque over 4WD HIGH) to the front driveshaft; allowing
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
IF EQUIPPED This electronically shifted transfer case provides This range provides additional traction and maximum
four mode positions: pulling power for loose or slippery road surfaces only.
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a
Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range.
manually shifted transfer case or an electronically  Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
shifted transfer case. Refer to the operating NEUTRAL (N)
 Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
instructions for your transfer case, located in this Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
section for further information.  Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
 Neutral (NEUTRAL) towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in this section for further information.
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light
WARNING! same speed. This is accomplished by pushing the for the selected position will stop flashing and
 You or others could be injured or killed if you desired position on the 4WD control switch. remain ON.
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first If the transfer case does not shift into the desired
specific shifting instructions.
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer position, one or more of the following events may
The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are occur:
case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
the front and rear drive shaft from the power- 1. The indicator light for the current position will
Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions
train, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if remain ON.
on dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased
the transmission is in PARK. The parking 2. The newly selected position indicator light will
tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
brake should always be applied when the continue to flash.
driver is not in the vehicle. NOTE:
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in the 3. If the transfer case will not shift, there will be a
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the cluster message stating the 4WD shift has 5
center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer canceled.
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recre-
verify that the transmission gear position ational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” NOTE:
indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
stopped, and the PARK position is properly Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
case position have been met. To retry the selection,
indicated, before exiting the vehicle. The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD push the current position, wait five seconds, and
and 4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer
and indicate the current and desired transfer case to the “Shifting Procedure” for your transfer case,
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed
selection. When you select a different transfer located in this section.
to be driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD)
case position, the indicator lights will do the The “SERV 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
for normal street and highway conditions on dry
following: electronically shifted four-wheel drive system.
hard surfaced roads). Driving the vehicle in 2WD
will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front 1. The current position indicator light will turn If this light remains on after engine start up or
axle is not engaged in 2WD. OFF. illuminates during driving, it means that the
2. The selected position indicator light will flash four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
When additional traction is required, the transfer
until the transfer case completes the shift. and that service is required.
case 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be
used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft,
Shifting Procedure
WARNING!
NOTE:
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV 4WD Warning  If any of the requirements to select a new
Light” is illuminated. Not engaging the parking transfer case position have not been met, the
brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cause personal injury or death. cator light for the previous position will remain
ON and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the require-
NOTE: ments for the selected position have been met.
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
 If all the requirements to select a new transfer Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
case position have been met, the current posi-
damage to driveline components. This electronically shifted transfer case provides
tion indicator light will turn OFF, the selected
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the position indicator light will flash until the five mode positions:
engine speed is approximately three times that of transfer case completes the shift. When the  Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
the 2WD or 4WD HIGH positions at a given road shift is complete, the position indicator light
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and  Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range
for the selected position will stop flashing and
do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). (4WD AUTO)
remain ON.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles  Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
depends on tires of equal size, type and FIVE-P OSITION ELECTRONICALLY  Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in S HIFTED TRANSFER CASE —  Neutral (NEUTRAL)
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain. I F E QUIPPED For additional information on the appropriate use
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
This is an electronically shifted transfer case and is of each transfer case mode position, see the
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case information below:
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit. Switch), which is located on the instrument panel. 2WD
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry hard
surfaced roads.
4WD AUTO For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO

WARNING! mode can be used. In this mode, the front axle is
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range
sends power to the front wheels automatically  You or others could be injured or killed if you engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to the rear
when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. This leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer wheels. Four-wheel drive will be automatically
range may be used during varying road conditions. case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this
4WD HIGH mode will result in lower fuel economy than the
case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range the front and rear drive shaft from the power- 2WD mode.
provides torque to the front driveshaft (engages train, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even When additional traction is required, the transfer
four-wheel drive) which allows front and rear if the transmission is in PARK. The parking case 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be
wheels to spin at the same speed. This provides brake should always be applied when the used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft,
additional traction for loose or slippery road driver is not in the vehicle. forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
surfaces only. same speed. This is accomplished pushing the
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the 5
4WD LOW vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a desired position on the 4WD Control Switch.
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides complete stop before shifting to PARK, and Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for
low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque verify that the transmission gear position specific shifting instructions.
(increased torque over 4WD HIGH) to the front indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are
driveshaft; allowing front and rear wheels to rotate blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
at the same speed. This range provides additional stopped, and the PARK position is properly Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions
traction and maximum pulling power for loose or indicated, before exiting the vehicle. on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
(40 km/h) in this range. This electronically shifted transfer case is designed NOTE:
NEUTRAL (N) to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in the
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and or four-wheel drive auto position (4WD AUTO) for center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used normal street and highway conditions on dry, hard using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer
for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle in 2WD will case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recre-
“Recreational Towing” in this section for further have greater fuel economy benefits as the front ational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing”
information. axle is not engaged in 2WD. in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights NOTE: given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD Before retrying a selection, make certain that all engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
HIGH, 4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located in the the necessary requirements for selecting a new Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
instrument cluster and indicate the current and transfer case position have been met. To retry the depends on tires of equal size, type and
desired transfer case selection. When you select a selection, push the current position, wait five circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
different transfer case position, the indicator lights seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
will do the following: requirements, refer to the “Shifting Procedure”
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
for your transfer case, located in this section.
1. The current position indicator light will traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
turn OFF. The “SERV 4WD Warning Light” monitors the and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
electronically shifted four-wheel drive system. conditions permit.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash If this light remains on after engine start up or
until the transfer case completes the shift. illuminates during driving, it means that the Shifting Procedure
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light four-wheel drive system is not functioning NOTE:
for the selected position will stop flashing and properly and that service is required.
 If any of the requirements to select a new
remain ON.
transfer case position have not been met, the
WARNING!
If the transfer case does not shift into the desired transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
position, one or more of the following events may Always engage the parking brake when powering cator light for the previous position will remain
occur: down the vehicle if the “SERV 4WD Warning ON and the newly selected position indicator
Light” is illuminated. Not engaging the parking light will continue to flash until all the require-
1. The indicator light for the current position will brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may ments for the selected position have been met.
remain ON. cause personal injury or death.  If all the requirements to select a new transfer
2. The newly selected position indicator light will case position have been met, the current position
continue to flash. NOTE: indicator light will turn OFF, the selected position
3. If the transfer case will not shift, there will be a Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front indicator light will flash until the transfer case
cluster message stating the 4WD shift has or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause completes the shift. When the shift is complete,
canceled. damage to driveline components. the position indicator light for the selected posi-
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the tion will stop flashing and remain ON.
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 2WD, 4WD AUTO or 4WD HIGH positions at a
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR NOTE:

The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode
 Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
mately 2 inches (51 mm)) – This position is
SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph intended for off-roading use only where maximum
(100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater ground clearance is required. To enter OR2,
DESCRIPTION than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds push the height selector switch up twice from
66 mph (106 km/h). the NRH position or once from the OR1 position
The air suspension system provides full time load while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
leveling capability along with the benefit of being  Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for While in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds
able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a switch. 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be auto-
normal driving.
matically lowered to OR1. Off-Road 2 may not be
 Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
available due to vehicle payload, an instrument
mately 1 inch (26 mm)) – This position should cluster message will be displayed when this
be the primary position for all off-road driving occurs. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
until Off-Road 2 (OR2) is needed. A smoother “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for 5
and more comfortable ride will result. To enter further information.
OR1, push the height selector switch up once
from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is CAUTION!
below 35 mph (56 km/h). When in the OR1
position, if the vehicle speed remains between If the vehicle is in Off-Road 1 or Off-Road 2
40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for setting, be aware of your surroundings, you may
Air Suspension Switch greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed not have the clearance required for certain
exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be areas and vehicle damage may occur.
1 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer Selectable) automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road 1 may
2 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer Selectable) not be available due to vehicle payload, an
3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator instrument cluster message will be displayed
(Customer Selectable) when this occurs. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
4 — Aero Mode Indicator (Customer Selectable) Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
5 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Panel” for further information.
(Customer Selectable)
6 — Height Selector
 Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately  Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
0.6 inch [15 mm]) – This position provides 2 inches (51 mm)) – This position lowers the vehicle CAUTION!
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. for easier passenger entry and exit as well as When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your
The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading surroundings, you may not have the clearance
when the vehicle speed remains between and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, required for certain areas and vehicle damage
62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) push the height selector switch down once from the may occur.
for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph
speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle (53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below
The system requires that the ignition be in the
will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to
ON/RUN position or the engine running for all user
speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph
requested changes. When lowering the vehicle all of
35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than
the doors, must be closed. If a door is opened at any
or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not
(48 km/h). (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will be cancelled.
be completed until the open door(s) is closed.
NOTE: To return to Normal Height Mode, push the height
selector switch up once while in Entry/Exit or drive This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern
Speed thresholds for raising the vehicle only apply
the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode which keeps the headlights from incorrectly
if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled.
may not be available due to vehicle payload, an shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the
To enter Aero Mode manually push the height instrument cluster message will be displayed when vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first
selector switch down once from NRH at any this occurs. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the
vehicle speed. To return to NRH push the height “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further front will move down first and then the rear.
selector switch up once while vehicle speed is information. After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that
less than 56 mph (90 km/h).
NOTE: the air suspension system operates briefly, this is
NOTE: Entry/Exit mode may be achieved using your key normal. The system is correcting the position of the
Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through fob for easier entry/loading. Refer to “Keys” in vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
vehicle settings in the instrument cluster display or “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further infor- To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
through your Uconnect Radio if equipped. Refer to mation. suspension system has a feature which allows
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to
Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: AIR SUSPENSION MODES NOTE:

This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
 Default Ride Height: The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to running.
 Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as protect the system in unique situations:
Transport Mode
the default for all vehicle speeds and opera- Automatic Aero Mode
tion. This is the selected height that the For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road,
suspension will level for speed changes To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension the air suspension system has a feature which will put
(e.g. raising from Entry/Exit Height at speed, system has a feature which will put the vehicle into the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the
lowering from Off Road Height at speed, etc.). Aero height automatically. Refer to “Instrument automatic load leveling system. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
 Default ride height can be changed by Instrument Panel” for further information. Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” if
manually adjusting the Air Suspension
Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through equipped with a touch screen radio for further
switch to Normal Ride Height or Aero Ride
vehicle settings in the instrument cluster display or information.
Height and staying in the selected height for
2.5 seconds. It will be stored as the default through your Uconnect Radio if equipped. Refer to NOTE: 5
ride height and the height will be maintained “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
until a new default ride height is selected. Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in running.
If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/ Wheel Alignment Mode
disabling of air suspension features must be done NOTE: Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode
through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in This mode is intended to be enabled with engine must be enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
“Multimedia” for further information. running. Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Tire Jack Mode Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” if
WARNING! To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension equipped with a touch screen radio for further
The air suspension system uses a high pressure system has a feature which allows the automatic information.
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster NOTE:
personal injury or damage to the system, see an Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
authorized dealer for service. or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” if equipped running.
with a touch screen radio for further information.
Protection Strategy OPERATION solid indicator lamp is the position the system is
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, working to achieve.
the vehicle will disable load leveling as required Pushing the height selector up once will move the
(suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.). suspension one position higher from the current
Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as position, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. key in
system operation requirements are met. See an ON/RUN position, engine running, speed below
authorized dealer if system does not resume. threshold, etc). The height selector switch can be
NOTE: pushed up multiple times, each push will raise the
If towing with air suspension refer to “Trailer requested level by one position up to a maximum
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further position of OR2 or the highest position allowed
information. based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
Pushing the height selector down once will move
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY Air Suspension Switch the suspension one position lower from the current
MESSAGES 1 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer selectable)
level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. key in
ON/RUN position, engine running, doors closed,
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message 2 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer selectable) speed below threshold, etc). The height selector
will appear in the instrument cluster display. 3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator switch can be pushed down multiple times, each
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting (Customer selectable) push will lower the requested level by one position
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further 4 — Aero Mode Indicator (Customer Selectable) down to a minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the
information. lowest position allowed based on current
5 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system (Customer selectable) conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
error has been detected. 6 — Height Selector Automatic height changes will occur based on
See an authorized dealer for system service if vehicle speed and the current vehicle height.
normal operation does not resume. The indicator lamps and instrument cluster display
The indicator lamps 1 through 5 will illuminate to show
messages will operate the same for automatic
the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator
changes and user requested changes.
lamps will show a position which the system is working
to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are  Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1
flashing, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
position the system is working to achieve. When  Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 5, 4, 3 and
lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing, the lowest 2 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
 Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 5,

4 and 3 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR SUSPENSION NOTE:
The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode
this position. SYSTEM (OFF-ROAD GROUP) — IF EQUIPPED when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph
 Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 4 will be illu- (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater
minated when the vehicle is in this position. DESCRIPTION than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
66 mph (106 km/h).
 Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 5 will be illumi- The air suspension system provides full time load
nated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. leveling capability along with the benefit of being  Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
Entry/Exit mode can be requested up to 33 mph able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a switch. position of the suspension and is meant for
(53 km/h). If vehicle speed is reduced to, and normal driving.
kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4  Off-Road (OR) (Raises the vehicle approximately
will flash and indicator lamp 5 will remain solid 1 inch (26 mm)) – This position is intended for
until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which point off-roading use only where maximum ground
indicator lamp 4 will turn off. clearance is required. To enter OR, push the 5
 Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
height selector switch up once from the NRH
minated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph
the vehicle. (32 km/h). While in OR, if the vehicle speed
exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height
 Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 1 will will be automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road
be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by may not be available due to vehicle payload,
driving the vehicle. an instrument cluster display message will be
Rebel Air Suspension Controls
 Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3, 4, shown when this occurs.
and 5 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment 1 — Off-Road Indicator (Customer selectable)
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle. 2 — Normal Ride Height Indicator
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
(Customer selectable) information.
3 — Aerodynamic Height Indicator
(Customer Selectable)
4 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator
(Customer selectable)
5 — Height Selector
NOTE:
CAUTION! Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is in Off-Road setting, be aware vehicle settings on your Uconnect Radio. When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your
of your surroundings, you may not have the  Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately surroundings, you may not have the clearance
clearance required for certain areas and vehicle 3 inches (73 mm)) – This position lowers the vehicle required for certain areas and vehicle damage
damage may occur. for easier passenger entry and exit as well as may occur.
lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading
 Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, The system requires that the ignition be in the ON/RUN
0.6 inches (15 mm)) – This position provides push the height selector switch down twice from the position or the engine running for all user requested
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,
The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when (53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while
the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed
(100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph until the open door(s) is closed.
than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than
This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern
66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
which keeps the headlights from incorrectly
from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will be cancelled.
shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the
between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) To return to Normal Height Mode, push the height
vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first
for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed selector switch up twice while in Entry/Exit or drive
and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the
falls below 30 mph (48 km/h). the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode
front will move down first and then the rear.
may not be available due to vehicle payload, an
NOTE: instrument cluster display message will be shown After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that
Speed thresholds for raising the vehicle only apply when this occurs. the air suspension system operates briefly, this is
if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled. normal. The system is correcting the position of the
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To enter Aero Mode manually push the height vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
selector switch down once from NRH at any To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
information.
vehicle speed. To return to NRH push the height system has a feature which allows the automatic
selector switch up once while vehicle speed is leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
less than 56 mph (90 km/h). Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
NOTE: AIR SUSPENSION MODES Transport Mode

 Default Ride Height: For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to
 Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as road, the air suspension system has a feature
protect the system in unique situations:
the default for all vehicle speeds and opera- which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height
Aero Mode and disable the automatic load leveling system.
tion. This is the selected height that the
suspension will level for speed changes To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
(e.g. raising from Entry/Exit Height at speed, system has a feature which will put the vehicle into Know Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect
lowering from Off Road Height at speed, etc.). Aero height automatically. Refer to “Instrument Settings” in “Multimedia” if equipped with a touch
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your screen radio for further information.
 Default ride height can be changed by
Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE:
manually adjusting the Air Suspension
switch to Normal Ride Height or Aero Ride NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
Height and staying in the selected height for This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
2.5 seconds. It will be stored as the default running. Wheel Alignment Mode 5
ride height and the height will be maintained Tire Jack Mode Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode
until a new default ride height is selected. must be enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension
If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/ system has a feature which allows the automatic Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
disabling of air suspension features must be done leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” if
through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” equipped with a touch screen radio for further
“Multimedia” for further information. or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” if equipped information.
with a touch screen radio for further information. NOTE:
WARNING!
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
The air suspension system uses a high pressure This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid running.
personal injury or damage to the system, see an
authorized dealer for service.
Protection Strategy OPERATION Pushing the height selector switch up once will
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, move the suspension one position higher from the
the vehicle will disable load leveling as required current position, assuming all conditions are met
(suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.). (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine running,
Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as speed below threshold, etc). The height selector
system operation requirements are met. See an switch can be pushed up multiple times, each push
authorized dealer if system does not resume. will raise the requested level by one position up to
a maximum position of OR or the highest position
NOTE: allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
If towing with air suspension refer to “Trailer speed, etc).
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. Pushing the height selector switch down once
will move the suspension one position lower from
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY Air Suspension Switch the current level, assuming all conditions are met
MESSAGES (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine running, doors
1 — Off-Road Indicator (Customer selectable) closed, speed below threshold, etc). The height
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message 2 — Normal Ride Height Indicator selector switch can be pushed down multiple
will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer (Customer selectable) times, each push will lower the requested level by
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To 3 — Aero Mode Indicator (Customer selectable) one position down to a minimum of Entry/Exit
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further 4 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Mode or the lowest position allowed based on
information. (Customer selectable) current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system 5 — Height Selector
error has been detected.
See an authorized dealer for system service if The indicator lamps 1 through 4 will illuminate to
normal operation does not resume. show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing
indicator lamps will show a position which the
system is working to achieve. When raising or
lowering, the flashing indicator lamp is the position
the system is working to achieve.
Automatic height changes will occur based on

vehicle speed and the current vehicle height.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION!
The indicator lamps and instrument cluster display This vehicle is equipped with an electronically  Do not lock the rear axle on hard surfaced
messages will operate the same for automatic locking rear differential. This differential, when roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is
changes and user requested changes. engaged, mechanically lock together the axle reduced and damage to the drivetrain may
shafts forcing the wheels to spin at an equal rate. occur when the axle is locked on hard
 Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4, 3, 2, and
The locking of the rear differential should only be surfaced roads.
1 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road
 Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 4, situations where one wheel is likely to not be in  Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle
3, and 2 will be illuminated when the vehicle is contact with the ground. It is not recommended to is stuck and the tires are spinning. You can
in this position. drive the vehicle with the differentials locked on damage drivetrain components. Lock the rear
 Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 4 and 3 will be illu- pavement due to the reduced ability to turn and axle before attempting situations or navigating
minated when the vehicle is in this position. speed limitations. terrain, which could possibly cause the vehicle
to become stuck. 5
 Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 4 will be illumi-
nated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode.
Entry/Exit mode can be requested up to 33 mph The locking rear axle is controlled by the AXLE
(53 km/h). If vehicle speed is reduced to, and LOCKER button.
kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 3 Under normal driving conditions, the rear axle
will flash and indicator lamp 4 will remain solid should be unlocked.
until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which point During the command to lock the rear axle, the
indicator lamp 3 will turn off. indicator light will flash until the axle is locked.
 Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu- After the lock command has been successfully
minated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving executed, the light will remain on solid.
the vehicle. Operating in 4WD LOW the locker can be engaged
Axle Lock Button
 Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 4 and 1 will up to 40 mph (64 km/h) and will remain engaged
be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by throughout the 4WD LOW speed range.
driving the vehicle.
 Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 2, 3,
and 4 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment
Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
Operating the locker in 2WD, 4WD AUTO, and 4WD

LOCK/HIGH the locker can be engaged up to
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — Care should be taken to avoid sudden
accelerations when both rear wheels are on a
20 mph (32 km/h). While driving with the locker IF EQUIPPED slippery surface. This could cause both rear wheels
engaged, if speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h), the to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on
locker will automatically disengage, but will The Limited-Slip Differential provides additional the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.
automatically reengage at 20 mph (32 km/h). traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly
when there is a difference between the traction
NOTE: characteristics of the surface under the right and left POWER STEERING
Left to right wheel speed difference may be rear wheels. During normal driving and cornering, the
necessary to allow the rear axle to fully lock. If the limited-slip unit performs similarly to a conventional
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
indicator light is flashing after selecting the rear differential. On slippery surfaces, however, the The electric power steering system will give you
axle lock mode, drive the vehicle in a turn or on differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear effective vehicle response and increased ease of
loose gravel to expedite the locking action. wheel having the better traction. maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
The axle locker could become torque locked due to The Limited-Slip Differential is especially helpful vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking
side to side loads on the rear axle. Driving slowly during slippery driving conditions. With both rear and proper feel while driving. If the electric steering
while turning the steering wheel from a left hand wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application system experiences a fault that prevents it from
turn to a right hand turn or driving in REVERSE for of the accelerator will supply maximum traction. providing assist, you will still have the ability to
a short distance may be required to release the When starting with only one rear wheel on an steer the vehicle manually.
torque lock and unlock the axles. excessively slippery surface, slight momentary If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the
To unlock the rear axle; push the AXLE LOCK application of the parking brake may be necessary vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service.
button. The AXLE LOCK indicator light will go out to gain maximum traction. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
when the rear axle is unlocked. assistance.
WARNING!
When servicing vehicles equipped with a
limited-slip or locking differential never run the
engine with one rear wheel off the ground since
the vehicle may drive through the rear wheel
remaining on the ground and result in
unintended movement.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER

STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINES AUTOMATIC MODE
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, they ONLY — IF EQUIPPED The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. It will remain in STOP/START
indicate that extreme steering maneuvers may
have occurred which caused an over temperature This feature offers improved fuel economy by NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle speed
condition in the power steering system. Once shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders greater than 2 mph (3 km/h). At that time, the system
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the during light load and cruise conditions. The system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other
vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and is automatic with no driver inputs or additional conditions are met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO
message turn off. Refer to “Instrument Cluster driving skills required. STOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument NOTE: To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Panel” for further information. This system may take some time to return to full Must Occur:
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE functionality after a battery disconnect.
1. The system must be in STOP/START READY
POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is displayed state. A STOP/START READY message will be
the instrument cluster screen, they indicate the vehicle STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED displayed in the instrument cluster within the
5
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to The Stop/Start function is developed to save fuel Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instrument
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your and reduce emissions. The system will stop the Cluster Display” in “Getting To know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: required conditions are met. Releasing the brake 2. The vehicle must be completely stopped.
 Even if the power steering assistance is no longer pedal or shifting out of DRIVE will automatically
3. The transmission gear selector must be in
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. restart the engine.
DRIVE and the brake pedal depressed.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial Vehicles equipped with eTorque contain a heavy
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds duty motor generator and an additional hybrid The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
and during parking maneuvers. electric battery to store energy from vehicle move to the zero position and the stop/start
 If the condition persists, see an authorized deceleration for use on engine startup after a telltale will illuminate indicating you are in an
dealer for service. stop as well as providing launch torque assist. Autostop. While in an Autostop, the Climate
Controls system may automatically adjust airflow
to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will
be maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
POSSIBLE R EASONS T HE E NGINE DOES It may be possible to operate the vehicle several Conditions That Force An Automatic Shift To Park
consecutive times in extreme conditions and not While In Autostop Mode
N OT AUTOSTOP meet all criteria to enable an Autostop state. The engine will not start automatically and the
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check transmission will be placed in PARK if:
many safety and comfort conditions to see if they
TO START T HE E NGINE WHILE IN
 The driver door is open and brake pedal
are fulfilled. In following situations, the engine will AUTOSTOP MODE
released.
not Autostop:
While in DRIVE, the engine will start when the  The driver door is open and the driver seat belt
 Driver’s seat belt is not buckled brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is is unbuckled.
 Driver’s door is not closed depressed and the transmission will automatically
reengage upon engine restart.  The engine hood has been opened.
 The vehicle is on a steep grade
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start  A STOP/START system error present.
 Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
Automatically While In Autostop Mode The engine may then be restarted by moving the
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
The engine will start automatically when: transmission shift selector out of PARK (e.g. to DRIVE)
achieved
or, in some cases, only by a KEY START. The instrument
 HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower  The transmission selector is moved from DRIVE cluster will display a SHIFT OUT OF PARK message, or a
speed to REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or PARK STOP/START KEY START REQUIRED message, to
 Engine has not reached normal operating  To maintain cabin temperature near the HVAC indicate which action is required.
temperature settings Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
 Engine temperature too high  HVAC is set to full defrost mode Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
 The battery is charging  12 Volt demand requires engine restart
 The transmission is not in DRIVE  Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications)
 Hood is open
 STOP/START OFF switch is pushed
 Vehicle is in 4L transfer case mode
 4WD system is put into 4L mode
 TOW/HAUL mode is selected
 The emissions system override is present
 Accelerator pedal input
 A STOP/START system error present
 Excessive 12 Volt loads
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF T HE S TOP 4. If the STOP/START system is manually turned

off, the engine can be started and stopped by
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
S TART S YSTEM cycling the ignition switch or pressing the When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located STOP/START switch again. accelerator operations at speeds greater than
near the gear selector). The light on the 5. The STOP/START system will reset itself back 20 mph (32 km/h).
switch will illuminate. to an ON condition every time the key is turned The Speed Control buttons are located on the right
off and back on. side of the steering wheel.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE S TOP

S TART S YSTEM
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located
near the gear selector module).
5
2. The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM M ALFUNCTION
STOP/START OFF Switch If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START
system, the system will not shut down the engine. Speed Control Buttons
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message will
in the instrument cluster display. Refer to appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to 1 — CANC/Cancel
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know 2 — SET (+)/Accel
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 3 — On/Off
information.
The system will need to be checked by an 4 — RES/Resume
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the authorized dealer. 5 — SET (-)/Decel
STOP/START system) the engine will not be
stopped.
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control TO SET A D ESIRED SPEED  If the button is continually pushed, the set
system can be reactivated by pushing the Speed speed will continue to increase until the button
Control on/off button and resetting the desired Turn the Speed Control on. is released, then the new set speed will be
vehicle set speed. NOTE: established.
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed Metric Speed (km/h)
WARNING! and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or
 Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system SET (-) button.
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
could go too fast for the conditions, and you could push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed  If the button is continually pushed, the set
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, operate at the selected speed. speed will continue to increase until the button
icy, snow-covered or slippery. is released, then the new set speed will be
TO VARY THE SPEED S ETTING established.
To Increase Speed To Decrease Speed
TO ACTIVATE
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. speed by pushing the SET (+) button. speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster The driver’s preferred units can be selected
display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
on/off button a second time. The cruise indicator light ”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
will turn off. The system should be turned off when not “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for more information. Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
in use. The speed decrement shown is dependent on the
The speed increment shown is dependent on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
WARNING!
U.S. Speed (mph)
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in
use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the  Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
system or cause it to go faster than you want. You 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent
could lose control and have an accident. Always tap of the button results in an increase of
leave the system off when you are not using it. 1 mph.
U.S. Speed (mph) TO DEACTIVATE Speed Control function performs differently. Please
 Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a refer to the proper section within this chapter.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
(cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while slowing
tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without
 If the button is continually pushed, the set need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
erasing the set speed from memory.
speed will continue to decrease until the button sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition a vehicle directly ahead of you.
is released, then the new set speed will be
in the OFF position, erases the set speed from
established.
memory.
NOTE:
Metric Speed (km/h)  If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of
Using Speed Control On Hills you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
 Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap The transmission may downshift on hills to  If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. maintain the vehicle set speed. will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to
NOTE: exceed the original set speed) automatically to 5
 If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the button The Speed Control system maintains speed up and maintain a preset following distance, while
is released, then the new set speed will be down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
established. is normal. The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
TO ACCELERATE F OR P ASSING  Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
an appropriate distance between vehicles.
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When Speed Control.
 Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — cruising at a constant preset speed. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed
TO RESUME S PEED IF EQUIPPED Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving NOTE:
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react
button and release. Resume can be used at any
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise

WARNING!
ADAPTIVE CRUISE C ONTROL (ACC)
Control buttons. The two control modes function
differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.  Does not always fully recognize complex
OPERATION
driving conditions, which can result in The speed control buttons (located on the right
WARNING! wrong or missing distance warnings. side of the steering wheel) operate the Adaptive
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience Cruise Control (ACC) system.
 Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
system. It is not a substitute for active driver following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility for approximately three minutes in the stop
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi- position. If the target vehicle does not start
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle moving within three minutes the parking
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to brake will be activated, and the ACC system
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road will be cancelled.
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of You should switch off the ACC system:
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can  When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
result in a collision and death or serious personal sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
injury. tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
 The ACC system:  When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, 1 — Distance Setting Increase
 Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep 2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a uphill or downhill slopes. 3 — Distance Setting Decrease
disabled vehicle).  When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
 Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-  When circumstances do not allow safe driving NOTE:
tions into account, and may be limited upon at a constant speed. Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
adverse sight distance conditions. to the vehicle will affect the performance of the
Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision
(Continued)
Warning System.
ACTIVATING ADAPTIVE CRUISE TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE

CONTROL (ACC) Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is (ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
above 0 mph (0 km/h). instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is

20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display
will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING! 5
NOTE:
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
 When in Four-Wheel Drive Low Adaptive Cruise Control Ready could accidentally set the system or cause it to
 When you apply the brakes go faster than you want. You could lose control
To turn the system off, push and release the
 When the parking brake is applied and have a collision. Always leave the system off
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
when you are not using it.
 When the automatic transmission is in PARK, At this time, the system will turn off and the
REVERSE or NEUTRAL instrument cluster display will show “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
 When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed
range
 When the brakes are overheated
 When the driver door is open at low speed
 When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low
speed
 ESC Full Off mode is active
TO SET A D ESIRED ACC S PEED TO CANCEL TO TURN OFF

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push The following conditions cancel the system: The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and  The brake pedal is applied. memory if:
release. The instrument cluster display will show  The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
the set speed.  The CANC (cancel) button is pushed.
is pushed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below  An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
 The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted  The trailer brake is applied manually button is pushed.
to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is set when the (if equipped).
vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set  The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
 The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle. position.  You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
NOTE:  The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control TO RESUME
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) cannot be set if System (ESC/TCS) activates.
there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
 The vehicle parking brake is applied. (resume) button and then remove your foot from
in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, after  Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds. the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
the ACC has been set. If you do not, the vehicle may  Driver door is opened at low speeds.
display will display the last set speed.
continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this  A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs. NOTE:
occurs:  If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than
 The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
 The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will two seconds, then the driver will either have to
 The braking temperature exceeds normal range push the RES (resume) button, or apply the
display in the instrument cluster display.
(overheated). accelerator pedal to reengage the Adaptive
 The system will not be controlling the distance
Cruise Control (ACC) to the existing set speed.
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by the  ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
position of the accelerator pedal. vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Metric Speed (km/h)  If the button is continually pushed, the set

WARNING! speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
The Resume function should only be used if traffic 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap increments until the button is released.
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic instrument cluster display.
and road conditions could cause the vehicle to NOTE:
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe
increments until the button is released.  When you override and push the SET (+) button
operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result
The increase in set speed is reflected in the or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
instrument cluster display. current speed of the vehicle.
To Decrease Speed  When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
TO VARY THE SPEED S ETTING While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
by pushing the SET (-) button. sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
To Increase Speed
will automatically slow the vehicle. 5
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by The speed decrement shown is dependent on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):  The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
pushing the SET (+) button.
stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC
The speed increment shown is dependent on the U.S. Speed (mph) host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a stand-
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):  Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a still, after two seconds the driver will either have
U.S. Speed (mph) 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the
tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent  If the button is continually pushed, the set existing set speed.
tap of the button results in an increase of speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decre-  The ACC system maintains set speed when
1 mph. ments until the button is released. The decrease driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
in set speed is reflected in the instrument speed change on moderate hills is normal.
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph incre- cluster display. In addition, downshifting may occur while
ments until the button is released. The increase Metric Speed (km/h) climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is
in set speed is reflected in the instrument normal operation and necessary to maintain set
 Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the
cluster display. 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap ACC system will cancel if the braking tempera-
of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. ture exceeds normal range (overheated).
SETTING THE F OLLOWING DISTANCE I N

ACC
The specified following distance for Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) can be set by varying the
distance setting between four bars (longest), three
bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed,
ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display. Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Decrease button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain
the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) the same lane, the instrument cluster displays the ACC
Set with Target Light icon, and the system adjusts
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance ACC OPERATION A T STOP
until:
In the event that the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
 The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
the set speed.
following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle
 The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
view of the sensor. coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume
 The distance setting is changed. motion without the need for any driver action.
 The system disengages. Refer to the informa- If the target vehicle does not start moving within
tion on ACC Activation. two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
Brake Alert the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
however, the driver can always apply the brakes NOTE: the ACC to the existing set speed.
manually, if necessary. 5
The “BRAKE!” Screen in the instrument cluster
NOTE:
NOTE: display is a warning for the driver to take action
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a stand-
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
still for approximately three consecutive minutes,
system applies the brakes. Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC autonomously.
system will be cancelled.
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
OVERTAKE AID While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if
the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
is opened, the parking brake will be activated, and
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound engaged, and following a vehicle, the system
the ACC system will be cancelled.
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking will provide an additional acceleration up to the
capacity. ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. WARNING!
This additional acceleration is triggered when the
driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
active when passing on the left hand side. must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE C ONTROL (ACC) The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
activity occurs, which may include any of the Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
MENU following: while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels
The instrument cluster display will show the  System Cancel with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC
current ACC system settings. The instrument system will recover after the vehicle has left these
 Driver Override areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
cluster display is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays  System Off tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
depends on ACC system status.  ACC Proximity Warning warning may temporarily occur.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off  ACC Unavailable Warning NOTE:
button (located on the steering wheel) until one of If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
the following appears in the instrument cluster Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display: Cruise Control is still available. For additional infor-
display activity.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off mation refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read

DISPLAY WARNINGS A ND Control Mode” in this section.
MAINTENANCE If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready “Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed Vehicle” Warning in the camera in the center of the windshield, on
setting has not been selected, the display will read the forward side of the rearview mirror.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” Sensor” warning will display and also a chime will To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
Adaptive Cruise Control Set indicate when conditions temporarily limit system important to note the following maintenance items:
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on performance.  Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear
the steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, the windshield.
“ACC SET.” such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system  Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the may also become temporarily blinded due to Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
instrument cluster display. obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
 Do not attach or install any accessories near the
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
sensor, including transparent material. Doing so
and the system will deactivate.
could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating
no longer present, the system will return to the Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume while driving in adverse weather conditions. problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
function by simply reactivating it. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when PRECAUTIONS WHILE DRIVING
NOTE:
 If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects WITH ACC
in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more In certain driving situations, ACC may have
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar should examine the windshield and the camera late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer. located on the back side of the inside rear view and may need to intervene.
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
 Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an
obstruction. NOTE:
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not  Aftermarket add-ons such as snowplows, lift
recommended. These items may keep the When the condition that created limited
kits, and brush/grille bars can hinder module 5
sensors from properly detecting the road and functionality is no longer present, the system
performance. Ensure the radar/camera has no
can inhibit ACC/FCW operation, resulting in the will return to full functionality.
obstructions in the field of view.
warning message. NOTE:
 Height modifications can limit module perfor-
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
mance and functionality.
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,  Do not put stickers or easy passes over the
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and camera/radar field of view.
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
forward facing camera inspected at your autho-  Any modifications to the vehicle that may
system performance. This most often occurs at
rized dealer. obstruct the field of view of the radar/camera
times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy
rain and fog. The ACC system may also become Service ACC/FCW Warning are not recommended.
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster Cleaning Instructions
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, driving directly into displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
the sun and fog on the inside of glass. In these Dust and dirt can accumulate on the cover and
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may block the camera lens. Clean the camera lens with
cases, the instrument cluster display will show
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction a soft microfiber cloth, being careful not to damage
“ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is or scratch the module.
Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance. still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
Towing A Trailer Turns And Bends Using ACC On Hills

ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle
with an Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. system may decrease the vehicle speed and in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load,
Aftermarket trailer brake controllers will not acceleration for stability reasons, with no target traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills,
activate the trailer brakes when ACC is braking. vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the ACC performance may be limited.
curve the system will resume your original set
Offset Driving
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that functionality.
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be NOTE:
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
ACC Hill Example
Turn Or Bend Example
Offset Driving Condition Example

Lane Changing Narrow Vehicles Stationary Objects And Vehicles

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer ACC does not react to stationary objects and
the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react
shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing detected until they have moved fully into the lane. in situations where the vehicle you are following
lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in
for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect ahead. your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply
a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not the brakes if necessary.
be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if
necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
Lane Changing Example

GENERAL INFORMATION La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

WARNING!
The following regulatory statement applies to all In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this mode, the system will not react to vehicles
cause interferencia perjudicial y
vehicle: ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and not activate and no alarm will sound even if you
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
subject to the following two conditions: NOTE: vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure
1. This device may not cause harmful to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle
interference, and and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which
mode is selected.
2. This device must accept any interference the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) C RUISE To Set A Desired Speed
CONTROL M ODE Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR Control on. When the vehicle has
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) mode,
dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Development reached the desired speed, push the
a Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is designed to
suivantes: operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et driver to operate the accelerator. Speed Control been set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating what speed
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le 20 mph (32 km/h). was set. This light will turn on when the system is
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre turned on via the on/off control. It turns green
To change between the different control modes,
le fonctionnement. when the cruise control is set.
push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button which turns the ACC on and the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing of the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
To Vary The Speed Setting To Decrease Speed  If the button is continually pushed, the set
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
To Increase Speed
set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) decrements until the button is released.
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
button.
set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) instrument cluster display.
button. The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to To Cancel
The driver's preferred units can be selected
”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know The following conditions will cancel the Normal
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
Your Instrument Panel” for more information. (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the
”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
The speed decrement shown is dependent on memory:
Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
The speed increment shown is dependent on the  The brake pedal is applied.
speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: U.S. Speed (mph)
 The CANC button is pushed.
U.S. Speed (mph)  Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent
 The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control 5
 Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a System (ESC/TCS) activates.
tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap  The vehicle parking brake is applied.
of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.  If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decre-  The braking temperature exceeds normal range
 If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will (overheated).
ments until the button is released. The decrease
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
in set speed is reflected in the instrument  The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
button is released. The increase in set speed is
cluster display. position.
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)  The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
Metric Speed (km/h)
 Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
1 km/h.
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released.
The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Resume Speed NOTE:  Trailer hitch ball assembly may cause false
 The driver can override the automatic braking braking events if left attached after towing.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any function by pressing the gas pedal, turning  The driver can override the automatic braking
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). ParkSense off via ParkSense switch, or function by pressing the gas pedal, turning the
changing the gear while the automatic rear system ParkSense off via the Rear Park-
To Turn Off brakes are being applied. Sense switch, or changing the gear while the
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in automatic brakes are being applied.
 Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is
memory if: not available. The automatic braking function is intended to
 The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with
 Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
button is pushed. detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position. Assist system or the Braking System Module. gear.
 You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.  The automatic braking function may only be NOTE:
 The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough  The driver is always responsible for controlling
is pushed. to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle. the vehicle.
 The automatic braking function will not be avail-  The system is provided to assist the driver and
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST able if vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode. not to substitute the driver.
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual  The automatic braking function may not be  The driver must stay in full control of the
and audible indications of the distance between the applied fast enough for obstacles that move vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle toward the rear of the vehicle from the left responsible for the vehicle's movements.
when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a and/or right sides. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in
parking maneuver). If your vehicle is equipped with  The automatic braking function can be enabled/ this section for limitations of this system and
the automatic braking function, the vehicle brakes disabled from the Customer Programmable recommendations.
may be automatically applied and released when the Features section of the Uconnect System. ParkSense will retain the last system state
vehicle is in REVERSE if the system detects a
 ParkSense will retain its last known configura- (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
possible collision with an obstacle.
tion state for the automatic braking function when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
through ignition cycles.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY If an obstacle is detected in the left, right, or center
in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of regions, the display will show a single arc in the left
these gear selector positions, the system will remain The ParkSense Warning screen is located within and/or right regions and the system will produce a
active until the vehicle speed is increased to the instrument cluster display. It provides visual tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A warning warnings to indicate the distance between the rear the display will show the single arc moving closer to
will appear in the instrument cluster display indicating fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the vehicle and the tone will change from a single
the vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed. The the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph Instrument Panel” for further information.
(9 km/h).
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
PARKSENSE SENSORS The warning display will turn on indicating the
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has 5
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The been detected.
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from showing a single arc in the left, right, or center
the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
depending on the location, type and orientation of location relative to the vehicle. Single 1/2 Second Tone
the obstacle.
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
Slow Tone Fast Tone For Rear Only Continuous Tone
Slow Tone For Rear Only Fast Tone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Greater than
Rear Distance 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than
79 inches
(inches/cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 inches (30cm)
(200 cm)
Audible Alert Single 1/2
None Slow Medium Fast Fast Continuous
(Chime) Second Tone
None
Arcs 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 5
Reduced
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

Front Distance Greater than 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than
(inches/cm) 47 inches (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert (Chime) None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs None 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE message for five seconds. When the gear selector is
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist and the Front or Rear system is disabled, the moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a
audible alert (chime) after approximately three instrument cluster display will show a vehicle faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the graphic with "OFF" on the corresponding side. display a "WIPE OFF" message on the corresponding
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as blocked system while the vehicle is in REVERSE.
the vehicle is in REVERSE. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings side that is functioning properly.
NOTE:
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system,
programmable. To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
will interrupt the five second messages, and the
 The settings may be programmed through the instrument cluster display will show the vehicle information.
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” graphic with the corresponding arcs and "OFF" If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
in “Multimedia” for further information. message. SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
ENABLING A ND D ISABLING F RONT The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or cluster display make sure the outer surface and
A ND/OR R EAR P ARKSENSE requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
the Front ParkSense switch. system is enabled. If the Front or Rear ParkSense ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the ignition. If the message continues to appear
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink see your authorized dealer.
the Rear ParkSense switch. momentarily, and then the LED will be on. NOTE:
When the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch is pushed to disable the system, SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST Water from a car wash or road slush in freezing
weather may also cause sensors to become
the instrument cluster display will show SYSTEM blocked.
a vehicle graphic of the Front or Rear
ParkSense on/off state for two seconds. Refer to During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know System has detected a faulted condition, the REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once cluster display, see your authorized dealer.
per ignition cycle, and it will display the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM  ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of  The Front ParkSense system will automatically
the radio when it is sounding a tone. disable if a snow plow has been connected to
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash the vehicle.
 Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. WARNING!
must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud,
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the  Drivers must be careful when backing up even
PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE system not working properly. The ParkSense when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
system might not detect an obstacle behind or in behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
PRECAUTIONS front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
NOTE: false indication that an obstacle is behind or in vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
 Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are free front of the fascia/bumper. backing up. You are responsible for safety and
of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the  Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
ParkSense system operating properly. system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers,
5
 Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations trailer hitches, etc. are placed near the rear
could affect the performance of ParkSense. fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the  Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
 When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, the sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
instrument cluster display will show a vehicle assembly is disconnected from the vehicle
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message when the vehicle is not used for towing.
graphic of the Front or Rear ParkSense on/off to appear in the instrument cluster display.
state for two seconds. Furthermore, once you Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, it remains off  ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the is in the lowered or open position. A lowered tail- will be much closer to the obstacle than the
ignition key. gate could provide a false indication that an rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the
obstacle is behind the vehicle and could also continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
 When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE cause a false braking event. detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
position and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off, depending on its size and shape, and give a
the instrument cluster display will show a vehicle  The Rear ParkSense system will automatically
disable when the system detects that a trailer false indication that an obstacle is behind the
graphic with "OFF" in the corresponding side. vehicle, and could cause false braking.
This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as with trailer brakes has been connected to the
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Integrated Trailer Brake Module.
Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle  The driver must control the vehicle’s brakes
CAUTION! into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space on themselves. Automatic emergency braking
 ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side). feature is NOT intended to substitute for the
unable to recognize every obstacle, including NOTE: driver during REVERSE maneuvers.
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
 The driver is always responsible for controlling ENABLING A ND DISABLING T HE
the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
objects, and must intervene as required.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
will not be detected when they are in close
 The system is provided to assist the driver and
SYSTEM
proximity.
not to substitute the driver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time  During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after being ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom- located on the switch panel below the
mended that the driver looks over his/her instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the Uconnect display.
shoulder when using ParkSense.
driver will be required to manually complete the NOTE:
parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST  The system may not work in all conditions Uconnect display, the ParkSense Active Park Assist
(e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy switch is located above the display.
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is space that has surfaces that will absorb the system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist
intended to assist the driver during parallel and ultrasonic sensor waves). switch once (LED turns on).
perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a  New vehicles from the dealership must have at To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
proper parking space, providing audible/visual least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist
instructions, and controlling the steering wheel. ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali- switch again (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is brated and performs accurately. This is due to the
defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector the performance of the feature. The system will
and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle
maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park calibration to account for differences such as
over or under inflated tires and new tires.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only PARALLEL PARKING SPACE ASSISTANCE
automatically for any of the following conditions: operate and search for a parking space when the
following conditions are present: OPERATION/DISPLAY
 Parking maneuver is completed.
 The gear position is in DRIVE. When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
 Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph
enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push
(30 km/h) when searching for a parking space.  The ignition is in the RUN position.
OK To Switch To Perpendicular Park” message will
 Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)  The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is appear in the instrument cluster display. You may
during active steering guidance into the parking activated. switch to perpendicular parking if you desire. Push
space.  The driver’s door is closed. the OK button on the left side steering wheel
 Steering wheel is touched during active steering switch to change your parking space setting.
 The tailgate is closed.
guidance into the parking space. NOTE:
 Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
 ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch is  When searching for a parking space, use the
pushed. NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
turn signal indicator to select which side of 5
 The driver’s door is opened. the vehicle you want to perform the parking
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
 The tailgate is opened. will instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle
system will automatically search for a parking
 Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h),
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if
System intervention. the system will cancel. The driver must then reac-
the turn signal is not activated.
tivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow Park Assist switch.  The driver needs to make sure that the selected
a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE and parking space for the maneuver remains free
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed  Make sure that the outer surface and the under-
and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians,
within eight shifts, the system will cancel and the side of the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
bicycles, etc.).
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction.  The driver is responsible to ensure that the
complete the maneuver manually.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active selected parking space is suitable for the
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then maneuver and free/clear of anything that may
the LED will turn off if any of the above conditions be overhanging or protruding into the parking
are not present. space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
 When seeking a parking space, the driver should instructed to place the gear selector into the
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the REVERSE position.
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
 The feature will only indicate the last detected
parking space (example: if passing multiple
available parking spaces, the system will only
indicate the last detected parking space for the
maneuver).
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward

Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and Parking Space Found — Remove Hands — Shift To Reverse
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
When the driver places the gear selector into the
REVERSE position, the system may instruct the
driver to wait for steering to complete.
Searching
When an available parking space has been found,
and the vehicle is not in position, you will be
instructed to move forward to position the vehicle
for a parallel parking sequence.
Parking Space Found — Stop

Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
removed from the steering wheel, you will be Parking Space Found — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check cancel and the instrument cluster display will NOTE:
their surroundings and move backward. instruct the driver to complete the maneuver It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
manually. stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
 The system will cancel the maneuver if the surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during either when instructed to, or when driver inter-
active steering guidance into the parking space. vention is required.
The system will provide a warning to the driver Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. driver will be instructed to place the gear selector
The driver is then responsible for completing the into the DRIVE position.
maneuver if the system is canceled.
 If the system is canceled during the maneuver
for any reason, the driver must take full control
Parking Space Found — Move Backwards
of the vehicle. 5
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
NOTE: backward movement, the system will instruct the
 It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake driver to check their surroundings and stop the
and accelerator during the semi-automatic vehicle’s movement.
parking maneuver.
 Rear automatic braking is NOT intended to stop the
vehicle for the driver during parking maneuvers. Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
 When the system instructs the driver to remove
their hands from the steering wheel, the driver
should check their surroundings and begin to
back up slowly.
 The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
will allow a maximum of eight shifts between
DRIVE or REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within eight shifts, the system will Check Surroundings — STOP
When the driver places the gear selector into the When the vehicle has reached the end of its
DRIVE position, the system may instruct the driver forward movement, the system will instruct the
to wait for steering to complete. driver to check their surroundings and stop the
vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — STOP
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move forward. NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle
either when instructed to, or when driver inter-
vention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear selector
into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Forward

The system will then instruct the driver to check PERPENDICULAR P ARKING SPACE NOTE:
their surroundings and move backward.  When searching for a parking space, use the
ASSISTANCE O PERATION/DISPLAY
turn signal indicator to select which side of
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is the vehicle you want to perform the parking
enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
to Switch to Perpendicular Park” message will show system will automatically search for a parking
in the instrument cluster display. Push the OK button space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if
on the left side steering wheel switch to change your the turn signal is not activated.
parking space setting to a perpendicular maneuver.
 The driver needs to make sure that the selected
You may switch back to parallel parking if you desire.
parking space for the maneuver remains free
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians,
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK bicycles, etc.).
for Parallel Park” message will appear in the instrument
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards  The driver is responsible to ensure that the 5
cluster display.
selected parking space is suitable for the
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. maneuver and free/clear of anything that may
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be be overhanging or protruding into the parking
instructed to check the vehicle's parking position. space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, surrounding objects/vehicles).
they should shift to PARK. The "Active ParkSense
 When seeking for a parking space, the driver
Complete - Check Parking Position" message will
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
be momentarily displayed.
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
 The feature will only indicate the last detected
parking space (example: if passing multiple
Searching available parking spaces, the system will only
indicate the last detected parking space for the
maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, When the driver places the gear selector into the
and the vehicle is not in position, you will be REVERSE position, the system may instruct the
instructed to move forward to position the vehicle driver to wait for steering to complete.
for a perpendicular parking sequence.
Parking Space Found — STOP

Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
removed from the steering wheel, you will be
instructed to place the gear selector into the Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward REVERSE position.
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be their surroundings and move backward.
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
Parking Space Found — Remove Hands — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards

NOTE: When the vehicle has reached the end of its

 It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake backward movement, the system will instruct the
and accelerator during the semi-automatic driver to check their surroundings and stop the
parking maneuver. vehicle’s movement.
 Rear automatic braking is NOT intended to stop the
vehicle for the driver during parking maneuvers.
 When the system instructs the driver to remove
their hands from the steering wheel, the driver
should check their surroundings and begin to
back up slowly.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
 The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
will allow a maximum of eight shifts between When the driver places the gear selector into the
DRIVE or REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be DRIVE position, the system may instruct the driver 5
completed within eight shifts, the system will to wait for steering to complete.
cancel and the instrument cluster display will Check Surroundings — STOP
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
 The system will cancel the maneuver if the stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle
active steering guidance into the parking space. either when instructed to, or when driver inter-
The system will provide a warning to the driver vention is required.
at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down.
The driver is then responsible for completing the
maneuver if the system is canceled.
into the DRIVE position.
 If the system is canceled during the maneuver Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
for any reason, the driver must take control of
the vehicle.
The system will then instruct the driver to check NOTE:

their surroundings and move forward. It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle
either when instructed to, or when driver inter-
vention is required.
into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

Check Surroundings — Move Forward their surroundings and move backward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its

forward movement, the system will instruct the
driver to check their surroundings and stop the
vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse

driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park
position. When the maneuver is complete, the
driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's
Check Surroundings — STOP parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the
vehicle position, they should shift to PARK. vehicle departs to the right), the LaneSense
The "Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking CAUTION! system provides a haptic warning in the form of
Position" message will be momentarily displayed.  The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt
only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
every obstacle, including small obstacles. The LaneSense system will also provide a visual
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected warning through the instrument cluster display
or not detected at all. Obstacles located above to prompt the driver to remain within the lane
or below the sensors will not be detected boundaries.
when they are in close proximity. The driver may manually override the haptic
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using warning by applying torque into the steering wheel
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in at any time.
order to be able to stop in time when an When only a single lane marking is detected and
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver unintentionally drifts across that lane 5
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
Active Park Sense Complete — Check Parking Position using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. system provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
WARNING! remain within the lane. When only a single lane
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using not be provided.
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
LANESENSE OPERATION
NOTE:
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle, The LaneSense system is operational at speeds When operating conditions have been met, the
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, (180 km/h). It uses a forward looking camera hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up and to detect lane markings and measure vehicle audible and visual warning to the driver when the
moving forward. You are responsible for safety and position within the lane boundaries. driver’s hands are not detected on the steering
must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. When both lane markings are detected and the wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane while no return their hands to the wheel.
turn signal has been applied OR the driver departs
the lane on the opposite side of the applied turn
signal (if the left turn signal is applied and the
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR O FF LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE  When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situ-
The LaneSense button is located on the The LaneSense system will indicate the current ation, the visual warning in the instrument cluster
switch panel below the Uconnect display. lane drift condition through the instrument cluster display will show the left lane line flashing yellow
display. (on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes from
NOTE: When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines solid white to flashing yellow.
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch are gray when both of the lane boundaries have
Uconnect Display screen, the LaneSense button is not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
located above the display. is solid white.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Yellow

Telltale
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale

NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected behavior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
Lane Sense On Message  When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense
Telltale is solid white when only the left lane
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the marking has been detected and the system is ready
LaneSense button again (LED turns on). to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
NOTE: display if an unintentional lane departure occurs on
The LaneSense system will retain the last system the left side.
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected  When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift  When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
 When the LaneSense system is on and both the situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow. been approached and is in a lane departure situ-
lane markings have been detected, the system is The LaneSense telltale changes from solid ation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/off).
"armed" to provide visual warnings in the instru- green to solid yellow. At this time torque is The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
ment cluster display and a torque warning in the applied to the steering wheel in the opposite yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure direction of the lane boundary. applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
occurs. The lane lines turn from gray to white and For example: If approaching the left side of the direction of the lane boundary.
the LaneSense telltale is solid green. lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With Solid Yellow
Telltale Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With
Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE S TATUS Manual Activation Of The Rear View NOTE:

Camera:  If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be
intensity of the torque warning and the warning
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the displayed continuously until deactivated via the
zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can
bottom of the Uconnect display. touchscreen button "X", the transmission is
configure through the Uconnect system screen.
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for 2. Press the "Backup Camera" icon to turn the
OFF position.
further information. Rear View Camera system on.
 The touchscreen button "X" to disable display of
NOTE: the camera image is made available ONLY when
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
 When enabled the system operates above 37 mph Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera mode is the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). exited and the previous screen appears again. When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
 Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
 The system will not apply torque to the steering Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera image its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting wheel position. The active guidelines will show
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System, to another gear, unless the vehicle speed exceeds separate zones that will help indicate the distance
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into to the rear of the vehicle.
Warning, etc.). PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or NOTE:
the touchscreen button “X” to disable display of For further information about how to access and
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA the Rear View Camera image is pressed. change the programmable features of the
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to Whenever the Rear View Camera image is ParkView Rear Backup Camera, refer to “Uconnect
see an image of the rear surroundings of your activated through the "Backup Camera" button Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into in the "Controls" menu, and the vehicle speed is
REVERSE or whenever it is manually activated. greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
When the gear selector is put into REVERSE, the display timer for the image is initiated. The image
image will be displayed in the Uconnect screen will continue to be displayed until the display timer
along with a caution note to “check entire exceeds 10 seconds.
surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear.
A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a CAUTION! REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
hitch/receiver. The following table shows the  To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should view will display the standard Backup Camera
approximate distances for each zone: only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
camera is unable to view every obstacle or gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
Distance To The Rear Of The automatically resume.
Zones object in your drive path.
Vehicle
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m) to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater) recommended that the driver look frequently If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
WARNING! The ParkView Camera is located in the center of (13 km/h). 5
Drivers must be careful when backing up even the tailgate handle. NOTE:
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. NOTE:  If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. icon will appear grey.
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of Zoom View  While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
your surroundings and must continue to pay visible.
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can When the Rear View Camera image is being
result in serious injury or death. displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h) while in any gear selector position, Zoom
View is available. By pressing the “magnifying glass”
icon in the upper left of the display screen, the image
will zoom in to four times the standard view.
Pressing the icon a second time will return the view
to the standard Backup Camera display.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned on), the camera image will
Modes Of Operation
Standard Backup Camera view can be manually
IF EQUIPPED continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless activated by selecting “Backup Camera” through
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the the Controls menu within the Uconnect screen.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed
View Camera system that allows you to see an in the OFF position. There is a touchscreen button Refer to “Parkview Rear Back Up Camera” in this
on-screen image of the surroundings and Top View “X” to disable the display of the camera image. chapter for more information on activation
of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into conditions.
REVERSE or a different view is selected through the When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the surround view Top View
on screen soft buttons. The Top View of the vehicle
will show which doors are open. The image will be camera mode is exited and the last known screen The Top view will show in the Uconnect system with
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a appears again. Rear View and Front View in a split view display.
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across While the Rear View is displayed, and if enabled, There is integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at
the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note active guidelines are overlaid on the image to the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will
will disappear. The Surround View Camera System is illustrate the width of the vehicle, including the change color from yellow to red corresponding the
comprised of four sequential cameras located in the side view mirrors and its projected backup path distance zones to the oncoming object.
front grille, rear tailgate and side mirrors. based on the steering wheel position.
NOTE: Different colored zones indicate the distance to
The Surround View Camera System has program- the rear of the vehicle.
mable settings that may be selected through the The following table shows the approximate
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in distances for each zone:
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the rear Distance To The Rear Of The
Zone
camera view and top view is the default view of the Vehicle
system (Automatic Activation). Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
ParkSense Camera View
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
NOTE: Front Cross Path View When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
 Front tires will display on the image when the Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
tires are turned. will give the driver a wider angle view of view will display the standard Backup Camera
the front camera system. The Top view view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
 Due to wide angle cameras in mirrors, the image
will be disabled when this is selected. gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
will appear distorted. automatically resume.
 Top view will show which doors are open. Rear View Camera
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
 Open front doors will cancel the outside image. Pressing the Backup Camera soft key will the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
provide a full screen rear view with Zoom the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Rear View View.
This is the Default view of the system in If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
REVERSE and is always paired with the NOTE: until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
Top view of the vehicle with optional If the Backup Camera view was selected through REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
active guidelines for the projected path the Surround View Screen, exiting out of the Rear (13 km/h). 5
when enabled. View Camera screen will return to the Surround NOTE:
Rear Cross Path View View Screen. If the Backup Camera was manually  If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
activated through the Controls menu of the and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will Uconnect display, exiting out of the display screen
give the driver a wider angle view of the (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
will return to the Controls menu. icon will appear grey.
rear camera system. The Top view will be
disabled when this is selected. Zoom View
 While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
Front View When the Rear View Camera image is being visible.
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
The Front view will show you what is (13 km/h) while in any gear, Zoom View is available.
immediately in front of the vehicle and is By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper
always paired with the Top view of the left of the display screen, the image will zoom in to
vehicle. four times the standard view. Pressing the icon a
second time will return the view to the standard
Backup Camera display.
Deactivation  Ignition is placed in the OFF position

WARNING!
The system is deactivated in the following  Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
conditions if it was activated automatically: 10 seconds Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Surround View Camera. Always
 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE NOTE: check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
(with camera delay turned on), the camera If the Surround View Camera is activated manually, and to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
image will continue to be displayed for up to the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, deactivation obstructions, or blind spots before backing up.
10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds methods for automatic activation are assumed. You are responsible for the safety of your
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into The camera delay system is turned off manually surroundings and must continue to pay attention
PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF posi- through the Uconnect settings menu. Refer to while backing up. Failure to do so can result in
tion. There is a touchscreen button “X” to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further serious injury or death.
disable the display of the camera image. information.
 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE NOTE:
(with camera delay turned off), the Surround CAUTION!
 If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
View Camera mode is exited and the last known
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the  To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
screen appears again.
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft should only be used as a parking aid.
The system is deactivated in the following cloth. Do not cover the lenses. The Surround View camera is unable to view
conditions if it was activated manually from the every obstacle or object in your drive path.
 If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
Uconnect controls menu via Surround View button
see an authorized dealer.  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
or Backup Camera button:
driven slowly when using Surround View to be
 The “X” button on the display is pressed
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen.
 Vehicle is shifted into PARK It is recommended that the driver look
frequently over his/her shoulder when using
Surround View.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE 5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds
after nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from
ENGINES the nozzle.
The fuel filler is located behind the fuel filler door, 6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
on the left side of the vehicle. 7. To close the fuel filler door, push the
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside center-rear edge (3 o’clock position) of the fuel
the pipe seal the system. filler door and then release. The fuel filler door
will latch closed.
WARNING!
NOTE:
 Never have any smoking materials lit in or Fuel Filler Door In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push
the tank is being filled. 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe,
the nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors on the fuel filler door around the perimeter to 5
 Never add fuel when the engine is running. while refueling. break the ice build up.
This is in violation of most state and federal fire
regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
WARNING!
 Always place container on the ground before
 A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
filling.
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place gas  Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the
containers on the ground while filling. container when you are filling it.
 Use only approved containers for flammable
liquid.
CAUTION!
 Do not leave container unattended while filling.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. Fuel Filler  A static electric charge could cause a spark
and fire hazard.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
1. Put the vehicle in park and switch the ignition off.
fuel tank is full.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door
(3 o'clock position) and release to open.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE Emergency Fuel Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. Most fuel cans will not open the flapper door.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
A funnel is provided to open the flapper doors to A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to
allow emergency refueling with a gas can. allow emergency refueling with a fuel can.
1. Retrieve funnel from the jack and jack tool kit.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the jack and jack tool kit.
Diesel Fuel And Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location Diesel Fuel And DEF Fluid Filler Door
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
1. Retrieve fuel funnel from the jack kit located
under the front passenger seat.
NOTE:
There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
filler pipe seals the system.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe –
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door
while refueling.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
4. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
Fuel Fill Funnel Location
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as

WARNING! BULK FUEL S TORAGE — D IESEL FUEL
the fuel nozzle.
 Never have any smoking materials lit in or If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance of
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the stored fuel is also essential. Fuel contaminated
the tank is being filled. with water will promote the growth of “microbes.”
These microbes form “slime” that will clog the fuel
 Never add fuel when the engine is running. filtration system and lines. Drain condensation
This is in violation of most state and federal from the supply tank and change the line filter on
fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunc- a regular basis.
tion Indicator Light” to turn on.
NOTE:
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel,
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. air is pulled into the fuel system.
You could be burned. Always place fuel If the vehicle will not start, refer to “Dealer Service /
Emergency Fuel Fill Location containers on the ground while filling. Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel” in “Servicing
5
NOTE: And Maintenance” for further information.
Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door CAUTION! WARNING!
open.
3. Pour fuel into funnel opening. To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top Do not open the high pressure fuel system with
off” the fuel tank after filling. the engine running. Engine operation causes
4. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can
to putting back in the jack kit.
cause serious injury or death.
AVOID USING CONTAMINATED FUEL
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can
cause severe damage to the engine fuel system.
Proper maintenance of the engine fuel filter and
fuel tank is essential. Refer to “Dealer Service”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further
information.
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID NOTE:  There is an electric heater inside the DEF tank
When working with DEF, it is important to know that: that automatically works when necessary. And if
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic the DEF supply does freeze, the truck will
 Any containers or parts that come into contact
Reduction (SCR) system to meet the very stringent operate normally until it thaws.
with DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or
diesel emissions standards required by the
stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Procedure
Environmental Protection Agency.
or non-stainless steel should be avoided as they
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels are subject to corrosion by DEF. NOTE:
of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emitted from engines Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
 If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up Specifications” for the correct fluid type.
that are harmful to our health and the environment
completely.
to a near-zero level. A small quantity of Diesel 1. Remove cap from Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected into the exhaust ADDING D IESEL EXHAUST FLUID tank (located on drivers side of the vehicle or
upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, in fuel door).
it converts smog-forming NOx into harmless The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) gauge (located on the
nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two natural instrument cluster) will display the level of DEF
components of the air we breathe. You can operate remaining in the tank. Refer to “Instrument Cluster”
with the comfort that your vehicle is contributing to and “Instrument Cluster Descriptions” in “Getting
a cleaner, healthier world environment for this and To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
generations to come. information.
NOTE:
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID STORAGE
 Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load,
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very etc.) will effect the amount of DEF that is used in
stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept your vehicle.
in temperatures between 10° and 90°F (-12° and  Another factor is that outside temperature can
32°C), it will last a minimum of one year. DEF Filler Cap And Fuel Fill
affect DEF consumption. In cold conditions,
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest 12°F (-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle 1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze can stay on a fixed position and may not move 2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
at temperatures at or below 12°F (-11°C). for extended periods of time. This is a normal
The system has been designed to operate function of the system.
in this environment. 2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF tank
filler neck.
NOTE: 3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when any

CAUTION! of the following happen: DEF stops flowing
 The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds
to update after adding a gallon or more of  When DEF is spilled, clean the area immedi- from the fill bottle into the DEF tank, DEF
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank. ately with water and use an absorbent mate- splashes out the filler neck, or a DEF pump
If you have a fault related to the DEF rial to soak up the spills on the ground. nozzle automatically shuts off.
system, the gauge may not update to the  Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is 4. Reinstall cap onto DEF tank.
new level. See an authorized dealer for accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank as it
service. Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates
can result in severe damage to your engine,
 The DEF gauge may also not immediately including but not limited to failure of the fuel Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C), your
update after a refill if the temperature of the pump and injectors. vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF heating
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF system. This allows the DEF injection system to
 Never add anything other than DEF to the tank – operate properly at temperatures below 12°F
line heater will possibly warm up the DEF
especially any form of hydrocarbon such as diesel (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in operation for an
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a 5
fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or any other extended period of time with temperatures below
period of run time. Under very cold condi-
petroleum-based product. Even a very small 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the tank may freeze. If the
tions, it is possible that the gauge may not
amount of these, less than 100 parts per million or tank is overfilled and freezes, it could be damaged.
reflect the new fill level for several drives.
less than 1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters) will Therefore, do not overfill the DEF tank.
CAUTION! contaminate the entire DEF system and will
require replacement. If owners use a container, Extra care should be taken when filling with
 To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to funnel or nozzle when refilling the tank, it should portable containers to avoid overfilling. Note the
the DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off” either be new or one that has only been used for level of the DEF gauge in your instrument cluster.
the DEF tank after filling. adding DEF. Mopar provides an attachable nozzle You may safely add a maximum of 2 gallons
with its DEF for this purpose. (7.6 Liters) of DEF from portable containers when
 DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF your DEF gauge is reading ½ full.
(-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in
temperatures below the DEF freezing point,
however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes,
the system could be damaged.
(Continued)
VEHICLE LOADING TIRE SIZE The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to insure that the Gross Vehicle
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label Weight Rating (GVWR) has not been exceeded.
GROSS V EHICLE WEIGHT represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
RATING (GVWR) Replacement tires must be equal to the load should then be determined separately to be sure
capacity of this tire size. that the load is properly distributed over the front
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the
and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that
total permissible weight of your vehicle including RIM S IZE the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of either the
driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total
front and rear axle systems Gross Axle Weight size listed. load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must
Rating (GAWR). Total load must be limited so be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as
I NFLATION P RESSURE appropriate until the specified weight limitations are
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure
PAYLOAD vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). items securely before driving.
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
CURB W EIGHT effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total and the way the brakes operate.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR) weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with CAUTION!
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is front and rear curb weight values are determined GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
not exceeded. by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
before any occupants or cargo are added. change the way your vehicle handles. This could
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity LOADING cause you to lose control. Also overloading can
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or shorten the life of your vehicle.
suspension components sometimes specified by The actual total weight and the weight of the front
purchasers for increased durability does not and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR. determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
TRAILER TOWING Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight of the The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the
In this section you will find safety tips and
trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables maximum capacity of the front and rear axles.
information on limits to the type of towing you can
and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
in or on the trailer in its “loaded and ready for evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
operation” condition. front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Operating” for further information.
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
coverage, follow the requirements and
The entire weight of the trailer must be supported
recommendations in this manual concerning WARNING!
by the scale.
vehicles used for trailer towing.
It is important that you do not exceed the
COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS WARNING! maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
The following trailer towing related definitions If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) driving condition can result if either rating is 5
or more, it is recommended to use a exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
will assist you in understanding the following and have a collision.
information: weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of Tongue Weight (TW)
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the your vehicle and cause a collision.
The Tongue Weight (TW) is the downward force
total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes
exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/ The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is Trailer Frontal Area
Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
Operating” for further information. trailer when weighed in combination.
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control, thereby enhancing towing safety.
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) can be a mechanical
The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
telescoping link that can be installed between the
also dampens sway caused by traffic and
hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
provides adjustable friction associated with the
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a and may be required depending on vehicle and
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to requirements.
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
Weight-Carrying Hitch WARNING!

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue  An improperly adjusted weight distributing
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch hitch system may reduce handling, stability
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. and braking performance and could result in a
These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the collision.
market today and they are commonly used to tow
 Weight distributing systems may not be
small and medium sized trailers.
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
Weight-Distributing Hitch with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
A weight-distributing system works by applying reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are additional information.
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the
trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the
manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more
3. Under the instrument cluster or touch screen 7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
radio settings, enable tire jack mode. Tire jack distributing bars per the manufacturers’
mode will be canceled and procedure must be recommendations so that the height of the
restarted if the vehicle is driven at speeds front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/3+H1
above 5mph (8 km/h). (about 1/3 the difference between H2 and H1
4. Measure the height from the top of the front above normal ride height [H1]).
wheel opening on the fender to the ground, 8. Use the instrument cluster or touch screen radio
this is height H1. settings and switch off tire jack mode. Make
sure the truck returns to normal ride height.
Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch weight distributing hitch to confirm manufac-
(Incorrect) turers’ recommendations have been met.
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH

9. The truck can now be driven. 5
ADJUSTMENT
Measurement Example 1500 Height
Towing With 1500 Air Suspension Example (mm)
1. Set air suspension to normal ride height.
H1 925
No action is required if already in normal ride
height. H2 946
Measuring Height (H)
NOTE: H2-H1 21
The vehicle must remain in the engine run position 5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
(H2-H1)/3 7
with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for weight distribution bars connected.
6. Measure the height from the top of the front (H2-H1)/3 + H1 932
proper leveling of the air suspension system.
2. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the wheel opening on the fender to the ground,
trailer (do not connect the trailer). this is height H2. NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with tow haul mode engaged.
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight

Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class III Bumper Hitch - 1500 Model 6,000 lbs (2,722 kg) / 500 lbs (226 kg)
Class IV - 1500 Model 12,750 lbs (5,783 kg) / 1,275 lbs (578 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

Class III Bumper Hitch Access TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT TOWING REQUIREMENTS
Remove the cap with a trim stick or screw driver to
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
access the Class III hitch attachment.
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
NOTE: are recommended.
Be careful not to scratch the bumper step pad.
CAUTION!
 Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
 Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
Weight Distribution a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph 5
Consider the following items when computing the (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
 The tongue weight of the trailer.
Class III Bumper Hitch Access
 The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM ment put in or on your vehicle. Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in
TRAILER WEIGHT R ATINGS)  The weight of the driver and all passengers. “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
NOTE: maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
addresses: factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
 ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Infor-
 ramtruck.ca (Canada) mation” placard for the maximum combined
 rambodybuilder.com weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
 When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in

WARNING! WARNING! “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper tire
 Make certain that the load is secured in the  Total weight must be distributed between the replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
trailer and will not shift during travel. When tow vehicle and the trailer such that the higher load carrying capacity will not increase
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, following four ratings are not exceeded: the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
 GVWR
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.  Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
 GTW
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
 When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not  GAWR the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading and possible personal injury.
 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
utilized.  An electronically actuated trailer brake
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
controller is required when towing a trailer with
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
or tires. Towing Requirements — Tires
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
 Safety chains must always be used between  Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a brake system, an electronic brake controller is
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the compact spare tire. not required.
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.  Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when  Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and towing while using a full size spare tire. over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers
allow enough slack for turning corners.  Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
 Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a the safe and satisfactory operation of your
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Main- WARNING!
on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmis- tenance” for proper tire inflation procedures.  Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
sion in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles,  Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. pressures before trailer usage. brake system and cause it to fail. You might
Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels. not have brakes when you need them and
 Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
 GCWR must not be exceeded. damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” could have an accident.
(Continued) in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper (Continued)
inspection procedure.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light

WARNING!
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection
 Towing any trailer will increase your stopping status.
distance. When towing, you should allow for
If no electrical connection is detected after the
additional space between your vehicle and the
ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
button or sliding the manual brake control lever
result in an accident.
will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the
“Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will not be
displayed.
CAUTION!
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes 1 — GAIN Adjustment Button “Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will flash.
and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure 5
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining
wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer 3 — Manual Brake Control Lever Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake
stopping distances. control power output to the trailer brakes in
The user interface consists of the following: 0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be increased
to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of
Integrated Trailer Brake Module — Manual Brake Control Lever
0 (no trailer braking).
If Equipped Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to
GAIN
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over
manual brake control lever is activated while the control for the specific towing condition and should
Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs be changed as towing conditions change. Changes
NOTE: determines the power sent to the trailer brakes. to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle
This module has been designed and verified with load, road conditions and weather.
electric trailer brakes and new electric over The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will come
hydraulic systems. Some previous EOH systems on when braking normally with the vehicle brake
may not be compatible with ITBM. pedal. Only the trailer stop lamps will come on
when the manual brake control lever is applied.
Adjusting GAIN the ITBM, braking functions will not be 8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on
NOTE: available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and a dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph
This should only be performed in a traffic free envi- the correct type of trailer must be selected (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake
ronment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph from the instrument cluster display options. control lever completely.
(30–40 km/h). 4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering 9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good wheel until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the
working condition, functioning normally and screen. trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN
properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if 5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to setting.
necessary. enter “TRAILER TOW”.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical 6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
connections according to the trailer Brake Type appears on the screen. trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
manufacturer's instructions. 7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake
plugged in, the trailer connected message Type appears on the screen.
should appear in the instrument cluster
display (if the connection is not recognized by
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH

Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes Electric over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs
*The suggested selection depends and may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving
and road state may also affect the selection.
Display Messages NOTE: NOTE:

The trailer brake control interacts with the  An aftermarket controller may be available for  Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
instrument cluster display. Display messages, use with trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
along with a single chime, will be displayed when a trailer brake systems. To determine the type of device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
malfunction is determined in the trailer brakes on your trailer and the availability of into water.
connection, trailer brake control, or on the trailer. controllers, check with your trailer manufacturer  Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting or dealer.
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further  Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
information. may cause damage to the electrical system and
electronic modules of the vehicle. See an autho-
WARNING! rized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with installed.
the ITBM system may result in reduced or Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And 5
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a
Wiring
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability
which could result in personal injury. Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety. Four-Pin Connector
CAUTION! The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
1 — Ground
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with 2 — Park
trailer harness and connector.
the ITBM system may result in reduced or 3 — Left Stop/Turn
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a NOTE:
4 — Right Stop/Turn
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
which could result in damage to your vehicle, harness.
trailer, or other property. The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
TOWING TIPS Tow/Haul Mode

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, To reduce potential for automatic transmission
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
located away from heavy traffic. driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range
(using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
Automatic Transmission control) on more severe grades.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. Speed Control — If Equipped
The transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if  Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select  When using the speed control, if you experience
Seven-Pin Connector TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range (using speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control). disengage until you can get back to cruising
1 — Battery
NOTE: speed.
2 — Backup Lamps
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear  Use speed control in flat terrain and with light
3 — Right Stop/Turn
range (using the ERS shift control) while operating loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
4 — Electric Brakes
the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
5 — Ground improve performance and extend transmission life
6 — Left Stop/Turn by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
7 — Running Lamps This action will also provide better engine braking.
Cooling System SNOWPLOW WARNING!

To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions: NOTE: Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow appli- affect performance of the airbag system in a
City Driving cations. collision. Do not expect that the airbag will perform
In city traffic — while stopped, place the as described earlier in this manual.
transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase WARNING!
engine idle speed. Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should
Highway Driving not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The CAUTION!
 Reduce speed airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
in the front end structure. The airbags could deploy cause damage to the vehicle.
 Temporarily turn off air conditioning unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision
Air Suspension System resulting in serious injury or death.
5
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the
vehicle, the air suspension system can be used.
Refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine running
position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling
of the air suspension system.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE
Wheels OFF The Two-Wheel Drive
Towing Condition Four-Wheel Drive Models
Ground Models
See Instructions
 Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
 Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
 Tow in forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE:
 When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
 Vehicles equipped with Active-Level Four Corner Air Suspension must be placed in Transport mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or
flatbed truck. Refer to “Active-Level Four Corner Air Suspension – If Equipped” for more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for
example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set
and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — T WO-W HEEL CAUTION! CAUTION!

DRIVE MODELS Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will  Before recreational towing, the transfer case
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the cause severe transmission damage. Damage must be in NEUTRAL. To be certain the
drivetrain will result. from improper towing is not covered under the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL, perform the
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) New Vehicle Limited Warranty. procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission damage will
result, if the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL
ground. This may be accomplished using a tow RECREATIONAL TOWING — during towing.
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure: F OUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS  The transmission must be in PARK for recre-
NOTE: NOTE: ational towing.
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL  Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height. (N) for recreational towing. The transmission must released, and remains released, while being 5
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, be shifted into PARK for recreational towing. towed.
following the dolly manufacturer's Refer to the following for the proper transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for your vehicle.  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
instructions.
requirements can cause severe transmission
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly. CAUTION! and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the improper towing is not covered under the New
 DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing Vehicle Limited Warranty.
transmission in PARK.
with only one set of wheels on the ground
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, (front or rear) will cause severe transmission  Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing
5. Turn the ignition OFF. four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the damage to internal parts.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed ground (using a vehicle trailer).  Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the  Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will
straight position. vehicle backwards can cause severe damage be damaged.
to the transfer case.
(Continued)
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) 3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. The 10. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode.
driver's door must be closed (or the driver's 11. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
Use the following procedure to prepare your
seat belt buckled) so that the transmission will suitable tow bar.
vehicle for recreational towing.
remain in NEUTRAL when the brake pedal is
released. 12. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do
WARNING! not start the engine.
NOTE:
You or others could be injured or killed if you 13. Release the parking brake.
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer 14. Turn the ignition OFF.
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer 4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL
NOTE:
case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the
(N) button (at the center of the transfer case  Steps 2 and 3 are requirements that must be
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain
switches). The NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button,
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
illuminate, and remain lit, when the shift to and must continue to be met until the shift has
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is been completed. If any of these requirements
should always be applied when the driver is
completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N)
not in the vehicle.
release the NEUTRAL (N) button. button or are no longer met during the shift, the
NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continu-
5. Release the parking brake.
ously until all requirements are met or until the
CAUTION! 6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain 7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and  The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that there is no vehicle movement. shift to take place and for the position indicator
before recreational towing to prevent damage to lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with the transmission in
internal parts. ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
DRIVE.
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Apply the
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level parking brake. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles  A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
ground, with the engine running. Apply the with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the indicates that shift requirements have not been
parking brake. ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine met.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. shuts off. The transmission will automatically
select PARK when the engine is turned off.
 If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the

engine should be started and left running for a
8. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
DRIVING TIPS
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors DRIVING ON S LIPPERY S URFACES
closed) at least once every 24 hours. This process 10. Start the engine.
allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicle’s 11. Release the parking brake. Acceleration
ride height to compensate for temperature 12. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
effects. brake pedal, and check that the vehicle slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) operates normally. pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
Use the following procedure to prepare your NOTE: traction under the rear (driving) wheels.
vehicle for normal usage:
 Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving met before pushing the button to shift out of WARNING!
it connected to the tow vehicle. NEUTRAL (N), and must continue to be met until
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. the shift has been completed. If any of these
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is 5
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
3. Start the engine. Apply the parking brake. Shift requirements are not met before pushing the pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control
the transmission into NEUTRAL. button or are no longer met during the shift, the of the vehicle and possibly have a collision.
NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continu- Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push ously until all requirements are met or until the
and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud,
button is released. loose sand, etc.).
(N) button (at the center of the transfer case
switches).  The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
5. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
release the NEUTRAL (N) button. ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
6. Turn the engine OFF. The transmission will no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
automatically select PARK when the engine is  A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
turned off. indicates that shift requirements have not been
7. Release the brake pedal. met.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water

CAUTION!
Driving through water more than a few inches/ Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following  Determine the condition of the road or the
centimeters deep will require extra caution to path that is under water and if there are any
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. Cautions and Warnings before doing so.
obstacles in the way before driving through
Flowing/Rising Water WARNING! the standing water.
 Driving through standing water limits your  Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
WARNING!
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed through standing water. This will minimize
Do not drive on or across a road or path where 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through wave effects.
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm standing water.  Driving through standing water may cause
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
 Driving through standing water limits your damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
through standing water, drive slowly and signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
Failure to follow this warning may result in
lightly press on the brake pedal several times or foamy in appearance) after driving through
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
to dry the brakes. standing water. Do not continue to operate
passengers, and others around you.
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
 Failure to follow these warnings may result in as this may result in further damage. Such
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
passengers, and others around you. Limited Warranty.
 Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
CAUTION! cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
 Always check the depth of the standing water damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
before driving through it. Never drive through Limited Warranty.
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
(Continued)
OFF-R OAD D RIVING TIPS After Driving Off-Road  After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
Care should be taken when attempting to climb Off-road operation puts more stress on your
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
possible.
diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle damage. That way you can get any problems taken
and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the care of right away and have your vehicle ready
WARNING!
vehicle moving and make turns slowly and when you need it.
cautiously.  Completely inspect the underbody of your Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down You might not have full braking power when you
using REVERSE gear. Never back down in suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.  Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft clean as required. your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
terrain, shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply  Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
5
the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
 If you experience unusual vibration after driving
wheels. steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of required, and torque to the values specified in
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
driving. the Service Manual.
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
 Check for accumulations of plants or brush. the wheels of it will correct the situation.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
286
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
only when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a
safety hazard warning for other motorists.
When leaving the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch even though the ignition is placed in the OFF Assist And SOS Buttons
position.
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located on 1 — ASSIST Button
the upper switch bank just below the radio.
NOTE:
2 — SOS Button
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers
NOTE: may wear down your battery.
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch If equipped, the overhead console contains an
Uconnect display, the Hazard Warning Flashers ASSIST and a SOS button.
switch is located above the display.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287
ASSIST Call 2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and
WARNING! SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to connect you to any one of the following support green once a connection to a SOS operator has
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on centers: been made.
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
 Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
and assume all risks related to the use of SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
the features and applications in this vehicle. may transmit the following important vehicle
you’ll be connected to someone who can help.
Only use the features and applications when it is information to a SOS operator:
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees  Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call
accident involving serious injury or death.
may apply for roadside assistance.  The vehicle brand
 SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle  The last known GPS coordinates of the
NOTE: support for SiriusXM Guardian™. vehicle
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
 Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
rized by the subscriber.
other vehicle issues. operator through the vehicle audio system to
 The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if
SOS Call determine if additional help is needed. 6
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network. Other Uconnect 1. Push the SOS Call button within the overhead
console. WARNING!
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and connected to NOTE: ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
network. there will be a ten second delay before the SOS the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. and assume all risks related to the use of the
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS features and applications in this vehicle. Only
call button within the overhead console or press use the features and applications when it is safe
the cancellation button on the Device Screen. to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green accident involving serious injury or death.
LED light within the overhead console.
288 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: SOS Call System Limitations

WARNING!
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
authorized by the subscriber.  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s system capabilities.
operable network and GPS antennas. You could
 Once a connection is made between the SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
prevent operable network and GPS signal
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper- may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
placing an emergency call. An operable network
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter- any of the following may occur at the time the
and GPS signal reception is required for the
mine if additional help is needed. Once the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
SOS Call system to function properly.
SOS operator opens a voice connection with each ignition cycle:
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator  The SOS Call system is embedded into the
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-  The overhead console light located within the
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur- market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illumi-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle nate red.
system will attempt to remain connected from sending a signal to initiate an emergency  The Device Screen will display the following
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper- call. To avoid interference that can cause the message: “Vehicle device requires service.
ator terminates the connection. SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket Please contact an authorized dealer.”
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB  An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
appropriate emergency responders and radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec- device requires service. Please contact an
provide them with important vehicle trical system or modify the antennas on your authorized dealer.”
information and GPS coordinates. vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING
OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT
WARNING! FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road  Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
conditions or location), do not wait for voice system could cause the air bag system to fail
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All when you need it. You could be injured if the
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately air bag system is not there to help protect you.
and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
 The SOS Call system software and/or hardware NOTE:

WARNING! are damaged during a crash  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
 Ignoring the overhead console light could  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes rized by the subscriber.
mean you will not have SOS Call services. disconnected during a vehicle crash  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
If the overhead console light is illuminated,
 LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail- antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or
Call system immediately.
able or obstructed 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can
 The Occupant Restraint Control module turns  Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument facility call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
panel if a malfunction in any part of the network connection and a GPS signal is
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning  Operator error by the SOS operator required for the SOS Call system to function
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion properly.
service the Occupant Restraint Control system  Weather NOTE:
immediately. Changes or modifications not expressly approved
 Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
tunnels
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
6
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent WARNING!
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
factors: the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
 Delayed accessories mode is active and assume all risks related to the use of the
 The ignition is in the OFF position features and applications in this vehicle. Only
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
GENERAL INFORMATION Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Development siguientes dos condiciones:
The following regulatory statement applies to all applicables aux appareils radio exempts de 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux cause interferencia perjudicial y
vehicle: conditions suivantes:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following NOTE:
two conditions:
le fonctionnement. Changes or modifications not expressly approved
1. This device may not cause harmful by the party responsible for compliance could void
interference, and the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
BULB REPLACEMENT
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs 6
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 9005LL
Low & High Beam (LED Reflector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Low & High Beam (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Turn Signal / Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Exterior Bulbs
Front Side Marker (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) W5W
Front Side Marker (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
Front Fog Lamps (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 7440LL/W21WLL
Premium Rear Tail/Turn/Backup and Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Base Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cargo Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Base Turn Lamp 7440NA / WY21W
REPLACING EXTERIOR B ULBS 4. Disengage the bulb access cover by rotating

counterclockwise.
Base Quad: Low Beam Headlamp, High 5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
Beam Headlamp, Front Park And Turn — connector from the low beam bulb.
If Equipped
Low Beam CAUTION!
1. Open the hood.  Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
cable.
result.
3. Locate the headlamp and access the low High Beam Headlight Cover
beam cover which can be found on the  Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type NOTE:
backside of the headlamps.
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, It may be necessary to remove/reposition Air
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring. Cleaner Assembly to access passenger side
headlamp/side marker light bulbs.
6
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
the access cover by rotating counterclockwise.
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
connector from the high beam bulb.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
bulb and covers. CAUTION!
High Beam  Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
Low Beam Headlight Cover 1. Open the hood.
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
NOTE: cable.  Always use the correct bulb size and type for
It may be necessary to remove/reposition Air replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
Cleaner Assembly to access passenger side 3. Look under the hood and behind the may overheat and cause damage to the lamp,
headlamp/side marker light bulbs. headlamp to find the high beam bulb access the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
cover.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter 6. Separate the bulb from the socket without 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp. twisting. housing.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing. 7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new 6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb and covers. twisting.
bulb and covers. 7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
Side Marker Lamp
bulb and covers.
Front Park And Turn 1. Open the hood.
1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery Fog Lamps — If Equipped
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to
cable. 3. Look under the hood and behind the access the back of the front fog lamp
headlamp to find the Side Marker Light. housing.
3. Look under the hood and behind the
headlamp to find the park and turn socket. 2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
Passenger’s Side Marker Lamp

Park And Turn Socket NOTE:
Fog Lamp Bulb
4. Reach behind the headlamp and unlock the It may be necessary to remove/reposition Air
park and turn socket from the lamp by rotating Cleaner Assembly to access passenger side 3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
counterclockwise a quarter turn. headlamp/side marker light bulbs. turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing. 4. Disengage the side marker socket by rotating 4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
counterclockwise a quarter turn.
5. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and 2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far
cover. enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the
outboard side of the lamp housing from the
two plastic snap post retainers in the outer box
CAUTION!
side panel.
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup

Lamps Wiring Harness Connector
1. Remove the two screws and push pins 4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a
retainers that pass through the bed sheet quarter turn to unlock it from the housing.
metal. 5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
6
Tail Lamp Removed CAUTION!
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
from the bulb socket. with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and

housing.
Tail Lamp Locations

1 — Tail Lamp
2 — Fasteners
3 — Push - Pin Retainers
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) FUSES

With Cargo Lamp
1. Remove the four screws holding the housing/ WARNING!
lens to the body as shown.  When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
CHMSL Connector Location use proper fuses may result in serious
3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
and remove the socket and bulb from housing.  Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket. ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations CAUTION!
 If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
2. Separate the connector holding the housing Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it authorized dealer.
and wiring harness to the body. with your fingers or by allowing it to contract other
 If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
 Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps system) or steering system blows, contact an
 Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop Lamp authorized dealer.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs
and housing.
EXTERNAL POWER DISTRIBUTION

C ENTER
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and
circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and
component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart. Power Distribution Center
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F01 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Pump Motor
F03 – 5 Amp Tan MGU – If Equipped 6
F04 – – Spare
F05 – – Spare
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup
F09 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Stop / Turn Lamp Left
F10 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Stop / Turn Lamp Right
F11 – – Spare
F12 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Park Lamp
F13 – – Spare
F14 – 10 Amp Red AC Clutch

F15 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F16 – – Spare
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension
F18 – 15 Amp Blue AGS / Rear Axle Cooling Valve / Active Air Dam
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals
F21 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Step
F22 50 Amp Red – Air Module
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW
F25 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lights 2
F26 50 Amp Red – ESP Module
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F28 – 10 Amp Red PCM / ECM
F29 40 Amp Green – ESP Module
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM / PCM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F34 – – Spare
PCM / ECM / Power Pack Unit (PPU) Motor Generator Unit (MGU)
F35 – 10 Amp Red
Wake Up / EPS / Active Tuned Mass Module (ATMM) / ESP

F36 – – Spare
F37 – 5 Amp Tan R / S Output to iPDC
F38 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / Active CL TEMP VLV
F39 – – Spare
F40 40 Amp Green – Starter
F41 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heaters
F42 – – Spare
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow MGU Coolant Pump – If Equipped
F44 – – Spare
F45 – – Spare
F46 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Heater – If Equipped 6
F47 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F48 – – Spare
F49 30 Amp Pink – Htr Ctrl – If Equipped (Diesel Only)
F50 – – Spare
F51 – – Spare
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 10 Amp Red Supply / Purging Pump – If Equipped
F54 – 15 Amp Blue PCM – If Equipped
F55 – 15 Amp Blue Right HID Headlamp / Spare
F56 – – Spare

F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F58 – – Spare
F59 – 25 Amp Clear Injectors / IGN Coil / Glow Plug Module
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM / PCM / ACT Short Running Valve
F61 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp / Spare
F62 60 Amp Blue – Glow Plug – If Equipped
F63 20 Amp Blue – NOx Sensor
F64 – 10 Amp Red PM Sensor – If Equipped
CAUTION!
 When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
 When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
I NTERNAL P OWER DISTRIBUTION See below steps for accessing fuses:

CENTER 1. Locate and remove the two screws from the
lower portion of the fuse panel cover.
The Power Distribution Center is located under
the driver’s side instrument panel. This center
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and
circuit breakers.
Interior Fuse Box Location

3. Reverse the procedure to reinstall the fuse
panel cover.
Fuse Panel Screws Location
6
2. After removing the screws, gently pull both the
left and right side of the fuse panel cover to
Fuse Cover Panel release the fastener clips.

F01 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle
F03 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Front (Pass)
F04 – – Spare
F05 – 20 Amp Yellow Module PPU Cooling Fan
F06 40 Amp Green – Mod CBC 4 Exterior Light 2
F07 40 Amp Green – Mod CBC 3 PWR Locks
F08 – – Spare

F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F11 – 5 Amp Tan Output to Under-hood Power Distribution Center (UPDC) Run Coil
F12 – 25 Amp Clear Mod Audio Amplifier / Active Noise Cancellation / SW Inverter
F13 – 20 Amp Yellow Mod Seat Heater Front (Driver)
F14 – 15 Amp Blue Mod Seat Heater Front (Steering Wheel)
F15 – – Spare
F16 – – Spare
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow LT Spot Lamp
F18 30 Amp Pink – Motor Sunshade Sunroof
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 20 Amp Yellow Comfort Rear Seat Module (CRSM) (Heat Rear RT)
F21 – – Spare
F22 – – Spare
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 15 Amp Blue Mod RF Hub / Mod Ignition / Mod Cluster
F25 40 Amp Green – Mod Integrated Trailer Brake
F26 – 15 Amp Blue Mod Cluster CCN / Mod Cyber Security
F27 – 5 Amp Tan Mod Cluster CCN / Mod SGW
F28 – 10 Amp Red Mod ORC
F29 – 20 Amp Yellow Mod CRSM (Heat Rear LT)

F30 30 Amp Pink – Mod DTCM / Mod Tailgate
F31 30 Amp Pink – Mod CBC 1 Interior Light
F32 – 20 Amp Yellow RT Spot Lamp
F33 – 10 Amp Red Assy Overhead Console / Switch 911 / Switch Assist / Sunshade
F34 – 15 Amp Blue Frt & RR Ventilated Seat Motor
F35 – 10 Amp Red Mod Inverter / Mtr Sunshade Sunroof / Mtr Dual Sunroof
F36 40 Amp Green – Mod CBC 2 Exterior Light 1
F37 – – Spare
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 20 Amp Blue – Dome Pursuit Vehicle 6
F41 A&B – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Support & Pass SW / Mod Cluster CCN
Mod Transfer Case Switch Module (TCSM) / SBW / Electric Park Brake SW /
F42 – 10 Amp Red
Overhead Console (OHC) SW / E-Call / Bank 3 SW / Seat LT & RT Vent
F43 – 10 Amp Red Port Diagnostics / Mod CD / Front & Rear USB
F44 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio / DCSD / Telematics Box Mod
F45 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Driver
F46 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
F47 – – Spare
Rear View Mirror / Humidity Rain And Light Sensor (HRLS) / SW Window
F48A - 10 Amp Red
Passenger / Rear USB / Wireless Charging Pad Mod

Mod CVPM / SNSR Blind Spot / HDLP Adaptive Front Lighting
F49 – 15 Amp Blue
Sensor (AFLS)
F50A – 10 Amp Red Battery PACK Control Mod
F51 A&B – – Spare
F52 20 Amp Blue – Direct Battery Feed
Mod ICS Switch / Mod HVAC CTRL / Sw Bank Upper / Sw EPB / Mod
F53 – 15 Amp Blue
Control Steering
F54B – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat
F55 25 Amp White – Upfitter
F56 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface
F60 50 Amp Red – Mod Inverter
F61 – – Spare
ITBM / Mod Occupant Class / Mod IAIR Suspension / Mod HVAC Snsr
F62 A&B – 10 Amp Red
Incar Temp / Rear Coolant Temp / PTS / Mod IRCM
F63 – – Spare
F64 – – Spare
F65 – 10 Amp Red Mod ORC
F66 – 10 Amp Red Run - Accessory Feed
CAUTION! JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
 When installing the power distribution center WARNING! system, there is a feature which allows the auto-
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is matic leveling to be disabled to assist with
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure  Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of changing a tire.
to do so may allow water to get into the power the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
This feature can be activated through the
distribution center and possibly result in an enough off the road to avoid the danger of
Uconnect system.
electrical system failure. being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
 When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to further information.
use only a fuse having the correct amperage  Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on J ACK L OCATION
than indicated may result in a dangerous elec- you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. The jack and tools are stored under the front
trical system overload. If a properly rated fuse passenger seat.
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
circuit that must be corrected. it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift. 6
 Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
 The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
REMOVAL O F JACK A ND T OOLS There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
To access the jack and jack tools, you must remove
the plastic access cover located on the side of the
front passenger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull
the front part of the cover (closest to the front of
the seat) toward you to release a locking tab. Once
the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover
toward the front of the seat until it is free from the
seat frame.
Jack And Tools
Release the tool bag straps from the jack and
remove tools from bag.
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension Without Spring Clip 2
3 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 3
4 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 4
5 — Short Extension 5
Pull Jack Access Cover From Front
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then
slide the assembly out from under the seat.
Jack And Tool Bag
NOTE: Assembled For Jack Operation REMOVING THE S PARE TIRE

If the tailgate is lowered, adding the shorter
extension 5 to jack extension 4 will enable 1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
lowering the spare tire without having to raise the jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the
tailgate. extension tubes with the curved angle facing
away from the vehicle.
CAUTION! 2. Remove the protective cover over the access
 The lug wrench can only be attached to hole for the winch mechanism by sliding the
extension 2. cover upward.
 When attaching the tool to the winch mecha-

nism be sure the large flared end opening on
extension 4 is positioned correctly over the Assembled For Jack Operation
winch mechanism adjusting nut.
1 — Lug Wrench
 Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and
2 — Long Extension 2
winch mechanism may occur from improper 6
tool assembly. 3 — Long Extension 3
4 — Long Extension 4
5 — Short Extension 5
6 — Extension With Hook
Access Hole Cover Location
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location. While
driving you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid
acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools,
bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move
around with force, resulting in serious injury.
3. Insert the extension tube through the access hole with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it 6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
between the lower tailgate and the top of the out from under the vehicle. clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
bumper and into the winch mechanism tube. cable.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle

Winch Mechanism Tube Gaining Access To The Retainer
5. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to
gain access to the spare tire retainer. 7. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole

4. Rotate the lug wrench handle counter- Pulling The Spare Tire Out
clockwise until the spare tire is on the ground Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the WARNING!
extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other  Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
power tools is not recommended and can damage transmission in PARK.
the winch.
 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING to be raised.
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or  Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
slippery areas. on a jack.
 Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
WARNING! Wheel Blocked on a jack.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of NOTE:  Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
enough off the road to avoid being hit when the vehicle is being raised or lifted. take it to a service center where it can be
operating the jack or changing the wheel. raised on a lift.
J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS 6
 Only use the jack in the positions indicated
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
WARNING!
3. Apply the parking brake.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to  If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
4. Shift the transmission into PARK (P). careful of motor traffic.
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
5. Turn the ignition OFF. vehicle:  To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For the valve stem facing the ground.
the edge of the roadway as possible before
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
raising the vehicle.
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
(Continued)
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts 4. Placement of the jack is critical.
(but do not remove), by turning them counter- NOTE:
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on Keep the jack and tools aligned with raising the
the ground. vehicle.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect
the jack handle driver to the extension, then to
the lug wrench.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jack / Extensions Placement
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from Assembled Jack And Tools
the stored location.
NOTE:
Vehicle may be equipped with wheel center caps
that must be removed prior to loosening of the
wheel nuts.
Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location

When changing a front wheel, place the scissor When changing a rear wheel, assemble the ex-
jack under the rear portion of the lower control tension with jack hook to the jack and connect
arm as shown. Access the front jacking location the extension tubes. Access the rear jacking lo-
from behind the front tire. cation from behind the rear tire. Place the jack
under the Jack Lifting Point located on the rear
axle lower control arm bracket. Then locate the
slot in the jack lift plate onto the rear axle Jack
Lifting Point. Attach the extension with jack
hook extending to the rear of the vehicle. Rear Jacking Location
Connect the long extensions to the lug wrench.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make 6
sure that the jack will not damage surrounding
Front Lifting Point
truck parts and adjust the jack position as
required.
Rear Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location

5. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the NOTE: TO STOW THE FLAT O R S PARE
vehicle until the wheel just clears the ground For the correct lug nut torque refer to “Wheel And
surface. Tire Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifica- WARNING!
tions.” If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
WARNING! them checked with a torque wrench by an autho- A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
rized dealer or service station. hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
WARNING! tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat)
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
tire repaired or replaced immediately.
only enough to remove the tire. A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the 1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is
6. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off.
spare tire in the places provided. facing upward and toward the rear of the
Install the spare wheel and lug nuts with the
vehicle for convenience in checking the spare
cone shaped end of the lug nuts toward the
tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer through
wheel. Hand tighten the lug nuts with vehicle 8. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel center
the center of the wheel.
lifted. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off cap, install the cap and remove the wheel
the jack, do not fully tighten the lug nuts until blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum
the vehicle has been lowered. wheel center caps on the spare wheel.
7. Lower vehicle to ground, finish tightening the This may result in cap damage.
lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the 9. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow
end of the handle for increased leverage. the replaced tire, and secure the jack and tools
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each in the proper location.
nut has been tightened twice. 10. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
Reinstalling The Retainer

2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give REINSTALLING T HE JACK A ND T OOLS
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable and position it across the wheel opening. 1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning
the jack turn-screw counterclockwise until the
jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the
lug wrench is under the jack near the jack
turn-screw.
Lug Wrench And Extension Tubes Assembled And In

Position
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until
Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel the wheel is drawn into place against the
And Positioning It underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip,
6
3. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes or click three or four times. It cannot be
with the curved angle facing away from the overtightened. Push against the tire several
vehicle. Insert the extension tubes through the times to ensure it is firmly in place. Jack And Tool Bag
access hole between the lower tailgate and
the top of the bumper and into the winch NOTE:
mechanism tube. The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage
the winch.
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack. JUMP STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow
the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Jack Hold Down Wing Bolt Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
Jack And Tools Tied personal injury.
WARNING!
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position
holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom them in the original carrier and location. While CAUTION!
slot engages into the fastener on the floor. driving you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools,
NOTE: any other booster source with a system voltage
bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move
Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold down greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
around with force, resulting in serious injury.
location. starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the
floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START 1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and turn the ignition OFF.
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary
the engine compartment, behind the left headlight
electrical accessories.
assembly.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables’ reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Positive Battery Post WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
WARNING! could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
Battery Location
6
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE
injured by moving fan blades.
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a  Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, WARNING!
protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to gain watch bands and bracelets that could make Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
access to the positive battery post. Do not jump off an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be could result in personal injury or property
fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which has seriously injured. damage due to battery explosion.
a positive (+) symbol on or around the post.
 Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open CAUTION!
flames or sparks away from the battery.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper booster battery, let the engine idle a few cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged minutes, and then start the engine in the battery.
vehicle. vehicle with the discharged battery. 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
NOTE: jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
CAUTION! vehicle with the discharged battery.
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post. Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses
on the positive battery terminal. The resulting If frequent jump starting is required to start your
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) vehicle you should have the battery and charging
electrical current will blow the fuse.
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the system inspected at an authorized dealer.
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper CAUTION!
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster cables in the reverse sequence:
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
battery. outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle
metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine) engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
with the discharged battery.
away from the battery and the fuel injection discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
system. 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) and/or prevent the engine from starting.
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
WARNING! booster battery.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
Only use the specific ground point, do not use
any other exposed metal parts.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS WARNING! MANUAL PARK RELEASE

In any of the following situations, you can reduce You or others can be badly burned by hot engine WARNING!
the potential for overheating by taking the coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
appropriate action. If you see or hear steam coming from under the Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator parking brake before activating the Manual Park
 On the highways — slow down.
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
 In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans- driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake
system pressure cap when the radiator or
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the pedal when activating the Manual Park Release.
coolant bottle is hot.
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
motion with the brakes. your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
NOTE: CAUTION! parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
There are steps that you can take to slow down an vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
impending overheat condition: Driving with a hot cooling system could damage an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
 If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling 6
system and turning the A/C off can help remove To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
this heat. transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
 You can also turn the temperature control to continuous chimes, turn the engine off a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and immediately and call for service. available.
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park NOTE: To Reset The Manual Park Release:
Release: When the lever is locked in the released position 1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while the access cover cannot be reinstalled. seated in the driver’s seat.
seated in the driver’s seat. 4. Behind the Manual Park Release access cover 2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
2. Apply the parking brake if possible. is the orange tether strap. Pull the tether strap
out as far as it will go, then release it. The 3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, tether and lever will remain outside of the trim to its original position.
remove the Manual Park Release cover, which panel and the transmission should now be in
is located to the lower left of the steering NEUTRAL, allowing the vehicle to be moved.
column.
Manual Park Release Tether

4. Verify the transmission is in PARK.
Manual Park Release Tether
Manual Park Release Access Cover 5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and
re-install the access cover. If the access cover
cannot be reinstalled, repeat steps 1 though 4.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION!

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not drivetrain damage may result.
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the  Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that fast may lead to transmission overheating and
continuously without stopping when you are stuck
will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin
and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
the wheels or racing the engine. the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in
matter what the speed.
gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. CAUTION!
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N)  Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
for more than two seconds, you must press the lead to transmission overheating and failure. 6
brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
NOTE: in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
Push the “ESC Off” switch, to place the Electronic five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off” overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Elec- sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a
tronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” for further stuck vehicle.
information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push (Continued)
the “ESC Off” switch again to restore “ESC On”
mode.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.)” in the
“Starting And Operating” section.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with the Active-Level Four Corner Air Suspension System must be placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from the body) on a
trailer or flatbed truck. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the
body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Refer to "Active-Level Four Corner Air Suspension System — If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for more information.
Wheels OFF The
Towing Condition 2WD Models 4WD Models
Ground
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under
If transmission is operable: “Starting And Operating”
Flat Tow NONE • Transmission in NEUTRAL • Automatic Transmission in PARK
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed • Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance • Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Front NOT ALLOWED
Tow Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle,
not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, TWO-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode. The manufacturer recommends towing your farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
flatbed. tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front
is discharged, refer to ”Manual Park Release” in
this section for instructions on shifting the If flatbed equipment is not available, and the wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing
transmission out of PARK for towing. transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
(with rear wheels on the ground) under the stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight
CAUTION! following conditions: position) with the rear wheels raised and the front
wheels on the ground.
 Do not use sling type equipment when towing.  The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
Vehicle damage may occur. NOTE: CAUTION!
Refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section for
 When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
instructions on shifting the transmission to
do not attach to front or rear suspension requirements can cause severe transmission
NEUTRAL when the engine is OFF.
components. Damage to your vehicle may damage. Damage from improper towing is not
 The towing speed must not exceed
result from improper towing.
30 mph (48 km/h).
covered under the New Vehicle Limited 6
Warranty.
 The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
FOUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
The manufacturer recommends towing with all I F E QUIPPED SYSTEM (EARS)
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
hooks.
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing Accident Response System.
dolly. NOTE: Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use “Safety” for further information on the Enhanced
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of Accident Response System (EARS) function.
transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
damage to the vehicle.
towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on
the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) WARNING! EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
and the transmission is in PARK.
 Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with an event data
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
Operating” for further information and detailed record data that will assist in understanding how a
death.
instructions. vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
 Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
CAUTION! hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
causing serious injury.
 Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
(if the remaining wheels are on the ground). “Safety” for further information on the Event Data
Internal damage to the transmission or Recorder (EDR).
CAUTION!
transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel
lift is used when towing. Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
requirements can cause severe transmission
You could damage your vehicle.
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
323
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
Severe Duty All Models
NOTE:
ENGINES oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil message can be reset by referring to the steps
change indicator system. The oil change indicator operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in operated predominantly at idle, or only very low
system will remind you that it is time to take your “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered
NOTE: Severe Duty.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
Under no circumstances should oil change Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
change indicator message will illuminate. This
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
means that service is required for your vehicle.  Check engine oil level.
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,  Check windshield washer fluid level.
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold ambient
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet  Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
customers. or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating
Conditions can cause the change oil message to ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi- 7
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) cator system turns on.
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). brake master cylinder, and fill as needed.
 Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE P LAN
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Plan on the following pages for required maintenance. More frequent maintenance may be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty
areas and very short trip driving. In some extreme conditions, additional maintenance not specified in the maintenance schedule may be required.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change the oil and filter.
 Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect the battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
 Inspect the engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect the exhaust system.
 Inspect the engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
 Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty conditions.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police, taxi, X X X X X
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing, change axle fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
7
Inspect transfer case fluid. X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
If equipped with Stop/Start, replace accessory drive belt with OEM
X
grade Mopar belt.
Replace spark plugs. 1 X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
X X
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the following:
X X
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
change indicator system. The oil change indicator by someone other than an authorized dealer, the  Check windshield washer fluid level
system will remind you that it is time to take your message can be reset by referring to the steps  Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in unusual wear or damage
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
change indicator message will illuminate. This further information. brake master cylinder, and power steering, and
means that service is required for your vehicle. NOTE: fill as needed
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, Under no circumstances should oil change  Check function of all interior and exterior lights
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change 12 months, whichever comes first.
Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating
Conditions will cause the change oil message to
illuminate more frequently. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
7
MAINTENANCE P LAN — D IESEL FUEL UP TO B5 BIODIESEL

Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change oil and filter.
 Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
 Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
 Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner filter, as necessary.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
 Change fuel filter.
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. If gear oil leakage is suspected, check the
fluid level. If using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer X X X X X
towing change the axle fluid.
7
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter X X X X X X X
Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Fuel filter replacement intervals should be every second oil change and
Replace fuel filter and drain water from the fuel filter assembly.
must not exceed 20,000 miles (32,000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5.
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
X X
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,
X X
or frequent trailer towing.
Change transfer case fluid. X
WARNING! ADDITIONAL M AINTENANCE — B6 TO  The owner is required to monitor mileage for

B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change indi-
 You can be badly injured working on or around
B20 B IODIESEL cator system does not reflect the use of
a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which NOTE: biofuels.
you have the knowledge and the right equip-  Under no circumstances should oil change inter-  Fuel filter change interval is maintained at every
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability vals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or six second oil change. This is especially important
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a months, whichever comes first when using with biodiesel usage.
competent mechanic. biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5).
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunc-
tion and effect vehicle handling and perfor-
mance. This could cause an accident.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L E NGINE WITH STOP/START
1 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5.7L E NGINE WITHOUT STOP/START
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5.7L E NGINE WITH STOP/START
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3.0L DIESEL E NGINE
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Brake Fluid Cap

2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Power Distribution Center (PDC)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Cap
CHECKING OIL L EVEL CAUTION!

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This your climate. This rating information can be found
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel could damage your engine. on most washer fluid containers.
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine WARNING!
is shut off. NOTE:
It is possible for your oil level to be slightly higher Commercially available windshield washer
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
than a previous check. This would be due to diesel
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
fuel that may temporarily be in the crankcase due
There are four possible dipstick types, to operation of the diesel particulate filter regener- working around the washer solution.
 Crosshatched zone. ation strategy (if equipped). This fuel will evaporate
out under normal operation. After the engine has warmed up, operate the
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
ADDING W ASHER FLUID defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and cold windshield. Windshield washer solution used
range.
should be checked for fluid level at regular with water as directed on the container, aids
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid 7
MIN and the MAX ends of the range. solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
NOTE: refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and
markings on the dipstick. wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade
performance.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY CAUTION! DEALER SERVICE

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free  It is essential when replacing the cables on An authorized dealer has the qualified service
battery. You will never have to add water, nor is the battery that the positive cable is attached personnel, special tools, and equipment to
periodic maintenance required. to the positive post and the negative cable is perform all service operations in an expert
attached to the negative post. Battery posts manner. Service Manuals are available which
WARNING! are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and include detailed service information for your
 Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can are identified on the battery case. Cable vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid clamps should be tight on the terminal posts attempting any procedure yourself.
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not and free of corrosion. NOTE:
lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If  If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is Intentional tampering with emissions control
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery systems may void your warranty and could result in
immediately with large amounts of water. Refer cables before connecting the charger to the civil penalties being assessed against you.
to “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
for further information. WARNING!
starting voltage.
 Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep You can be badly injured working on or around a
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
use a booster battery or any other booster
PRESSURE WASHING you have the knowledge and the proper
source with an output greater than 12 Volts. equipment. If you have any doubt about your
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. CAUTION! ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high to a competent mechanic.
 Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash pressure washer is not recommended.
hands after handling. Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
ENGINE OIL — GAS ENGINE then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound.
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engines Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for an
Material Standard MS-6395 is recommended for
The oil change indicator system will remind you extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended oil
all operating temperatures. This engine oil
that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled changes or extended idling. If the engine continues
improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
economy.
further information. comes on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
NOTE: Diesel Engine Oil Selection recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine.
Under no circumstances should oil change For best performance and maximum protection For information on engine oil filler cap location,
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), under all types of operating conditions, the refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, manufacturer recommends engine oils that meet this section.
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine the requirements of FCA Material Standard Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet MS-12991, and that are API SN certified and meet certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity
customers. the requirements of FCA LLC. grade number should not be used.
Change Engine Oil — Diesel Engine American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) —
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for Oil Identification Symbol 5.7L Engine
the proper maintenance intervals. This symbol means that the oil has been Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA 7
Gasoline Engine Oil Selection certified by the American Petroleum Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
For best performance and maximum protection Institute (API). The manufacturer only Shell Helix, or equivalent is recommended for all
under all types of operating conditions, the recommends API Certified engine oils. operating temperatures. This engine oil improves
manufacturer only recommends engine oils that This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils. economy.
Material Standard MS-6395. The engine oil filler cap also shows the
CAUTION!
NOTE: recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine.
Hemi engine (5.7L) at times can tick right after Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as For information on engine oil filler cap location,
startup and then quiet down after approximately 30 the chemicals can damage your engine. Such refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in
seconds. This is normal and will not harm the damage is not covered by the New Vehicle this section.
engine. This characteristic can be caused by short Limited Warranty.
drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil Materials Added To Engine Oil ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity
The manufacturer strongly recommends against Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for
grade number should not be used.
the addition of any additives (other than leak the proper maintenance intervals.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — Diesel detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be NOTE:
Engine
impaired by supplemental additives. Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
CAUTION! maintenance interval if applicable.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Filters WARNING!
technology Diesel Engine and an emission Care should be taken in disposing of used engine The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
device designed to limit Diesel Particulate oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
Emissions from being released into the filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the
atmosphere. The durability of your engine and a problem to the environment. Contact an air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
life expectancy of this diesel particulate filter authorized dealer, service station or governmental unless such removal is necessary for repair or
emission device is highly dependent on the use agency for advice on how and where used oil and maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
of the correct engine oil. oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
We recommend you use 5W-40 synthetic engine
ENGINE OIL FILTER etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
oil such as Mopar that meets FCA Material The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new serious personal injury.
Standard MS-12991 and the API SN engine oil filter at every engine oil change.
category is required.
Engine Oil Filter Selection Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Synthetic Engine Oils This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters
recommended oil quality requirements are met, replacement. The quality of replacement filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
and the recommended maintenance intervals for varies considerably. Only high quality filters should Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a high quality
oil and filter changes are followed. be used to assure most efficient service. Mopar filter and are recommended.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE recommended.
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And 2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air
Replacement cleaner filter.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris
you should change your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six) fasteners
on air cleaner filter.
Air Cleaner Filter

1 — Air Cleaner Cover
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly 2 — Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is 7
housing assembly. present before replacing the air filter element.
Air Cleaner Filter 1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the
housing assembly with the air cleaner filter
1 — Fasteners inspection surface facing downward.
2 — Air Cleaner Cover 2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing
assembly.
3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the air cleaner
filter assembly.
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR NOTE:

Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
FILTER — D IESEL ENGINE from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
The fuel/water separator filter housing is located discarded, can present a problem to the envi-
inside the frame rail, behind the left front wheel. ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
The best access to this water drain valve is from station, or government agency for advice on recy-
under the vehicle. cling programs and for where used fluids and
filters can be properly disposed of in your area.
CAUTION! Drain the fuel/water separator filter when the
 Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” is ON. Within
when the engine is running. Fuel Filter Assembly 10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the filter
drain valve (located on the bottom of the filter
 Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving 1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve housing) counterclockwise to drain fuel/water,
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate then turn the ignition switch to the ON position,
container. and allow any accumulated water to drain.
CAUTION! Leave the drain valve open until all water and
If water is detected in the water separator while the If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, contaminants have been removed. When clean
engine is running, or while the ignition switch is in DO NOT START the engine before you drain water fuel is visible, close the drain valve by turning it
the ON/RUN position, the “Water In Fuel Indicator from the fuel filter to avoid engine damage. clockwise, and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
Light” will illuminate and an audible chime will be If more than two ounces or 60 milliliters of fuel
heard. At this point, you should stop the engine If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” comes on and have been drained, refer to “Priming If The Engine
and drain the water from the filter housing. a single chime is heard while you are driving, or Has Run Out Of Fuel” in this chapter.
with the ignition in the ON position, there may be a
problem with your water separator wiring or
sensor. See an authorized dealer for service.
Upon proper draining of the water from the fuel
filter, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will remain
illuminated for approximately 10 seconds.
UNDERBODY M OUNTED FUEL FILTER 7. Wipe the sealing surfaces of the lid and
housing clean.
REPLACEMENT — DIESEL E NGINE
8. Install a new o-ring into the ring groove on the
NOTE: filter housing and lubricate with clean engine oil.
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufac-
turer's filtration and water separating requirements PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
OF FUEL — DIESEL E NGINE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
 Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate Fuel Filter Assembly Do not open the high pressure fuel system with
container. the engine running. Engine operation causes
1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve
high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can
 Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a 2 — Fuel Filter Access cause serious injury or death.
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter during
1. Turn engine off. 1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank,
this action. It is best to install the filter dry and
allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel 2. Place a drain pan under the fuel filter approximately 2 to 5 gal (8 L to 19 L).
system. assembly. 2. Press ignition switch twice without your foot on 7
3. Open the water drain valve, and let any brake to put vehicle in ON/RUN position. This
accumulated water drain. will activate the in tank fuel pump for approxi-
4. Close the water drain valve. mately 30 seconds. Repeat this process twice.
5. Remove bottom cover using a strap wrench. 3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting”
Rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove procedure. Refer to “Starting The Engine”
the used o-ring and discard it. in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
housing and dispose of it according to your
local regulations.
 In addition, commercially available fuel addi-

CAUTION! tives are not necessary for the proper operation WARNING!
The starter motor will engage for approximately of your diesel engine. A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
30 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes  For extreme cold conditions, "Mopar Premium over materials that can burn. Such materials
between cranking intervals. Diesel Fuel Treatment" is recommended to might be grass or leaves coming into contact with
assist with cold starting. your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
NOTE: I NTERVENTION R EGENERATION contact anything that can burn.
The engine may run rough until the air is forced
from all the fuel lines. STRATEGY — MESSAGE P ROCESS F LOW
(D IESEL ENGINE) DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID
WARNING!
This engine meets all required diesel engine Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending emissions standards. To achieve these emissions simply by the name of its active component,
agent. They can be unstable under certain standards, your vehicle is equipped with a UREA—is a key component of selective catalytic
conditions and be hazardous or explosive when state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel
mixed with diesel fuel. These systems are seamlessly integrated into vehicles meet stringent emission regulations.
your vehicle and managed by the Powertrain DEF is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with
Control Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
CAUTION! combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, harmless nitrogen and water vapor.
the use of these fuels can cause damage to the with no input or interaction on your part. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
fuel system. Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you Specifications” for further information.
to additional maintenance required on your vehicle
or engine. AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE
NOTE:
 Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To For best possible performance, your air conditioner
negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to sepa- Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. should be checked and serviced by an authorized
rate water from the fuel, resulting in high pres- dealer at the start of each warm season. This
sure fuel system corrosion or damage. service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
WARNING! behind the glove compartment. Perform the
R–1234yf
 Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri- following procedure to replace the filter:
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
cants approved by the manufacturer for your air 1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
conditioning system. Some unapproved refrig- contents.
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
erants are flammable and can explode, injuring
ozone-friendly substance with a low global-warming 2. With the glove compartment door open,
you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubri-
potential. The manufacturer recommends that air remove the glove compartment tension tether
cants can cause the system to fail, requiring
conditioning service be performed by an authorized and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the
costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information
dealer using recovery and recycling equipment. face of the glove compartment door. Lift the
Book, for further warranty information.
NOTE: clip out of glove compartment door and
 The air conditioning system contains refrig- release into dash panel.
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of compressor oil, and refrigerants.
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines Cabin Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
to be disconnected should be done by an Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
experienced technician. maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
7
CAUTION! Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
Do not use chemical flushes in your air vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
conditioning system as the chemicals can ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
damage your air conditioning components. removed and the blower operating, the blower
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle can contact hands and may propel dirt and Right Side Of Glove Compartment
Limited Warranty. debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury. 1 — Glove Compartment Door
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on

both sides of the glove compartment door,
push inward on both sides of the glove
compartment to release the glove
compartment travel stops.
Filter Cover Cabin Air Filter

7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing
the filter cover, press on each end until you
hear an audible click.
Glove Compartment
CAUTION!
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
indicate airflow direction through the filter.
3 — Glove Compartment Door Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
4. Disengage the glove compartment door from Filter Cover Removal
its hinges by opening the glove compartment 8. Reinstall the glove compartment on the
past the travel stop and pulling it toward you. 1 — Finger Tabs
hinges.
5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the
finger tabs on each end of the filter cover. 6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight
out of the housing.
9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall ACCESSORY D RIVE BELT INSPECTION
the glove compartment past the travel stops by
pushing in on the glove compartment sides. WARNING!
 Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with vehicle running.
 When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades. Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
 You can be badly injured working on or around Conditions that would require replacement:
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which  Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
Glove Compartment you have the knowledge and the proper equip- from belt body)
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a  Rib or belt wear
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether competent mechanic.  Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two
3 — Glove Compartment Door ribs) 7
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small  Belt slips
NOTE: cracks that run across the ribbed surface of a belt  “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are correct position on pulley)
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged. not a reason to replace the belt. However, cracks
 Belt broken
running along a rib (not across) are not normal.
10. Reattach the glove compartment tension
Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be  Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
compartment and sliding the clip away from
excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
the face of the glove compartment door.
NOTE: The external lock cylinders should be lubricated The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
Identify and correct problem before new belt is twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. inspected periodically, not just when wiper
installed. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, performance problems are experienced. This
NOTE: such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into inspection should include the following points:
the lock cylinder.  Wear or uneven edges
If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start belt
must be replaced with an OEM grade Mopar belt. WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES  Foreign material
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty  Hardening or cracking
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
should be carefully inspected for damage and windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth  Deformation or fatigue
proper alignment. and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
accumulations of salt or road film. the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer. periods may cause deterioration of the wiper damaged.
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
BODY L UBRICATION wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice CAUTION!
as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood against the glass without the wiper blade in
hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a oil, gasoline, etc.
place or the glass may be damaged.
lithium based grease, such as Mopar Spray White NOTE:
Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped performance of blades may be present with chat-
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular these conditions are present, clean the wiper
attention should also be given to hood latching blades or replace as necessary.
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood latch
release mechanism, and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off EXHAUST SYSTEM
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear
of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
1 — Wiper Blade loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position 3 — J Hook Retainer have the exhaust system inspected each time the
vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
1 — Wiper Blade Replace as required.
2 — Wiper Arm 3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
3 — Release Tab wiper blade from the wiper arm. WARNING! 7
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
 Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper Installing The Front Wipers carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
arm, press the release tab on the wiper blade odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
and while holding the wiper arm with one 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the scious and can eventually poison you. To avoid
hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the wiper arm is in the full up position. breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips” in “Safety”
base of the wiper arm. 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the for further information.
tip of the wiper arm. (Continued)
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm, latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
WARNING!
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic COOLING SYSTEM
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park is important to keep the engine properly tuned to WARNING!
over materials that can burn. Such materials assure proper catalyst operation and prevent
might be grass or leaves coming into contact with possible catalyst damage.  You or others can be badly burned by hot
your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
NOTE:
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
Intentional tampering with emissions control
contact anything that can burn. under the hood, do not open the hood until the
systems can result in civil penalties being
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
assessed against you.
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
In unusual situations involving grossly ator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
 The catalytic converter requires the use of may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a raised. The fan starts automatically and may
emissions control device and may seriously tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should start at any time, whether the engine is
reduce engine performance and cause be obtained immediately. running or not.
serious damage to the engine. To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter  When working near the radiator cooling fan,
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result if damage: disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating  Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
condition. In the event of engine malfunction, sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. controlled and can start at any time the igni-
particularly involving engine misfire or other tion is in the ON mode.
 Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
apparent loss of performance, have your
towing the vehicle.
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation
of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could  Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
cause the converter to overheat, resulting in nents disconnected or removed, such as when
possible damage to the converter and vehicle. diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
Engine Coolant Checks Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for  Some vehicles require special tools to add
the proper maintenance intervals. coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
properly could lead to severe internal engine
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing Selection Of Coolant
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical the system please contact an authorized dealer.
(antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the Specifications” for further information.
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with Adding Coolant
fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser NOTE:
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
(if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of  Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
water from a garden hose vertically down the face of engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the damage and may decrease corrosion protection. 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
radiator core. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid period, it is important that you use the same engine
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” throughout the life of your vehicle.
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system Please review these recommendations for using
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP in an emergency, the cooling system will need to Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA 7
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho- Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
rized dealer as soon as possible. engine coolant (antifreeze):
NOTE:  We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi- Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator meets the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
coolant is needed to be added to the system dard MS.90032.
please contact an authorized dealer. engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or  This vehicle has not been designed for use with
contains visible sediment, have an authorized propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
(antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032). coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
 Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine Cooling System Pressure Cap Disposal Of Used Coolant
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed
engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator Check with your local authorities to determine the
70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank if disposal rules for your community. To prevent
anticipated. Please contact an authorized
so equipped. ingestion by animals or children, do not store
dealer for assistance.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
 Use only high purity water such as distilled or or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground.
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
deionized water when mixing the water/engine sealing surfaces. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills
quality water will reduce the amount of corro- WARNING! immediately.
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
 Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never Checking Coolant Level — 3.6L Engine
NOTE:
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant
 It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove bottle should be between the “MIN” and “MAX”
proper level of protection against freezing the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
according to the temperatures occurring in the causes pressure to build up in the cooling The radiator normally remains completely full,
area where the vehicle is operated. system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not so there is no need to remove the cap unless
 Some vehicles require special tools to add remove the pressure cap while the system is checking for coolant freeze point or replacing
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems hot or under pressure. engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service
properly could lead to severe internal engine attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
 Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
the system, please contact a local authorized need only be checked once a month. When
engine damage may result.
dealer. additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
 Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
recommended and can result in cooling system coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Checking Coolant Level — 5.7L Engines Points To Remember

With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the NOTE:
engine coolant should be between the ADD and When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
SAFE range on the dipstick. meters of operation, you may observe vapor coming
To check the coolant level: from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
1. Open the coolant reservoir.
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being
vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
Coolant Reservoir Dipstick
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick. vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so  Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless
checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze  Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
Opening The Coolant Reservoir
Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle must 7
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. also be protected against freezing.
reservoir neck. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is  If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions
needed to maintain the proper level, it should be are required, the cooling system should be pres-
added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. sure tested for leaks.
 Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentra-
tion at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water
for proper corrosion protection of your engine
which contains aluminum components.
 Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle To guarantee optimum performance of the system, Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. keep the surfaces of the charge air cooler,
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
 Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your condenser and radiator clean and free of debris.
checked when performing under the hood service
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep Periodically check the hoses leading to and from
or immediately if the brake system warning lamp
the front of the condenser clean. the charge air cooler for cracks or loose clamps
indicates system failure.
resulting in loss of pressure and reduced engine
 Do not change the thermostat for Summer or performance. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces- designated marks on the side of the reservoir of
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. BRAKE SYSTEM the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to
gas mileage, and increased emissions. fall as the brake linings wear. However, an
periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in
CHARGE AIR COOLER — I NTER-C OOLER this section for the proper maintenance intervals. unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a system check should be conducted.
(D IESEL ENGINE) WARNING! Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
The charge air cooler is positioned in front of the Specifications” for further information.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
radiator and the air conditioner condenser. Air possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
enters the engine through the air cleaner and WARNING!
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
passes through the turbocharger, where it is abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive  Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
pressurized. This pressurized air rapidly reaches lining wear, and possible brake damage. You fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
high temperature. The air is then directed through a would not have your full braking capacity in an “Technical Specifications” for further informa-
hose to the charge air cooler and through another emergency. tion. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
hose to the intake manifold of the engine. This
cooling process enables more efficient burning of severely damage your brake system and/or
fuel resulting in fewer emissions. impair its performance. The proper type of
brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on
the original factory installed hydraulic master
cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING!
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
 To avoid contamination from foreign matter or Selection Of Lubricant
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to CAUTION!
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Do not use chemical flushes in your
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission transmission as the chemicals can damage your
all times. Brake fluid in a open container fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical transmission components. Such damage is not
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a Specifications”. It is important to maintain the covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil transmission fluid at the correct level using the
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. be used in any transmission; only the approved Fluid Level Check
This could result in a collision. lubricant should be used. The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
require adjustment under normal operating
CAUTION! conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake Using a transmission fluid other than the required, therefore the transmission has no
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or transmission fluid level using special service tools.
contact with these surfaces. torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids And If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
7
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid
 Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
specifications. immediately to have the transmission fluid level
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
could be damaged, causing partial or complete
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
brake failure. This could result in a collision. Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against CAUTION!
using any special additives in the transmission.
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
engineered product and its performance may be
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes Lubricant Selection Drain And Refill

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory Specification” for further information. maintenance intervals.
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. NOTE: TRANSFER C ASE
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid result in corrosion and possible failure of differ- Selection Of Lubricant
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the ential components. Operation of the vehicle in Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid.
transmission is disassembled for any reason. water, as may be encountered in some off-highway Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
types of service, will require draining and refilling Specifications” for further information.
REAR AXLE AND 4X4 F RONT DRIVING the axle to avoid damage.
AXLE FLUID L EVEL Fluid Level Check
Limited-Slip Differentials
This fluid level can be checked by removing the
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are Rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip Differential
filler plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other require that 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip
edge of the filler plug hole (or within 1/8 inch of the
reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly Additive be added to the gear lubricant. Refer to
bottom) with the vehicle in a level position.
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specification”
suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to “Fluids for further information. The Mopar Limited Slip Drain And Refill
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for Additive should be added to the gear lubricant Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for
further information. This inspection should be whenever a fluid change is made to an axle the proper maintenance intervals.
made with the vehicle in a level position. equipped with a Limited Slip Differential.
The fluid level should be even with the bottom of NOTE:
the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge of hole) When refilling a limited slip differential axle which
for the front axle and rear axle. requires a friction modification additive, the
additive should be added before the gear lubricant
to ensure proper additive fill.
HOISTING Tire Markings NOTE:

 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
A conventional floor jack may be used at the design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
jacking locations. Refer to the graphics that show “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
jacking locations. However, a floor jack or frame designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
hoist must never be used on any other parts of the
underbody.  European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
CAUTION! standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
Never use a floor jack directly under the "P" is absent from this tire size designation.
differential housing of a loaded truck or damage Example: 215/65R15 96H.
to your vehicle may result.
 LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
Tire Markings US design standards. The size designation for
TIRES 1 — US DOT Safety Standards LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Code (TIN) the sidewall preceding the size designation.
2 — Size Designation Example: LT235/85R16.
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
3 — Service Description  Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo- 7
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and 4 — Maximum Load
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
5 — Maximum Pressure “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
6 — Treadwear, Traction and designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Temperature Grades  High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls
will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
7
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
Maximum Inflation Pressure
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
Tire Placard
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
NOTE: 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on and spare tires.
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door. Loading
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
vehicle. capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) on the Tire and Loading Information placard in
Tire And Loading Information Placard “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, 7
and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
Tire And Loading Information Placard exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
This placard tells you important information about the: Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
vehicle.
weight referenced here.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Steps For Determining Correct Load (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit
Limit— available amount of cargo and luggage For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
(1) Locate the statement “The combined load capacity. For example, if “XXX” there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there the amount of available cargo and luggage load
weight of occupants and cargo should capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your will be five 150 lb passengers in your
shown in step 4.
vehicle's placard. vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. NOTE:
(2) Determine the combined weight of  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
the driver and passengers that will be your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
riding in your vehicle. (5) Determine the combined weight of The following table shows examples on how to
luggage and cargo being loaded on the calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the vehicle. That weight may not safely capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
driver and passengers from XXX kg or configurations and number and size of occu-
exceed the available cargo and luggage
XXX lbs. pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
and may not be accurate for the seating and
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load carry capacity of your vehicle.
load from your trailer will be transferred  For the following example, the combined weight
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to of occupants and cargo should never exceed
determine how this reduces the 865 lbs (392 kg).
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION WARNING!

Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
Tire Pressure  Unequal tire pressures can cause steering abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the problems. You could lose control of your resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. vehicle.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
 Unequal tire pressures from one side of the Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
pressure:
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
 Safety drift to the right or left. uncomfortable ride.
 Fuel Economy  Always drive with each tire inflated to the Tire Inflation Pressures
 Tread Wear recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the side door.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
At least once a month:
WARNING! sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.  Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
can cause collisions.
NOTE:
make a visual judgment when determining
 Unequal tire pressures from side to side may proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can cause erratic and unpredictable steering
result in overheating and tire failure. even when they are underinflated.
response.
 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion  Unequal tire pressure from side to side may damage.
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
can cause damage that result in tire failure. CAUTION!
Fuel Economy
 Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
resulting in loss of vehicle control. prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
(Continued) valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Tire Repair
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure it meets the following criteria:
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle  The tire has not been driven on when flat
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold  The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the tire (sidewall damage is not repairable)
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire  The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
sidewall. (6 mm)
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. and additional information.
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi WARNING!
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. High speed driving with your vehicle under immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure maximum load is dangerous. The added strain size and service description (Load Index and
inside a garage, especially in the Winter. on your tires could cause them to fail. You could Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle as well as it is not designed to be reused.
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped 7
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
Radial Ply Tires rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
condition.
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to WARNING! Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
be too low. capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire
with other types of tires. is changed after driving with underinflated tire
condition, please replace the TPM sensor as it is Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire
not designed to be reused when driven under run
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
tires to help you in determining when your tires factors including, but not limited to:
NOTE: should be replaced.  Driving style
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.  Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
run flat mode.
the need for earlier tire replacement
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more
 Distance driven
information.
 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
Tire Spinning or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds Tire Tread recommended
continuously without stopping.
1 — Worn Tire
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of WARNING!
2 — New Tire
Emergency” for further information. Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
WARNING! These indicators are molded into the bottom of the Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tire failure. You could lose control and have a
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
generated by excessive wheel speeds may collision resulting in serious injury or death.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could indicators, the tire should be replaced.
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your NOTE:
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
for more than 30 seconds continuously when further information.
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a tires.
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and CAUTION!
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. ride of your vehicle. Replacing original tires with tires of a different
Replacement Tires size may result in false speedometer and
WARNING! odometer readings.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected  Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation speed rating other than that specified for your TIRE TYPES
pressures. The manufacturer strongly vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the tires and wheels may change suspension All Season Tires — If Equipped
originals in size, quality and performance when dimensions and performance characteristics, All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on resulting in changes to steering, handling, and (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
“Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre- levels may vary between different all season tires.
the Tire and Loading Information placard or the dictable handling and stress to steering and All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation suspension components. You could lose M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for control and have a collision resulting in season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
your tire will be found on the original equipment serious injury or death. Use only the tire and may adversely affect the safety and handling of
tire sidewall. wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
your vehicle.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Summer Or Three Season Tires — 7
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual for  Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
If Equipped
more information relating to the Load Index and capacity, other than what was originally
Speed Symbol of a tire. equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
smaller load index could result in tire over- conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
loading and failure. You could lose control and
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed
have a collision.
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s  Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures
specifications match those of the original wheels. adequate speed capability can result in are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. ice or snow. For more information, contact an
dealer or original equipment dealer with any authorized dealer.
questions you may have on tire specifications or
Summer tires do not contain the all season (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the authorized tire dealer for recommended safe And Wheel — If Equipped
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and pressures. Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
handling of your vehicle. wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
While studded tires improve performance on ice, equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in
WARNING! may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe should be checked before using these tire types. recommended tire rotation pattern.
injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also
creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
NOTE: The compact spare is for temporary emergency
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
Snow Tires equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
Some areas of the country require the use of snow “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified Information Placard located on the driver’s side
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire CAUTION! door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
sidewall. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
If you need snow tires, select tires letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
equivalent in size and type to the original Example: T145/80D18 103M.
with a compact or limited use temporary spare
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
sets of four; failure to do so may Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
adversely affect the safety and handling of your equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
vehicle. Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
towing with a spare tire designated for temporary
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
emergency use.
should not be operated at sustained speeds over since the wheel is designed specifically for the
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
WARNING! conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary since the wheel is designed specifically for the
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive collapsible spare tire.
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares contains the driving limitations for this spare.
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the WARNING!
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, emergency use only. With these spares, do not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. use spares have limited tread life. When the original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. at the first opportunity.
Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency WARNING!
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
failure and loss of vehicle control.
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
Information Placard located on the driver’s side Full Size Spare — If Equipped vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
more than the speed listed on the limited use 7
Collapsible spare tire description spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
example: 165/80-17 101P. inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
Loading Information Placard located on the
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) When the tread is worn to the tread wear
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
opportunity. needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is result in loss of vehicle control.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the at the first opportunity.
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
WHEEL A ND W HEEL TRIM C ARE When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. CAUTION!
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
or their equivalent is recommended or select a
Wash wheels with the same soap solution wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
recommended for the body of the vehicle and or polishing compounds. They will permanently
chrome wheels.
remember to always wash when the surfaces are damage this finish and such damage is not
not hot to the touch. covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road products may damage the wheel's protective finish.
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is TIRE CHAINS A ND TRACTION DEVICES
or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s recommended. Use of traction devices require sufficient
protective coating that helps keep them from
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these
corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: recommendations to guard against damage.
CAUTION! If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an  Traction device must be of proper size for the
extended period after cleaning the wheels with tire, as recommended by the traction device
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the manufacturer.
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or brakes to remove the water droplets from the
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel brake components. This activity will remove the
cleaners and automatic car washes may red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such vibration when braking.
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
Please follow the table below for proper tire size, chain type, and axle recommendations:
Vehicle Axle Recommendations Tire Sizes Chain Class

275/65R18
1500 Models Rear Only S Class
275/55R20
WARNING! CAUTION!
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,  Install device as tightly as possible and then Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). operate at different loads and perform different
unpredictable handling. You could lose control Autosock traction devices do not require steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
and have a collision. retightening. reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
 Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
CAUTION!  Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet
the following precautions:  Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
traction levels and contribute to a smooth, quiet 7
 Because of restricted traction device clearance ride.
between tires and other suspension compo-  Observe the traction device manufacturer’s Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
nents, it is important that only traction devices instructions on the method of installation, maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is
in good condition are used. Broken devices can operating speed, and conditions for use. permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or
cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme- Always use the suggested operating speed of unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
diately if noise occurs that could indicate device the device manufacturer’s if it is less than being performed.
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the 30 mph (48 km/h).
device before further use.
 Do not use traction devices on a compact
(Continued) spare tire.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward All passenger vehicle tires must conform TRACTION G RADES
cross” shown in the following diagram. to Federal safety requirements in
This rotation pattern does not apply to some
addition to these grades. The Traction grades, from highest to
directional tires that must not be reversed. lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
TREADWEAR represent the tire's ability to stop on
The Treadwear grade is a comparative wet pavement, as measured under
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire controlled conditions on specified
when tested under controlled conditions government test surfaces of asphalt
on a specified government test course. and concrete. A tire marked C may have
For example, a tire graded 150 would poor traction performance.
wear one and one-half times as well on WARNING!
the government course as a tire graded
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
100. The relative performance of tires
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross) depends upon the actual conditions of does not include acceleration, cornering,
their use, however, and may depart hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION significantly from the norm due to
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
The following tire grading categories characteristics and climate.
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
TEMPERATURE G RADES STORING THE VEHICLE The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
The Temperature grades are A (the If you are storing your vehicle for more than corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's 21 days, we recommend that you take the
What Causes Corrosion?
resistance to the generation of heat and following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery: Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
under controlled conditions on a  Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
The most common causes are:
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.  Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,  Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Sustained high temperature can cause run the air conditioning system at idle for about  Stone and gravel impact.
the material of the tire to degenerate five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
 Insects, tree sap and tar.
and reduce tire life, and excessive setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
temperature can lead to sudden tire cation to minimize the possibility of compressor  Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level damage when the system is started again.  Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
of performance, which all passenger BODY AND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal BODYWORK
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Cleaning Headlights
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC 7
Grades B and A represent higher levels of AGENTS
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
performance on the laboratory test wheel, and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to to stone breakage than glass headlights.
than the minimum required by law.
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
WARNING! make roads passable in snow and ice and those therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during be followed.
The temperature grade for this tire is established other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
for a tire that is properly inflated and not To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
or excessive loading, either separately or in cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold solution followed by rinsing.
combination, can cause heat buildup and weather and other extreme conditions will have an
possible tire failure. adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,

solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to CAUTION! CAUTION!
clean the lenses.  Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-  Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care rials such as steel wool or scouring powder brush, metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. products may damage the bumper’s protec-
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold tive finish. Such damage is not covered by the
Tonneau cover, use Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl Top  Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
Cleaner and Mopar Leather and Vinyl Conditioner/ (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
soap, Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is
Protectant. of paint and decals.
recommended.
PRESERVING T HE B ODYWORK  Avoid products or automatic car washes that
Bumper Care use acidic solutions, strong alkaline additives,
Washing The customer is responsible to clean and maintain or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket cleaners
 Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your the chrome components of the vehicle. Washing and automatic car washes may damage the
vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a away road debris and salt using an automotive bumper’s protective finish. Such damage is
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels soap. Bumpers should be cleaned regularly using not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
completely with clear water. mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Chrome
 If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have luster and to prevent corrosion. Cleaner, or equivalent is recommended.
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Your bumpers are susceptible to deterioration
Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove. caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium Special Care
 Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt  If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
roads. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
protect your paint finish. Take care never to
They can stain or damage the protective coating at least once a month.
scratch the paint.
that helps keep them from corroding and  It is important that the drain holes in the lower
 Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
tarnishing. edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out kept clear and open.
the paint finish.
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to
paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you many different types of chemicals (including
such repairs is considered the responsibility of periodically rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods of
the owner. and clean your truck at least twice per year using time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner,
 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or the Mopar Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner available rinse the truck out as soon as possible to avoid
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec- at your local authorized dealer. permanent damage.
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
as possible. The cost of such repairs is consid- Spray-On Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below: While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a
ered the responsibility of the owner. 1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when
 If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, any loose dirt and debris. loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such 2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a across the floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point
materials are well packaged and sealed. soft cloth or brush. is exposed under the weight of the pallet a scratch
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, or tear is possible. While not covered by your new
3. Rinse bedliner with water. vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the metal
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel. 4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or gouge, follow the directions provided in the
 Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon or sponge and wipe over the entire surface of Mopar Quick Repair Kit.
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up the truck bedliner.
paint to match the color of your vehicle. 7
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped WARNING!
During ownership, the shine and luster of the
Do not use silicon-based protection products to
Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road
clean your bedliner. Silicon-based products can
dirt, heavy-duty hauling and hard water stains.
become slippery and may result in personal
Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading,
injury.
dulling, and loss of gloss over time.
INTERIORS  For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose

Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove WARNING!
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
residue. and leave you with no protection. Inspect the
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery  Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
and carpeting. of protectants on Stain Repel products. or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
WARNING! Seat Belt Maintenance system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical after a collision if they have been damaged
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
and if used in closed areas they may cause fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
respiratory harm. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution PLASTIC A ND C OATED PARTS
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or
if the buckles do not work properly.
CAUTION!
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following  Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
manner: NOTE:
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
 Remove as much of the stain as possible by loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
blotting with a clean, dry towel. wet soft cloth until all residue is removed. interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
 Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp away immediately.
towel.  Damage caused by these type of products
 For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a may not be covered by your New Vehicle
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and Limited Warranty.
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster NOTE: GLASS SURFACES

Lenses If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
The lenses in front of the instruments in this transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends household-type glass cleaner. Never use an
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching Mopar Total Clean leather cleaner applied on a abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning
the plastic. cloth to clean the leather seats as needed. the inside rear window equipped with electric
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap defrosters or windows equipped with radio
solution may be used, but do not use high CAUTION! antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap instruments that may scratch the elements.
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
2. Dry with a soft cloth. upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
result. spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
LEATHER P ARTS
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small 7
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents,
or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
376
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA BRAKE SYSTEM TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER repeated brake applications with the engine off), **Lug
Lug Nut/
Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/ Bolt
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the brakes will still function. However, you will Nut/Bolt
Bolt Torque Bolt Type Socket
the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible experience a substantial increase in braking effort Size
Size
through the windshield. to stop the vehicle.
130 Ft-Lbs M14 x
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses Cone 22 mm
(176 N·m) 1.50
normal braking capability, the remaining system
will still function with some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This will be evident by increased **Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
pedal travel during application, greater pedal force nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
required to slow or stop, and activation of the before tightening.
“Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning NOTE:
Light” (if equipped) during brake use. Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Vehicle Identification Number Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
NOTE: vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 377
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to

mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
FUEL REQUIREMENTS —
loose particles. GASOLINE ENGINES
3.6L E NGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and performance
Four, Five, And Six Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted octane number
WARNING! of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use
Wheel Mounting Surface To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the of higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required,
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until as it will not provide any benefit over “Regular”
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow gasoline in these engines.
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure this warning may result in personal injury. While operating on gasoline with an octane
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from
(do not insert it halfway).
the engine is not a cause for concern. However,
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are 8
sound, see an dealer immediately. Use of gasoline
properly seated against the wheel. with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
378 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.7L E NGINE REFORMULATED G ASOLINE Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater Many areas of the country require the use intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
than 15% in this engine. of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
This engine is designed to meet all “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
emissions regulations and provide contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
satisfactory fuel economy and to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
performance when using high-quality quality.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. oxygenates such as ethanol.
89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recommended for provide improved performance and durability CAUTION!
optimum performance and fuel economy. of engine and fuel system components.
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
While operating on gasoline with an octane MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
the engine is not a cause for concern. However, Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, system components, cause emissions to exceed
sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of corrosion and stability additives are recommended. the applicable standard, and/or cause the
gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can Using gasolines that have these additives will help Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
cause engine failure and may void or not be improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and observe pump labels as they should clearly
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. maintain vehicle performance. communicate if a fuel contains greater than
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline 15% ethanol (E-15).
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you contains a higher level of detergents to
experience these symptoms, try another brand of further aide in minimizing engine and
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. fuel system deposits. When available,
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is
containing methanol are not the responsibility of the
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a manufacturer and may void or not be covered under
list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO N OT U SE E-85 IN N ON-FLEX F UEL MMT I N GASOLINE CAUTION!

VEHICLES Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive malfunctions can cause the catalytic
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). that is blended into some gasoline to increase converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
Use of gasoline with higher ethanol content may octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. performance advantage beyond gasoline of the may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline require immediate service. Contact an autho-
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these rized dealer for service assistance.
reduces emissions system performance in some
symptoms: vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that  The use of fuel additives, which are now being
 Operate in a lean mode. gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated mended. Most of these products contain high
 OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
 Poor engine performance. your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline damage or vehicle performance problems
 Poor cold start and cold drivability. contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and resulting from the use of such fuels or additives
California reformulated gasoline. is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
 Increased risk for fuel system component
and may void or not be covered under the New
corrosion. FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM
MODIFICATIONS CAUTION! NOTE:
Follow these guidelines to maintain your Intentional tampering with the emissions control 8
Modifications that allow the engine to run on system can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle’s performance:
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane against you.
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,  The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
that result from running CNG or LP are not the engine performance and damage the emis-
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or sions control system.
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited (Continued)
Warranty.
CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To
prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle accumulated water from the fuel/water separator
WARNING!
with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm filter using the fuel/water separator drain provided
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low on the fuel filter housing. If you buy good quality
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur fuel and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel
carbon monoxide poisoning: maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions conditioners should not be required in your vehicle.
control system. If available in your area, a high cetane “premium”
 Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable diesel fuel may offer improved cold-starting and
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a supplier in your vehicle. For most year-round service, warm-up performance.
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM (formerly known as
a parked vehicle with the engine running for the American Society for Testing and Materials) CAUTION!
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on,
an open area with the engine running for more performance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme DO NOT START engine before you drain the water
than a short period, adjust the ventilation cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to operate from the fuel filter(s) to avoid engine damage.
system to force fresh, outside air into the at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged Refer to “Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter”
vehicle. periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further
No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will information.
 Guard against carbon monoxide with proper provide better protection from fuel gelling or
maintenance. Have the exhaust system wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired WARNING!
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open. Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain
conditions and hazardous or explosive when
mixed with diesel fuel.
DIESEL F UEL SPECIFICATIONS BIODIESEL FUEL R EQUIREMENTS Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which
require that you understand and adhere to the
This diesel engine has been developed to take A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM following requirements if you use blends of
advantage of the high energy content and specification D975 is recommended for use with Biodiesel between 6% and 20% (B6–B20). There
generally lower cost No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel your diesel engine. If frequent operation with are no unique restrictions for the use of B5.
fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur climatized diesel Biodiesel blends that are between 6% and 20%
fuels. (B6–B20) is desired, the maintenance schedule is CAUTION!
NOTE: subject to shorter intervals.
Use of blends greater than 20% is not approved.
 If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline The oil and filter change along with fuel filter Use of blends greater than 20% can result in
on your diesel vehicle, do not start the engine. replacement is subject to shorter intervals when engine damage. Such damage is not covered by
Damage to the engine and fuel system could operating your engine on biodiesel greater than the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
occur. Please call an authorized dealer for 5%. Do not use biodiesel greater than 20%.
service. For regular use of biodiesel blends between 6%
 A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting and 20% (B6–B20) it is important that you CAUTION!
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with understand and comply with these requirements.
In the event that the vehicle is filled with
your diesel engine without any adjustments to Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in “Scheduled
biodiesel and not used for more than a month,
regular service schedules. Servicing” for further direction.
the fuel should either be used up by driving (up
 Commercially available fuel additives are not CAUTION! to quarter tank) and filled with standard diesel
necessary for the proper operation of your blends with less than 5% that is normally
diesel engine. Failure to comply with Oil Change requirements available. This will help prevent the fuel filter
for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends clogging and potential damage to the fuel 8
 No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only be
between 6% and 20% (B6–B20) will result in injection system due to degraded biodiesel,
used where extended arctic conditions (-10°F
premature engine wear. Such wear is not which is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
or -23°C) exist.
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Warranty.
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable

resources typically derived from animal fat,
rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME) base), or
soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or SOME) base).
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient Fuel Water Separation — Must Use Mopar Biodiesel Fuel Filter Change Intervals
Temperatures Approved Fuel Filter Elements The use of biodiesel requires more frequent fuel
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and filter change intervals. When operating on biodiesel
temperatures, which may pose problems for both water accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar between 6% and 20%, fuel filter replacement
storage and operation. Precautions can be filtration system is designed to provide adequate intervals should be every second oil change, and
necessary at low ambient temperatures, such as fuel water separation capabilities. must not exceed 16,000 miles (25,750 km).
storing the fuel in a heated building or a heated NOTE:
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
storage tank, or using cold temperature additives. Under no circumstances should oil change
Required Oil Change Interval
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or
Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed 6 months, if regular operation occurs with 6% -
Standards with the use of Biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not 20% biodiesel blends. Under no circumstances
The quality of Biodiesel fuel may vary widely. exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is met your oil should fuel filter replacement intervals exceed
Only fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the change interval must be maintained with in the every second oil change and must not exceed
following specifications may be blended to meet suggested schedule. The regular use of biodiesel 16,000 miles (25, 750 km), if regular operation
Biodiesel blend B6 – B20 fuel meeting ASTM between 6% and 20% requires intervals shorter occurs with 6% - 20% biodiesel blends. Failure to
specification D-7467: than the outlined 10,000 miles and must not comply with these oil change and fuel filter require-
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 exceed the suggested schedule. When routinely ments for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends
and Biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM operating on biodiesel between 6% and 20%, oil up to B20 may result in premature engine wear.
specification D-6751 and filter replacement intervals must not exceed Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle
8,000 Miles or six months, which ever comes first. Limited Warranty. The engine may suffer severe
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel damage if operated with concentrations of
Within Six Months Of Manufacture biodiesel higher than 20%.
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which
can result in long term storage problems. Fuel
produced to approved ASTM standards, if stored
properly, provides for protection against fuel
oxidation for up to six months.
FLUID CAPACITIES — GASOLINE ENGINES

US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 23 Gallons 87 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 33 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
5.7L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
(240,000 km) Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
3.6L Motor Generator Unit (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard 1.8 Quarts 1.7 Liters
MS.90032.)
5.7L Engine – 1500 Models (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/ 8
150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard 18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
MS.90032.)
FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESEL ENGINE

US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.0L Diesel Engine 26 Gallons 98.5 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Tradesman/Rebel Models 5.14 Gallons 19.5 Liters
All Other Models 5.74 Gallons 21.7 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.0L Diesel Engine 8.5 Quarts 8.0 Liters
Cooling System
3.0L Diesel Engine 11.6 Quarts 11 Liters
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — GASOLINE ENGINES

ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Engine Coolant
Additive Technology).
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Motor Generator Unit (If Equipped)
Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar brand Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method,
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engines
0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
CAUTION!
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. 8
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
CHASSIS
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
Automatic Transmission
may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – 48-11 Active On-Demand
We recommend you use Mobil Fluid LT.
2–speed Transfer Case (With 4WD AUTO)
Transfer Case – 48-12 Part Time 2–Speed
We recommend you use Shell Spirax S2 ATF A389
Transfer Case (Without 4WD AUTO)
Front Axle We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (MS-A0160). Limited-Slip Rear Axles
Rear Axle (3.21/3.55)
require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip Rear Axles
Rear Axle (3.92)
Max Tow Rear Axle (3.92) We recommend You Use Dana SAE 80W90 Axle Lubricant.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3.
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — DIESEL ENGINE

ENGINE
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
Engine Coolant
(Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar that meets FCA Material Standard
Engine Oil
MS-12991 and the API SN engine oil category is required.
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters. Using an oil filter that does not meet the manufacturers
Engine Oil Filter
filtration requirements can severely impact engine life and reliability.
We recommend you use Mopar Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating. Using a fuel filter that does not meet the
Fuel Filters
manufacturer’s filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel
this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low
Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good
Fuel Selection
performance. We recommend you use a blend of up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM specification D-975 with
your diesel engine. 8
This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no greater than 20% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-7467 provided the shortened maintenance intervals are followed as directed.
Mopar Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to the ISO 22241
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage.
NOTE:
If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are operating below 20°F (-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar Premium Diesel Fuel
Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling.
CAUTION!
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
CHASSIS
Only use Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
Automatic Transmission
may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.
Front Axle – 1500 Four-Wheel Drive Models We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (MS-A0160). Limited-Slip Rear Axles
Rear Axle – 3.21 Axle Ratio
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip Rear Axles
Rear Axle – 3.92 Axle Ratio
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.
8
390
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
NOTE:
 FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4/4C/4C to your vehicle systems. directly regarding software updates.
NAV With 8.4-inch Display system or your Uconnect 4C The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
NAV With 12-inch Display system, refer to your  To help further improve vehicle security and
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. most recent version of vehicle software (such as vehicle owners should:
NOTE: Uconnect software) is installed.
Uconnect screen images are for illustration  Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
purposes only and may not reflect exact software WARNING! (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
for your vehicle. (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
 It is not possible to know or to predict all of the able Uconnect software updates.
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
CYBERSECURITY are breached. It may be possible that vehicle  Only connect and use trusted media
systems, including safety related systems, devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and USBs, CDs).
may be equipped with both wired and wireless could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to could occur that may result in an accident Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
send and receive information. This information involving serious injury or death. cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
allows systems and features in your vehicle to intercept information and private communications
 ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD)
function properly. without your consent. For further information, refer
into your vehicle if it came from a trusted to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security source. Media of unknown origin could Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and possibly contain malicious software, and if Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless installed in your vehicle, it may increase the “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
communications. Vehicle software technology possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
 As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
authorized dealer immediately.
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability
MULTIMEDIA 391
UCONNECT SETTINGS Push the SETTINGS button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the Settings
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
The Uconnect system uses a combination of menu screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system the desired menu, press and release the preferred
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the allows you to access programmable features that setting until the button is highlighted. Once the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument may be equipped such as Language, Display, setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow or
panel that allows you to access and change the Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, the Done button on the touchscreen. Pressing the
customer programmable features. Many features Brakes, Lights, Doors & Locks, Power Side Steps Up or Down Arrow button on the touchscreen on
can vary by vehicle. (if equipped), Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle
Engine Off Options, Suspension (if equipped), up or down through the list of available settings.
UCONNECT 3 SETTINGS Trailer Brake, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®,
SiriusXM® Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings,
and Clear Personal Data.
NOTE:
 Only one category may be selected at a time.
 All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the ON/RUN position.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Buttons On The

Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 9
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
392 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Selectable Options

Set Language English Français Español
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including
the trip functions and the Navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, and then press the desired language button on
the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Display Mode Auto Manual
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Fuel Saver Display On Off
NOTE:
The “Fuel Saver Display” feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
MULTIMEDIA 393
Units — If Equipped
After pressing Units on the touchscreen, the following will be available:
NOTE:

Units US Metric Custom
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
9
394 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Set Time 12 hour 24 hour
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time” feature, press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, and then select “AM” or “PM”.
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Forward Collision Warning Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity Near Med Far
Lane Sense Warning Early Med Late
Lane Sense Strength Low Med High
ParkSense Sound Only Sounds & Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph
(11 km/h). It provides an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects.
MULTIMEDIA 395

Front ParkSense Chime Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Chime Volume Low Med High
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior side-view mirrors tilt downward when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the
transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Backup camera
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire
surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note disappears.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
NOTE: 9
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system automatically activates the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
Hill Start Assist On Off
NOTE:
When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system becomes active.
396 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes — If Equipped
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Brake Service Yes No
NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether or not you would like to retract the park brakes to all brake system service.
Auto Park Brake On Off
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

0 sec 30 sec
Headlight Off Delay
60 sec 90 sec
0 sec 30 sec
Headlight Illumination On Approach
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on when the doors
are unlocked with the key fob.
MULTIMEDIA 397

Headlights With Wipers On Off
Auto Dim High Beams On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
Steering Directed Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Steering Directed Lights” feature is selected, the headlights turn with the direction of the steering wheel.
Doors & Locks

After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Auto Door Lock On Off
NOTE: 9
When the “Auto Door Lock” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL (N) position, and
the driver's door is opened.
398 MULTIMEDIA

Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Remote Door Unlock All Driver
NOTE:
The “Remote Door Unlock” feature allows you to program your remote door locks to unlock “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with the first push of the key
fob or when grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
NOTE:
When the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” feature is selected, the horn sounds when the remote start is activated.
Memory Linked To Fob On Off
NOTE:
 The “Memory Linked To Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
 The seat returns to the memorized seat location if “Memory Linked To Fob” is set to On when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Passive Entry On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. It automatically
unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be
selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
MULTIMEDIA 399
Power Side Steps — If Equipped

After pressing the Power Side Steps button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Power Side Steps Automatic Stow
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

After pressing the Auto Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated
Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Off Remote Start Only All Starts
Start
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected, the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel
will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
9
400 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options

After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Easy Exit Seats On Off
0 sec 30 sec
Headlight Off Delay
60 sec 90 sec
0 sec 45 sec
Engine Off Power Delay
5 min 10 min
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the Suspension button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Sound Horn With Lower On Off
Flash Lights With Lower On Off
Display Suspension Messages All Warning Only
Automatic Aero Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Automatic Aero Mode” feature is selected, the Ride Height will automatically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed.
MULTIMEDIA 401

Tire Jack Mode On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension while the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire.
Transport Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flatbed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode On Off
NOTE:
The “Wheel Alignment Mode” feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel alignment service. Before performing a wheel
alignment, this mode must be enabled. Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.
Trailer Brake
After pressing the Trailer Brake button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4 9
Trailer Brake Type Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Trailer Name List of Trailer Names Available
NOTE:
You can select and personalize your trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat,
car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
402 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Balance/Fade Front Back Left Right
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust, tap the C icon
to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides a simulated surround sound mode.
AUX Volume Offset On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Loudness On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
MULTIMEDIA 403
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List of Channels 9
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen,
select the channels you would like to skip.
404 MULTIMEDIA

Subscription Information Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Restore Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. If “Yes” is selected, a pop-up
will appear asking "Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” Select “Yes” to restore or “Cancel” to exit.
MULTIMEDIA 405
Clear Personal Data

After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. If “Yes” is selected, a pop-up will appear asking "Are
you sure you want to clear all personal data?” Select “Yes” to Clear or “Cancel” to exit.
UCONNECT 4/4C/4C NAV S ETTINGS Press the Apps button on the touchscreen then press When making a selection, press the button on the
the Settings button on the touchscreen to display the touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
Settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect the desired menu, press and release the preferred
system allows you to access programmable features setting until a check mark appears next to the
that may be equipped such as Language, Display, setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Units, Voice, Clock, Camera (if equipped), Safety & Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
Driving Assistance, Mirrors & Wipers, Brakes, Lights, button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
Doors & Locks, Power Side Steps (if equipped), Auto-On menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to
Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Options, Suspension, close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
Trailer, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® Settings, SiriusXM® Down Arrow button on the touchscreen on the right
Setup (if equipped), System Information (if equipped), side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
9
Reset (if equipped), Restore Settings to Default, and down through the list of available settings.
Clear Personal Data.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On
The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate NOTE:
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
406 MULTIMEDIA
Language
NOTE:

Set Language English Français Español
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including
the trip functions and the Navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, and then press the desired language button on
Display
NOTE:

Display Mode Auto Manual
NOTE:
When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
even though the headlights are on.
MULTIMEDIA 407

Display Brightness With Headlights ON – +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party"
or "parade" position.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF – +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party"
Set Theme Pre-configured Themes
Controls Screen Time-Out On Off
Fuel Saver Display in Cluster On Off
NOTE:
When selected, the system displays fuel saver mode in the instrument cluster.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
9
408 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measurement independently displayed in the instrument cluster display and
Navigation system (if equipped). The selectable units of measurement are listed below:
NOTE:

NOTE:
When the “Custom” setting is selected, units will appear according to your personally configured settings. To configure these settings, press the “Custom” bar.
The following settings will appear:
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Pressure PSI kPa bar
Temperature °F °C
MULTIMEDIA 409
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Show Command List Never w/Help Always
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Sync Time With GPS On Off
Set Time Hours – +
Set Time Minutes – +
12 hrs 24 hrs
9
Time Format
AM PM
Show Time In Status Bar On Off
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature allows you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
410 MULTIMEDIA
Camera — If Equipped
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds
after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active Parkview Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width
of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Fixed Parkview Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
MULTIMEDIA 411
Safety/Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

NOTE:
Active Parkview Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width
of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Forward Collision Warning Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
NOTE:
Applies brakes to slow the vehicle in case of potential forward collision, or applies brakes and a warning chime.
Med 9
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity Near Far
NOTE:
Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.
412 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:
Sets what distance the steering wheel provides feedback for potential lane departures.
ParkSense Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph
(11 km/h).
Front ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist On Off
Power Side Steps Auto Store
Blind Spot Alert Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
Brakes the vehicle while in reverse if potential rear collision is detected.
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert Auto Max (39.5 feet)
NOTE:
Auto detects the length of the trailer. Max sets all trailers to 39.5 ft (12 m).
Tire Fill Assist On Off
MULTIMEDIA 413
Mirrors & Wipers

After pressing the Mirrors & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the
transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
NOTE:
Automatically adjusts the wiper speed based on the amount of precipitation.
Headlights with Wipers On Off
9
414 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether or you would like to retract the park brakes to allow brake system service.
Lights
NOTE:

Headlight Off Delay – +
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the
vehicle.
Headlight Illumination On Approach – +
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the key fob.
MULTIMEDIA 415

NOTE:
When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights turn on approximately 10 seconds after
the wipers are turned on. The headlights also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Light” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of
the vehicle purchase.
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be
9
416 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks

NOTE:

Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature
may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
MULTIMEDIA 417

Remote Door Unlock Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
 When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver's door unlocks on the first press of the key fob unlock button.
You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors.
 When “All Doors” is programmed, all of the doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
 If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped.
If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.
 With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than once only results in the driver’s door
opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob On Off
NOTE:
 The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
 The seats return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to on) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
9
418 MULTIMEDIA
Power Side Steps — If Equipped

After pressing the Power Side Steps button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Power Side Steps Automatic Stow
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

After pressing the Auto Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
Off Remote Start All Starts
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected, the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel
will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
MULTIMEDIA 419
Engine Off Options

NOTE:

Engine Off Power Delay – +
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay – +
NOTE:
vehicle.
Easy Exit Seat On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
9
420 MULTIMEDIA
Air Suspension — If Equipped

After pressing the Air Suspension button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

NOTE:
When the “Sound Horn With Lower” feature is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the key fob remote lower button is pushed.
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lower” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the key fob remote lower button is pressed twice.
This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lower feature selected.
Display Suspension Messages All Warnings Only
Aero Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Automatic Aero Mode” feature is selected, the Ride Height will automatically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed.
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire.
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system lowers and then disables to assist with flatbed towing.
MULTIMEDIA 421

NOTE:
Before performing a wheel alignment, the “Wheel Alignment Mode” must be enabled. Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.
Four Corner Air Suspension Modes Tire Jack Mode Transport Mode Wheel Alignment Mode
NOTE:
There are three air suspension modes designed to protect the system in unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in changing a spare tire.
Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flatbed towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before performing a wheel alignment. Refer
to an authorized dealer for information.
Trailer
After pressing the Trailer button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Trailer Name List of Trailer Names Available 9
NOTE:
422 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
NOTE:

Balance/Fade Front Rear Left Right
NOTE:
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
Auto Play On Off
MULTIMEDIA 423
Phone/Bluetooth® Settings
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto Reply Message (custom, default) and
Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones and Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio Sources Settings system. For further
information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
9
424 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:

Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the twelve presets, so you can
enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not
even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning.
This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
NOTE:
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
MULTIMEDIA 425
System Information — If Equipped

After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “Software License” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
Reset — If Equipped
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Reset App Drawer OK Cancel
9
426 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings To Default

After pressing the Restore Settings To Default button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it resets clock, audio, and other features to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data

After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it removes all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
MULTIMEDIA 427
UCONNECT 4C NAV W ITH 12- INCH 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
DISPLAY S ETTINGS 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate the desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting until a check mark appears next to the
Press the Settings button on the touchscreen to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
display the Settings menu screen. In this mode Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
the Uconnect system allows you to access button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
programmable features that may be equipped menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to
such as Language, Display, Units, Voice Settings, close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
Clock & Date, Camera, Safety & Driving Assistance, Down Arrow button on the touchscreen on the right
Mirrors & Wipers, Brakes, Lights, Doors & Locks, side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start (if equipped), down through the list of available settings.
Engine Off Options, Suspension (if equipped),
Trailer, Audio, Bluetooth®, SiriusXM® Setup
(if equipped), and Reset.
NOTE:
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display Buttons On The

Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
428 MULTIMEDIA
Language
NOTE:

Language English (US) Español Français
NOTE:
When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English (US) / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including
the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, and then press the desired language button on
Display
NOTE:

Display Brightness Mode Auto Manual
NOTE:
Select Auto or Manual display mode and this allows adjustment of overall screen brightness.
Display Brightness Headlight ON - +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party"
MULTIMEDIA 429

Display Brightness Headlight OFF - +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party"
Set Theme Pre-configured Themes
Controls Screen Time-Out On Off
Fuel Saver Display On Off
NOTE:
When selected, the system displays fuel saver mode in the instrument cluster.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed in Cluster On Off
Phone Pop-Ups Displays In Cluster On Off
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups On Off
9
430 MULTIMEDIA
Units — If Equipped
After pressing Units on the touchscreen, the following will be available:
NOTE:

NOTE:
When the “Custom” setting is selected, units will appear according to your personally configured settings. To configure these settings, press the “Custom” bar.
The following settings will appear:
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Capacity Gal (US) Gal (UK) L
Pressure psi kPa bar
Temperature °F °C
MULTIMEDIA 431
Voice Settings
After pressing the Voice Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Show Command List Never w/Help Always
Clock & Date

After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Sync Time With GPS On Off
Set Time Hours + –
Set Time Minutes + –
AM PM
9
Time Format
12 hrs 24 hrs
Show Time in Status Bar On Off
432 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Surround View Camera Delay On Off
Surround View Camera Guidelines On Off
Parkview Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
Camera Active Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the
vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Camera Fixed Guidelines On Off
MULTIMEDIA 433
Safety & Driving Assistance

After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Forward Collision Warning Off Warning Only Warning & Active Braking
NOTE:
Applies brakes to slow the vehicle in case of potential forward collision, or applies brakes and a warning chime.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity Near Med Far
NOTE:
Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.
NOTE:
Sets what distance the steering wheel provides feedback for potential lane departures.
ParkSense Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph 9
(11 km/h).
Front ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
434 MULTIMEDIA

Rear ParkSense Braking Assist On Off
NOTE:
Brakes the vehicle while in reverse if potential rear collision is detected.
Blind Spot Alert Off Lights Lights & Chime
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert Auto Max (39.5 feet)
NOTE:
Auto detects the length of the trailer. Max sets all trailers to 39.5 ft (12 m).
Power Side Step Auto Store
Tire Fill Assist On Off
Mirrors & Wipers

After pressing the Mirror & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the
transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE .
MULTIMEDIA 435

NOTE:
Automatically adjusts the wiper speed based on the amount of precipitation.
Headlights with Wipers On Off
Brakes
After pressing the Brake button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether or you would like to retract the park brakes to allow brake system service.
9
436 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
NOTE:

Headlight Off Delay - +
NOTE:
vehicle.
Headlight Illumination On Approach – +
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the key fob.
NOTE:
When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights turn on approximately 10 seconds after
the wipers are turned on. The headlights also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchase.
MULTIMEDIA 437

Steering Directed Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Steering Directed Lights” feature is selected, the headlights turn with the direction of the steering wheel.
Flash Lights with Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be
Doors & Locks

NOTE:

Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and 9
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature
may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
438 MULTIMEDIA

1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
 When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver's door unlocks on the first press of the key fob unlock button. You must
push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors.
 When “All Doors” is programmed, all of the doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
 If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped.
If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door unlocks when the driver’s door is grasped.
 With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than once only results in the driver’s door
opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob On Off
NOTE:
 The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
 The seats return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to on) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
MULTIMEDIA 439
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start Systems — If Equipped

After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start Systems button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented Seat &
Off Remote Start All Starts
Steering Wheel
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented Seat & Steering Wheel” feature is selected, the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically
turn on when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
Engine Off Options

NOTE:

Easy Exit Seat On Off
9
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
Engine Off Power Delay + –
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
440 MULTIMEDIA

Headlight Off Delay + –
NOTE:
vehicle.
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the Suspension button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

NOTE:
When the “Sound Horn With Lower” feature is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the key fob remote lower button is pushed.
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lower” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the key fob remote lower button is pressed twice.
This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn With Lower feature selected.
Display Suspension Messages All Warning Only
Aero Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Aero Mode” feature is selected, the Ride Height will automatically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed.
MULTIMEDIA 441

NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire.
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system lowers and then disables to assist with flatbed towing.
NOTE:
Before performing a wheel alignment, the “Wheel Alignment Mode” must be enabled. Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.
Four Corner Air Suspension Modes Tire Jack Mode Transport Mode Wheel Alignment Mode
NOTE:
There are three air suspension modes designed to protect the system in unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in changing a spare tire.
Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flatbed towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before performing a wheel alignment.
Refer to an authorized dealer for information.
9
442 MULTIMEDIA
Trailer
After pressing the Trailer button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Trailer Name List of Trailer Names Available
NOTE:
Audio
NOTE:

Balance/Fade Front Right Back Left
NOTE:
MULTIMEDIA 443

Equalizer + –
NOTE:
NOTE:
Loudness On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” features improves sound quality at lower volumes.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Auto Play On Off
9
444 MULTIMEDIA
Bluetooth®
After pressing the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Phone Pop-Ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto Reply Message (custom, default), and
Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones and Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Sources” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio Sources Settings system. For further
information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Projection Manager Smartphone Device Mirroring On Smartphone Device Mirroring Off
Enable CarPlay Projections On Off
Automatically Display Pop-Ups in Cluster On Off
Set as Default Device On Off
MULTIMEDIA 445

NOTE:

Sirius All Access Choose a Subscription Package
Add Listener Add up to five profiles
NOTE:
The “Add Listener” feature allows you to add up to five different profiles for customizing personal music or satellite radio choices.
Listener Items Listening History List Of Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you can enjoy
the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even
realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning.
This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
9
446 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Reset App Drawer To Default Order Yes Cancel
Restore Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it resets all settings to their default settings.
MULTIMEDIA 447

Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it removes all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.

Clear SiriusXM® Data Yes Cancel
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
 Read all instructions in this manual carefully
SAFETY GUIDELINES Please read and follow these safety precautions. before using your system to ensure proper
Failure to do so may result in injury or property usage.
WARNING! damage.
 The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
 Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. tronic device. Do not let young children use the
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and If prolonged viewing of the screen is required, system.
assume all risks related to the use of the park in a safe location and set the parking brake.
 Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
Uconnect features and applications in this  Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. your music or the system at loud volumes.
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to Exercise caution when setting the volume on the
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident the product. Return it to an authorized dealer for system.
involving serious injury or death. repair.
 Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture 9
 Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a away from the system. Besides damage to the
Ensure that all persons read this manual carefully level that still allows you to hear outside traffic system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
before using the system. It contains instructions on and emergency vehicles. with any electronic device.
how to use the system in a safe and effective
manner.
448 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:  If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened 2 — COMPASS

Many features of this system are speed with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to
dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu- display the current direction of the vehicle.
use some of the touchscreen features while the tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
manufacturer's precautions and directions. 3 — SETTINGS
vehicle is in motion.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate to
The internal wireless radio operates within UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY display the customer programmable features.
guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards 4 — MORE
and recommendations, which reflect the consensus
I NTRODUCTION Push the MORE button on the faceplate to access
of the scientific community. The radio manufacturer additional options.
believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by 5 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL
consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less
than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or
or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you tune to a radio station.
are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask 6 — SCREEN OFF
for authorization before turning on the wireless Push the SCREEN OFF button to turn the
radio. touchscreen off. To turn the touchscreen back on,
Care And Maintenance press the screen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Touchscreen 7 — MUTE
1 — RADIO
 Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or Push the MUTE button to turn off the audio of the radio
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to enter Radio system. Press it again to turn the audio back on.
which could scratch the touchscreen surface! Mode. The different tuner modes, FM/AM/SXM
8 — VOLUME/POWER
(if equipped), can be selected by pressing the
 Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in Radio Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the Volume. Push
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry Mode. the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the system ON
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean or OFF.
the touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA 449
9 — PHONE 7 — AM/FM/SXM Seek Functions

Push the PHONE button on the faceplate to access 8 — Seek Down Seek Up
the Uconnect Phone feature.
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
10 — MEDIA The radio is equipped with the following modes: touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable
Pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate will allow  FM station or channel.
you to switch to Media mode: CD (if equipped), USB,  AM During a Seek Up function, if the radio reaches the
AUX, and Bluetooth®. starting station after passing through the entire
 SiriusXM® Radio – If Equipped
band two times, the radio will stop at the station
RADIO MODE Push the RADIO button on the faceplate, to enter the where it began.
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes – FM/AM/SXM
Operating Radio Mode Fast Seek Up
(if equipped) – can then be selected by pressing the
corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in the Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
Radio mode. touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate. The
VOLUME/POWER Knob radio stops at the next available station or channel
Rotate the VOLUME/POWER rotary knob to adjust when the button on the touchscreen is released.
the Volume. When the audio system is turned on, Seek Down
the sound will be set at the same volume level as
last played. Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable
Push the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the station or channel.
system on or off.
During a Seek Down function, if the radio reaches
Radio Mode MUTE Button the starting station after passing through the entire
Push the MUTE button to mute the system. Push band two times, the radio will stop at the station
9
1 — Station Presets
the MUTE button again to unmute the system. where it began.
2 — All Presets
3 — Seek Up TUNE/SCROLL Control
4 — Audio Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
5 — Info clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
6 — Tune
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
450 MULTIMEDIA
Fast Seek Down SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold Setting Presets
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the separately after the trial included with the new vehicle
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes and
touchscreen to advance the radio through the purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the
are activated by pressing any of the four Preset
available stations or channels at a faster rate. The end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will
buttons on the touchscreen, located at the top of
radio stops at the next available station or channel automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until
the screen.
when the button on the touchscreen is released. you call SiriusXM® at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel.
See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Direct Tune Functions terms at www.siriusxm.com (US Residents) or commit into memory, press and hold the desired
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen to www.siriusxm.ca (Canadian Residents). All fees and numbered button on the touchscreen for more than
directly tune to a specific radio station. A keypad programming subject to change. Our satellite service two seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
will appear. On the keypad, enter in your desired is available only to those at least 18 and older in the The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
radio station, and the system will automatically 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service Radio modes. Four presets are visible at the top of
tune to it. is also available in Puerto Rico (with coverage the radio screen.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — limitations). Our Internet radio service is available Audio Settings
throughout our satellite service area and in Alaska
If Equipped and Hawaii. © 2021 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® 1. Push the SETTINGS button on the right side of
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct and all related marks and logos are trademarks of the radio faceplate. If the settings button is
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to SiriusXM® Radio Inc. not present, push the MORE button on the
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content. faceplate, then the Settings button on the
This functionality is only available for radios touchscreen.
SiriusXM® is a subscription based service. equipped with a Satellite receiver. To receive
Get over 160 channels on your satellite radio, satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with 2. Scroll down and press the Audio button on the
and enjoy all you want, all in one place. Hear a clear view to the sky. touchscreen to open the Audio menu.
commercial-free music, sports, news, talk, and If the screen displays Acquiring Signal, you may 3. The Audio Menu shows the following options
entertainment. Get all the premium programming, need to change the vehicle’s position to receive a for you to customize your audio settings:
including Howard Stern, every NFL® game, every signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does not  Auto Play — Press the Auto Play button on the
MLB®, every NHL® game, every NASCAR® race, receive a signal in underground parking garages or touchscreen to select between ON or OFF.
Martha Stewart, Oprah Radio, and more. Get 20+ tunnels. This feature determines if music automati-
extra channels, including SiriusXM® Latino, offering
cally starts playing from a device when it is
20 channels of commercial-free music, news, talk,
first connected to the Media hub’s USB port.
comedy, sports, and more dedicated to Spanish
language programming.
MULTIMEDIA 451
 Equalizer — Press the Equalizer button on  Loudness — Press the Loudness button on MEDIA M ODE
the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and the touchscreen to select the Loudness
Treble. Use the + or – buttons on the touch- feature. When this feature is activated, it Operating Media Mode
screen to adjust the equalizer to your improves sound quality at lower volumes.
desired settings. Press the Back Arrow
button on the touchscreen when done. Clock Settings
 Balance/Fade — Press the Balance/Fade 1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate,
button on the touchscreen to adjust the or push the MORE button on the faceplate,
sound from the speakers. Use the Arrow and then the SETTINGS button on the
button on the touchscreen to adjust the touchscreen.
sound level from the front and rear or right 2. Select the Clock and Date button on the
and left side speakers. Press the Center C touchscreen.
button on the touchscreen to reset the
balance and fade to the factory setting. 3. Next, select Set Time to change the time.
Press the Back Arrow button on the 4. Select Set Date to change the date. Media Mode
touchscreen when done. 5. To set the time, select the Seek Up or Seek 1 — Seek Down
 Speed Adjust Volume — Press the Speed Down arrows as appropriate. Select “12 hrs vs 2 — Seek Up
Adjusted Volume button on the touchscreen 24 hrs”, “AM” or “PM” or select the “Time
3 — Additional Functions
to select between OFF, 1, 2 or 3. This will Zones” (if equipped).
4 — Info
decrease the radio volume relative to a 6. Select the Done button when complete.
decrease in vehicle speed. Press the Back 5 — Pause/Play
Arrow button on the touchscreen when done. 6 — Source
7 — Browse
9
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
452 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Source Selection Fast Seek Up Track Info

Once in Media Mode, press the Source button on Press and hold the Seek Up button on the Press the Info button on the touchscreen to display
the touchscreen and the desired mode button on touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to the current track information. Press the X button
the touchscreen. Disc (if equipped), USB, SD Card fast forward through the current track until the on the touchscreen to cancel this feature.
(if equipped), AUX and Bluetooth® (if equipped), button on the touchscreen is released.
Audio
are the Media sources available. When available, Fast Seek Down
you can select the Browse button on the Refer to “Audio Settings” for the adjustable audio
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the settings.
touchscreen to be given these options:
touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to
 Now Playing rewind through the current track until the button USB/iPod® Mode
 Artists on the touchscreen is released. USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting a
USB Jump Drive or iPod® cable into the USB port,
 Albums Track Selection (Browse)
or by pushing the MEDIA button located on the
 Genres Rotate the Browse button on the touchscreen to faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the Source
 Songs scroll through and select a desired track on the button on the touchscreen, and select the
iPod®, MP3 player, phone, or USB. Press the Exit USB/iPod® button.
 Playlists button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel the
Inserting USB/iPod® Device
 Folders Browse function.
Gently insert the USB/iPod® device into the USB
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info Repeat Port. If you insert a USB/iPod® device with the
button on the touchscreen for artist information on
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to repeat ignition ON, the unit will switch to USB/iPod®
the current song playing.
the song selection. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat mode and begin to play when you insert the device.
Seek Up/Seek Down Functions button on the touchscreen a second time. The display will show the track number and index
Seek Up /Seek Down Shuffle time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the
start of track 1.
Press and release the Seek Up button on the Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen
touchscreen for the next selection. Press and to play the selections on the USB/iPod® or
release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen Bluetooth® device in random order to provide an
to return to the beginning of the current selection, interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
or return to the beginning of the previous selection button on the touchscreen a second time to turn
if the track is within the first few seconds of the this feature off.
current selection.
MULTIMEDIA 453
Browse NOTE: PHONE MODE

Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to For mobile phone compatibility and pairing instruc-
select Artist, Albums, Genres, Songs, Playlists or tions, please visit UconnectPhone.com. Operating Phone Mode
Folders from the USB/iPod® device. Once the AUX Mode
desired selection is made you can chose from the
AUX Mode is entered by inserting a AUX device
available media by pressing the button on the
using a stereo cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into
touchscreen. Press the Exit button on the
the AUX port or by pushing the MEDIA button
touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse
located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
function.
press the Source button on the touchscreen, and
Bluetooth® Mode select the AUX button.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Bluetooth® Inserting Auxiliary Device
Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the AUX
containing music to the Uconnect system. Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with the
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be ignition on, the unit will switch to AUX mode and Phone Mode
paired with the Uconnect Phone to communicate begin to play when you insert the device cable. 1 — Call/Redial/Hold
with the Uconnect system. Controlling The Auxiliary Device 2 — Phone Signal Strength
Refer to Phone Mode section for pairing The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting 3 — Paired Phone
procedure. playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be 4 — Phone Battery Life
Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the provided by the radio; use the device controls 5 — Mute Microphone
Uconnect system, push the MEDIA button located instead. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME rotary
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the knob or with the volume of the attached device.
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings
Source button on the touchscreen and select the The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio 9
Bluetooth® button. 8 — Text Messaging
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too 9 — Direct Dial Pad
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the 10 — Recent Call Log
radio unit to play the music on the device. 11 — Browse Phone Book
12 — End Call
454 MULTIMEDIA
The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, Main Functions Connecting/Disconnecting A Mobile

hands-free, in-vehicle communications system Phone Or Bluetooth® Device
The buttons on the display can be used to:
with voice command capability. Refer to Voice
Recognition (VR) within this publication for further  Compose phone numbers using the graphic
PAIRING A PHONE
information. keypad on the display.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair
The Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone  Display and call the contacts in the mobile
your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled mobile
number with your mobile phone using simple voice phone phonebook.
phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of
commands.  Display and call contacts from the Recent Calls establishing a wireless connection between a
NOTE: menu. cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone  Pair up to 10 phones/audio devices to make To complete the pairing process, you need to
equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Profile. access and connection easier and quicker. reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual.
To check mobile phone compatibility, please visit  Transfer calls from the system to the mobile Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
UconnectPhone.com. phone and vice versa. mobile phone compatibility information.
For Uconnect customer support:  Deactivate the microphone audio for privacy. NOTE:
 US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or The mobile phone audio is transmitted through the  You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
call 1-877-855-8400 vehicle’s audio system. The system automatically phone to complete this procedure.
 Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com mutes the radio when the Phone function is used.  The vehicle must be in PARK.
or call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
1-800-387-9983 (French)
position.
Phone Mode Activation 2. Push the PHONE button on the faceplate.
Press the PHONE button on the front panel to  If there are no phones currently connected
activate the Phone mode. with the system, a pop-up appears asking if
you would like to pair a mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
MULTIMEDIA 455
4. Search for available devices on your  Search for available devices on your NOTE:
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see below). Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
 Press the Settings button on your mobile When prompted on the phone, select system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
phone. “Uconnect” and accept the connection request. connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress pairing process. However, first, make sure to
 Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled.
screen while the system is connecting. delete the device from the list of phones on your
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
search for Bluetooth® connections. 6. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
system, select “Uconnect.” Bluetooth® settings.
7. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect Phone. STORING NAMES/NUMBERS IN THE MOBILE
 Some mobile phones will require you to PHONE
enter the PIN. Before pairing your mobile phone, you must make
8. When the pairing process has successfully sure you have stored the names you want to
completed, the system will prompt you to choose contact in the phonebook on your mobile phone,
whether or not this is your favorite phone. so you can call them using the vehicle's hands-free
Selecting the “Yes” button will make this phone the system.
highest priority. This phone will take precedence If your phonebook does not contain any names,
Pairing A Phone over other paired phones within range and will enter new names for the most frequently used
connect to the Uconnect system automatically numbers.
If “No” is selected and you still would like to when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone For further details, consult your mobile phone
pair a mobile phone, press the Settings but- and/or one Bluetooth® audio device can be owner's handbook.
ton from the Uconnect Phone main screen. connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If the
“No” button is selected, simply select “Uconnect” NOTE: 9
 Select the Paired Phones button, and then from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® The names in the phonebook which do not contain
press the Add Device button on the touchscreen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to phone numbers or where both fields (name and
screen. the Bluetooth® device. surname) are empty will not be displayed.
456 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTION Deletion Of A Mobile Phone Or A 5. Press the Make Favorite button.

The system connects automatically to the paired Bluetooth® Audio Device 6. The device selected is moved to the top of the
mobile phone with the highest priority. To delete a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio list.
To choose a specific mobile phone or Bluetooth® device from a list, proceed as follows:
audio device, proceed as follows:
Downloading A Phonebook From Your
1. Access the Settings menu.
Mobile Phone
1. Access the Settings menu. 2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
If equipped and specifically supported by your
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button. 3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list phone, Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list using the corresponding button on the display. download names (text names) and number entries
using the corresponding button on the display. 4. Select the device (mobile phone or Bluetooth® from your mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or device). Bluetooth® enabled phones with Phonebook
Bluetooth® device). 5. Press the Delete Device button. Access Profile may support this feature. See
UconnectPhone.com for supported phones.
5. Press the Connect button. 6. A confirmation screen will appear on the
display: If equipped and specifically supported by your
6. During the connection stage, a screen is displayed
phone, Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to
showing the progress of the operation.  Press the Yes button to delete the device. download names (text names) and number entries
7. The device connected is highlighted in the list.  Press the No button to cancel the operation. from your mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific
Bluetooth®-enabled phones with Phonebook
DISCONNECTION Setting A Mobile Phone Or A Bluetooth® Access Profile may support this feature.
To disconnect a specific mobile phone or Audio Device As A Favorite NOTE:
Bluetooth® audio device, proceed as follows:
To set a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio device  If supported, the download and update begins
1. Access the Settings menu. as a favorite, proceed as follows: as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button. 1. Access the Settings menu. connection is made to the Uconnect Phone.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list For example, after you start the vehicle. You
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
using the corresponding button on the display. may be asked for permission to initiate the
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list phonebook download.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or using the corresponding button on the display.
Bluetooth® device).
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
5. Press the Disconnect button. Bluetooth® device).
MULTIMEDIA 457
 A maximum of 2,000 contact names with six Making A Phone Call Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
numbers per contact will be downloaded and Progress
Dialing The Phone Number Using The "Keyboard"
updated every time a phone is connected to the When a phone conversation is active, a second
Icon On The Display
Uconnect Phone. phone call can be made as follows:
Enter the phone number using the graphic keypad
 Depending on the maximum number of entries  Select the number/contact from the list of
displayed.
downloaded, there may be a short delay before recent calls.
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until Proceed as follows:
then, if available, the previously downloaded  Select the contact from the phonebook.
1. Press the Keyboard icon on the display and
phonebook is available for use. use the number buttons to enter the number.  Press the Hold button and dial the number using
 Only the phonebook of the currently connected 2. Press the Call button to make a call. the graphic keyboard of the display.
mobile phone is accessible. Redial
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Or Phone To call the number/contact of last call made, press
 Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is down-
Number the Redial button.
loaded. SIM card phonebook is not part of the
mobile phonebook. 1. Push the PHONE button on the steering wheel.
Answering An Incoming Call
 This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or 2. After the beep, say “dial” (or “call” a full name
Call Controls
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only or phone number).
be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are The buttons on the display allow the following
transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on Recent Calls phone call functions to be managed:
the next phone connection. The list of the last calls made for each of the  Answer
Deletion Of Phone Data (Phonebook And following call types can be displayed:  End
Recent Calls)  Calls received  Ignore
Select "Delete Phone Data" on the display to delete  Calls made  Put on hold/resume 9
the list of recent calls and the phonebook copy.  Calls without a reply  Deactivate/activate the microphone
 All calls  Transfer the call
To access these types of calls, press the Recent  Switch from one call to the other
Calls button on the Phone menu main screen.
 Conference/merge two active calls
458 MULTIMEDIA
Answering Or Ignoring A Call With No Call Currently Transferring/Call Continuation Uconnect Phone Features
In Progress
Transferring
When an incoming call rings or is announced on MUTE/UNMUTE
The ongoing calls can be transferred from the
the Uconnect system, push the Answer button on 1. During a call, push the VOICE COMMAND
mobile phone to the system and vice versa without
the touchscreen, or push the PHONE button on the button on the steering wheel.
ending the call.
steering wheel. 2. After the beep, say “mute” or “mute off”.
To transfer the call, press the Transfer button.
Answering Or Ignoring An Incoming Call With A Call
Currently In Progress Call Continuation READING MESSAGES
When an incoming call rings or is announced on After the engine is switched off, it is still possible to The system can read the messages received by the
the Uconnect system, push the Answer button on continue a phone call. mobile phone.
the touchscreen, or push the PHONE button on the The call continues until it is ended manually or for To use this function, the mobile phone must
steering wheel to answer the call and put the a maximum period of about 20 minutes. support the SMS exchange function via
ongoing call on hold. When the system is switched off, the call is Bluetooth®.
NOTE: transferred to the mobile phone. If this function is not supported by the phone, the
Not all mobile phones may support the corresponding message button is deactivated
Ending A Call
management of an incoming call when another (greyed out) or may only accept incoming
phone conversation is active. Press the End button on the touchscreen or the
messages.
PHONE button on the steering wheel controls to
Managing Two Phone Calls end a call in progress. When a text message is received, the display will
If two calls are in progress (one active and one show a screen where the options "Listen", "Call" or
Only the ongoing call is ended and any call on hold
on hold), it is possible to switch between them "Ignore" can be selected.
becomes the new active call.
pressing the Call On Hold button or to merge the Press the Message button to access the list of SMS
two calls in a conference pressing the Merge Calls Depending on the type of mobile phone, if the
messages received by the mobile phone. The list
button. ongoing call is ended by the caller, the call on hold
displays a maximum of 60 messages received.
may not be activated automatically.
NOTE:
Check whether the mobile phone in use supports
the management of a second call and the
"Conference" mode.
MULTIMEDIA 459
BROWSING SMS The right-hand control is a rocker type switch with NOTE:
a push button in the center. Pushing the top of the While In Media Mode, the center button on the left
Using the steering wheel commands, you can view
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the rocker switch is nonfunctional.
and manage the last 10 SMS messages received
bottom of the switch will decrease the volume.
on the instrument panel. To use this function, the
mobile phone must support the SMS exchange Pushing the center button will make the radio IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
function through Bluetooth®. switch between the various modes available Located on the center stack, just below the
(AM/FM/SXM or Media etc.). instrument panel, is the main media hub. There
Select the PHONE button on the instrument panel
menu, and then select “SMS Reader” using the The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with a are four total USB Ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C)
arrow keys on the steering wheel controls. push button in the center. The function of the left and two Standard USBs (Type A). There is also an
hand control is different depending on which mode AUX Port located in the middle of the USB Ports.
The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last
you are in. Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port may
10 SMS messages to be displayed.
The following describes the left-hand control activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — operation in each mode. features, if equipped. For further information, refer
to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in your
IF EQUIPPED RADIO OPERATION Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
The remote sound system controls are located on The button located in the center of the left-hand NOTE:
the back surface of the steering wheel. Reach control will tune to the next preset station that you Two devices can be plugged in at the same time,
behind the wheel to access the switches. have programmed in the radio preset button. and both ports will provide charging capabilities.
Only one port can transfer data to the system at a
MEDIA M ODE time. A pop-up will appear and allow you to select
Pushing the top of the right-hand switch once the device transferring data.
will go to the next track on the selected media
(AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the 9
right-hand switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous
track if it is within eight seconds after the current
track begins to play.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls

460 MULTIMEDIA
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A Applicable to Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch
USB port and another device is plugged into the Display and Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display
Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow radios, different scenarios are listed below when a
you to select which device to use. non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and
larger USB Ports, and when a phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB Ports:
 “A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
 “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
Rear Center Console Mini-USB (Type C) USB Ports
 “Another device is in use through the same USB
1 — Mini-USB Type C Port #1 port. Please disconnect the first device to use
2 — Mini-USB Type C Port #2 the second device”.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
1 — Standard USB Type A Port #1
2 — AUX Port If equipped, your vehicle may also contain a USB
Port located on the top tray of the vehicles center
console.
If equipped, two Mini-USB Ports (Type C), two
A third and fourth USB Ports are located behind the Standard USB Ports (Type A), and one AUX Port
center console, above the Power Inverter. These may be located to the left of the center stack, just
USBs Ports are charge only. below the climate controls.
Rear Center Console Standard (Type A) USB Ports

MULTIMEDIA 461
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being The level of energy emitted is far less than the
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
performance from your radio. This condition may be devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile of wireless radios may be restricted in some
phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to situations or environments, such as aboard
the radio. If your radio performance does not airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume on the wireless radio.
be turned down or off during mobile phone operation The following regulatory statement applies to all
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
when not using Uconnect (if equipped). Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
1 — Standard USB Type A Ports
2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports
REGULATORY AND SAFETY vehicle:
3 — AUX Port I NFORMATION This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
US/CANADA Development Canada license-exempt RSS
Some USB ports support media and charging. You Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
can use features, such as Apple CarPlay®, Android two conditions:
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
Auto™, Pandora®, and others while charging your 1. This device may not cause harmful
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
phone. interference, and
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
NOTE: will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in 2. This device must accept any interference
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may (20 cm) or further from the human body. received, including interference that may
cause the connection to a previous device to be The internal wireless radio operates within cause undesired operation. 9
lost. guidelines found in radio frequency safety
For further information, refer to the Uconnect standards and recommendations, which reflect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or visit the consensus of the scientific community.
UconnectPhone.com.
462 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE: UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
 This equipment has been tested and found to
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, I NTRODUCING U CONNECT
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
conditions suivantes: are designed to provide reasonable protection Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et against harmful interference in a residential these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
installation. This equipment generates, uses and Commands and tips you need to know to control
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout your Uconnect system.
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre installed and used in accordance with the instruc- If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the
le fonctionnement. tions, may cause harmful interference to radio Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have the
communications. However, there is no guarantee Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display or the
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las that interference will not occur in a particular Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display system.
siguientes dos condiciones: installation. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C With 8.4-inch
 If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
Display system.
cause interferencia perjudicial y ence to radio or television reception, which can GET S TARTED
be determined by turning the equipment off and
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar All you need to control your Uconnect system with
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
interference by one or more of the following
measures: 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
NOTE: a. Increase the separation between the equip- device and feature compatibility and to find
Changes or modifications not expressly approved ment and receiver. phone pairing instructions.
by the party responsible for compliance could void 2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
the user’s authority to operate the equipment. b. Consult an authorized dealer or an experi- passenger conversations are examples of
enced radio technician for help. noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The microphone is
located in the headliner and aimed at the
driver.
MULTIMEDIA 463
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you

must first push either the VR or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice
Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button
and saying a Voice Command from current
category.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS

Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
 “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the
top of the touchscreen for the Uconnect 3 and
above the main menu bar for Uconnect 4/4C/4C
9
Nav radios.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display
464 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO  “Change source to USB”. TIP:

 “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre button and say “Call,” then pronounce the
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
Classical”. name exactly as it appears in your phone book.
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
TIP: When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you
Satellite Radio trial required.)
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see can say “Call John Smith work, home, cell, etc.”
Push the VR button . After the beep, say: all of the music on your USB device. Your Voice VOICE T EXT R EPLY
 “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”. Command must match exactly how the artist,
album, song and genre information is displayed. Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
 “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”.
Push the VR button or Phone button (if
TIP: PHONE enabled) and say “Listen.” (Must have compatible
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button 1. Once an incoming text message is read to
button and say “Help.” The system provides you is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system
with a list of commands. you, push the VR button or Phone button
is ready to make a phone call. You may have to
wait for a few more moments to issue a Voice (if enabled). After the beep, say: “Reply.”
MEDIA
Command for hands-free calling. Check 2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth® UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages
and auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is compatibility and pairing instructions. and follow the system prompts.
only available for connected USB and AUX devices.
(Remote CD player optional and not available on all Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
vehicles.) of the following commands: RESPONSES
 “Call John Smith” Stuck in
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of Yes. See you later.
the following commands and follow the prompts to  “Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system traffic.
switch your media source or choose an artist. prompts” Start without
No. I’ll be late.
 “Change source to Bluetooth®”.  “Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)” me.
 “Change source to AUX”.  “Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
MULTIMEDIA 465
TIP: TIP:
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone®, To start a POI search, push the VR button . After
RESPONSES but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee shop.”
Where are I will be 5 <or you can use your voice to send a text message.
Okay. SIRI® EYES FREE — IF EQUIPPED
you? 10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45, CLIMATE
Are you there Available on iPhone® 5 or later.
Call me. 60> minutes Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
yet? late. Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages,
everyone comfortable while you keep moving
schedule meetings, select media, place phone calls
I’ll call you I need See you in 5 ahead.
and much more. Siri uses your natural language to
later. directions. <or 10, 15, Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of understand what you mean and responds back to
20, 25, 30, the following commands: confirm your requests. The system is designed to
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right 45, 60> keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the
minutes.  “Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
now. wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
I’m lost. Thanks.  “Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
To begin, ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone®.
TIP: Pair your Siri enabled device to your Uconnect
NOTE: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to System. Push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering
system does not transpose the message. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated wheel. After you hear a double beep you can ask
seats or steering wheel if equipped. Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions,
TIP: NAVIGATION read text messages and many other useful
Your mobile phone must have the full implemen- requests.
tation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, time and become more productive when you know USING D O NOT DISTURB 9
visit UconnectPhone.com. exactly how to get to where you want to go. With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading 1. To enter a destination, push the VR button from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
incoming text messages only. For further . After the beep, say: “Find address 800 your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel.
information on how to enable this feature on your Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan” or For your convenience, there is a counter display to
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s® “User enter State. keep track of your missed calls and text messages
Manual”. while you were using Do Not Disturb.
2. Then follow the system prompts.
466 MULTIMEDIA
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to APPLE CARPLAY® — I F EQUIPPED
message, a call, or both, when declining an project your Android™-powered smartphone and a
incoming call and send it to voicemail. number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. NOTE:
Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher to one of the Feature availability depends on your carrier
Automatic reply messages can be:
media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
 “I am driving right now, I will get back to you cable, and press the new Android Auto™ icon that CarPlay® features may or may not be available in
shortly.” replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to every region and/or language.
 Create a custom auto reply message up to begin Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
160 characters. on the steering wheel, or press and hold the interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be “Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to activate recognition system, and use your smartphone to
selected so you can still place a second call Android’s™ VR, which recognizes natural voice project your iPhone® and many apps onto your
without being interrupted by incoming calls. commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s Uconnect touchscreen (smartphone’s data plan will
features: be used for certain apps). Connect your iPhone® 5
NOTE: or higher to one of the media USB ports, using the
 Maps Apple® factory-provided Lightning cable, and press
 Only the beginning of your custom message will
be seen on the touchscreen.  Music the new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
 Phone
Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
 Reply with text message is not compatible with CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button on the
iPhones®.  Text Messages steering wheel, or press and hold the Home button
 Auto reply with text message is only available on  Additional Apps within Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which
phones that supporting Bluetooth® MAP. recognizes natural voice commands to use certain
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual iPhone’s® features such as:
ANDROID AUTO™ — IF E QUIPPED Supplement for further information.
 Phone
NOTE:
NOTE:  Music
Requires compatible smartphone running
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
Android™ 6.0 or higher and download app on  Messages
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™
Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and Google  Maps
features may or may not be available in every
Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
region and/or language.  Additional Apps
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech Supplement for further information.
technology through your vehicle’s voice recognition
MULTIMEDIA 467
NOTE: Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION

Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Development
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. © 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
user interface is a product of Apple®. Apple L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is suivantes: Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered in the US Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM®
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
and other countries. Apple® terms of use and and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
privacy statements apply.
Uconnect System Support:
GENERAL INFORMATION brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.  US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
The following regulatory statement applies to all call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las week)
vehicle: siguientes dos condiciones:  Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
with Innovation, Science, and Economic Development cause interferencia perjudicial y 1-800-387-9983 (French)
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
subject to the following two conditions:
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que  US residents visitwww.driveuconnect.com/
1. This device may not cause harmful pueda causar su operación no deseada.
interference, and sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
2. This device must accept any interference NOTE:  Canadian residents visit
received, including interference that may Changes or modifications not expressly approved https://www.driveuconnect.ca/en/
cause undesired operation. by the party responsible for compliance could void sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091
the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 9
468
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
FOR YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are information:
vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you
 Owner's name and address
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT to be happy with our products and services.
 Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have Warranty service must be done by an authorized
office)
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle  Authorized dealer name
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized  Vehicle delivery date and mileage
service history. This can often provide a clue to the dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
current problem. special tools, and the latest information to ensure the FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
P.O. Box 21–8004
PREPARE A L IST This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an resolved with this process. Phone: (866) 726-4636
accident or work done that is not on your  If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
maintenance log, let the service advisor know. to the general manager or owner of the autho-
rized dealer. They want to know if you need P.O. Box 1621
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS assistance. Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
If you list a number of items and you must have your  If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation concern, you may contact the manufacturer's French
with the service advisor and list the items in order of customer center.
priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain
a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need
a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 469
I N M EXICO CONTACT Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
require assistance can use the special needs contract you may have purchased from another
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay please refer to the contract documents, and
Mexico, D. F.
Service operator. contact the person listed in those documents.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
SERVICE CONTRACT We appreciate that you have made a major
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568 investment when you purchased the vehicle.
You may have purchased a service contract for a An authorized dealer has also made a major
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of investment in facilities, tools, and training to
FCA Caribbean LLC unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
P.O. Box 191857 Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar Vehicle ownership experience.
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
San Juan 00919-1857 protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed WARNING!
Phone: (866) 726-4636 by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
Fax: (787) 782-3345 beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
only), some of its constituents, and certain
Mopar Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive Plan
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the
known to the State of California to cause cancer
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
If you have any questions about the service contract,
(TDD/TTY) call the manufacturer's Service Contract National
In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
the manufacturer has installed special TDD residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) 387-9983 French).
or other reproductive harm.
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or
speech impaired customer, who has access to a 10
TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
470 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236
See the Warranty Information for the terms
and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to WASHINGTON, D.C. www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
www.mopar.com/om for further information. NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
If you believe that your vehicle has a
See the Warranty Information for the terms and Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
defect that could cause a crash or cause
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties also obtain other information about motor
injury or death, you should immediately
applicable to this vehicle and market. vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
inform the National Highway Traffic
MOPAR® PARTS Safety Administration (NHTSA) in I N C ANADA
addition to notifying FCA US LLC. If you believe that your vehicle has a safety
Mopar original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it defect, you should contact the Customer
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your may open an investigation, and if it finds Service Department immediately. Canadian
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain that a safety defect exists in a group of customers who wish to report a safety
its original condition. vehicles, it may order a recall and defect to the Canadian government should
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
cannot become involved in individual Defect Investigations and Recalls at
problems between you, an authorized 1-800-333-0510 or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
dealer or FCA US LLC. Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 471
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals To order a hard copy of your Owner’s Information,
call Tech Authority toll free at:
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
To order the following manuals, you may use either charts and detailed illustrations. These practical  1-800-890-4038 (US)
the website or the phone numbers listed below. manuals make it easy for students and technicians to  1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Service Manuals find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to find Or
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven  www.techauthority.com (US)
maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the equipment.
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in Owner's Manuals
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
and charts. the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures as well
as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
To access your Owner’s Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
10
472
INDEX
A Air Cleaner, Engine Auto Down Power Windows ..............................64
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ............................. 338 Automatic Door Locks ......................................30
(Cruise Control) ..............................................227 Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 342 Automatic Headlights .......................................48
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............349 Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 342, 343 Automatic High Beams.....................................47
Adding Fuel .......................................... 263, 264 Air Conditioner System ................................. 342 Automatic Tailgate Release .............................71
Additives, Fuel ...............................................378 Air Conditioning......................................... 53, 62 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............62
Adjust Air Conditioning Filter ..............................64, 343 Automatic Transmission....................... 204, 354
Down ........................................................... 35 Air Conditioning System ...................................62 Adding Fluid .............................................. 354
Forward ....................................................... 35 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................63 Fluid And Filter Change............................. 354
Rearward..................................................... 35 Air Filter ........................................................ 338 Fluid Change............................................. 354
Up................................................................ 35 Air Pressure Fluid Level Check...................................... 353
Adjustable Pedals ............................................ 41 Tires ......................................................... 362 Fluid Type ...............................353, 386, 389
Air Bag Air Suspension ..................................... 213, 217 Special Additives ...................................... 353
Air Bag Operation ......................................161 Alarm Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode... 206
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 159, 162 Panic ...........................................................16 Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 138
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 169, 322 Security Alarm ....................................25, 120 Axle Fluid.....................................354, 386, 389
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................322 Alterations/Modifications Axle Lubrication ............................................ 354
Front Air Bag .............................................162 Vehicle.........................................................13
If Deployment Occurs ................................168 Android Auto ................................................. 466 B
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................166 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........349, 383, 384 Back-Up......................................................... 258
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............170 Disposal ................................................... 350 Back-Up Camera ........................................... 258
Maintenance .............................................170 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 131 Battery ................................................. 120, 336
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............160 Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 124 Charging System Light .............................. 120
Transporting Pets ......................................184 Apple CarPlay ................................................ 466 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................17
Air Bag Light ............................... 119, 159, 185 Assist, Hill Start............................................. 136 Battery Saver Feature ......................................50
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 390 Belts, Seat .................................................... 184
473
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................138 Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 356 Cooling Capacity .............................. 383, 384
Body Builders Guide ........................................ 11 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 350
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................346 Indicator Light) .............................................. 130 Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 349
B-Pillar Location.............................................359 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 184 Inspection ........................................ 350, 351
Brake Assist System ......................................132 Checks, Safety .............................................. 184 Points To Remember ................................ 351
Brake Control System ....................................132 Child Restraint .............................................. 170 Pressure Cap ............................................ 350
Brake Fluid ................................. 352, 386, 389 Child Restraints Radiator Cap............................................. 350
Brake System ...................................... 352, 376 Booster Seats ........................................... 173 Selection Of Coolant
Fluid Check ...............................................352 Child Seat Installation ..................... 179, 180 (Antifreeze) ............... 349, 383, 384, 387
Master Cylinder .........................................352 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 178 Corrosion Protection ..................................... 371
Parking ......................................................199 Infant And Child Restraints....................... 172 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...................... 227
Warning Light ............................................119 Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 177 Cruise Light ................................................... 128
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................203 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 175 Cupholders .......................................................82
Bulb Replacement .........................................291 Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 173 Customer Assistance .................................... 468
Bulbs, Light.......................................... 186, 291 Seating Positions ...................................... 174 Cybersecurity ................................................ 390
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 378
C Cleaning D
Camera ..........................................................258 Wheels ..................................................... 368 Daytime Running Lights ...................................47
Camera, Rear ...................................... 258, 260 Climate Control ................................................53 Dealer Service ............................................... 336
Capacities, Fuel ................................... 383, 384 Automatic ....................................................56 Defroster, Rear Window ...................................53
Caps, Filler Manual ........................................................53 Defroster, Windshield ............................ 53, 185
Oil (Engine) ............................. 331, 337, 338 Cold Weather Operation ............................... 190 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..............................52
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................350 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 366 Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................... 129
Car Washes ...................................................372 Contract, Service .......................................... 469 Diesel Fuel ........................................... 380, 387
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................. 184, 380 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 350 Diesel Fuel Requirements ............................. 380
Cargo Light ...................................................... 49 Cooling System ............................................. 348 Bulk Storage Of......................................... 265
Cellular Phone ...............................................461 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 349 Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .................... 341
Center High Mounted Stop Light ...................296 Coolant Level ..........................349, 350, 351 Differential, Limited Slip................................ 222 11
Center Seat Storage Compartment ................. 78 Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 320
Charge Air Cooler ...........................................352
474
Disposal Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 130 Exhaust System ................................... 184, 347
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................350 Engine........................................................... 331 Exterior Lighting ...............................................46
Do Not Disturb ...............................................465 Air Cleaner ................................................ 338 Exterior Lights ........................................ 46, 186
Door Ajar........................................................121 Block Heater .................................... 194, 198
Door Ajar Light ...............................................121 Break-In Recommendations ..................... 199 F
Door Locks Compartment ................331, 332, 333, 334 Filters
Automatic .................................................... 30 Compartment Air Cleaner ................................................ 338
Doors ............................................................... 26 Identification .............331, 332, 333, 334 Air Conditioning ................................. 64, 343
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ............340 Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................... 384, 387 Engine Fuel ............................................... 340
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 32 Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 184, 380 Engine Oil ...............................338, 384, 387
Driving Fails To Start ............................................ 190 Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 338
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Flooded, Starting ...................................... 190 Flashers
Standing Water .....................................284 Fuel Requirements .................377, 383, 384 Turn Signals .............................. 49, 127, 186
Dual Rear Wheels ..........................................376 Idling ........................................................ 196 Flash-To-Pass ...................................................48
Jump Starting ........................................... 314 Flat Tire Stowage .......................................... 312
E Oil ..................................337, 383, 384, 387 Fluid Capacities ................................... 383, 384
Electric Brake Control System .......................132 Oil Filler Cap ........................... 331, 337, 338 Fluid Leaks.................................................... 186
Anti-Lock Brake System.............................131 Oil Filter .................................................... 338 Fluid Level Checks
Electronic Roll Mitigation................. 132, 138 Oil Selection ........................... 337, 383, 384 Brake ........................................................ 352
Electric Parking Brake ...................................199 Oil Synthetic ............................................. 338 Fluid, Brake .......................................... 386, 389
Electrical Power Outlets ................................... 83 Overheating .............................................. 317 Fluids And Lubricants........................... 384, 387
Electronic Range Select (ERS) .......................207 Starting............................................ 188, 191 Fog Lights .............................................. 48, 294
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)......225 Engine Oil Viscosity ....................................... 337 Fold-Flat Seats .................................................32
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................133 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ............................. 337 Forward Collision Warning ............................ 145
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ......120 Enhanced Accident Response Four Wheel Drive........................................... 208
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case .... 208, 210 Feature ................................................ 169, 322 Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................. 286
Emergency, In Case Of Entry System, Illuminated ................................51 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................. 319
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck......................319 Ethanol ......................................................... 378 Front Axle (Differential) ................................. 354
Hazard Warning Flasher ............................286 Exhaust Gas Cautions .......................... 184, 380
Jump Starting ............................................314
475
Fuel ............................................ 264, 377, 380 H I

Adding ............................................. 263, 264 Hazard Ignition .............................................................19
Additives ...................................................378 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Switch ..........................................................19
Clean Air ....................................................378 Standing Water .................................... 284 Illuminated Entry ..............................................51
Ethanol ......................................................378 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 286 In Vehicle Help
Filter ..........................................................340 Head Restraints ...............................................38 Vehicle User Guide ......................................14
Gasoline ....................................................377 Head Rests ......................................................38 Inside Rearview Mirror ........................... 42, 286
Light ..........................................................123 Headlights .................................................... 293 Instrument Cluster ............................... 105, 108
Materials Added ........................................378 Cleaning ................................................... 371 Descriptions............................105, 108, 127
Methanol ...................................................378 High Beam ...................................................47 Display ...................................................... 108
Octane Rating ........................ 377, 378, 384 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........47 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 375
Requirements ............... 377, 380, 383, 384 Lights On Reminder .....................................48 Integrated Trailer Brake Control .................... 275
Specifications............................................381 Passing ........................................................48 Interior Appearance Care .............................. 374
Tank Capacity .................................. 383, 384 Switch ..........................................................46 Interior Lights ...................................................50
Fuses .............................................................296 Heated Mirrors.................................................45 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................52
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Intervention Regeneration Strategy ..... 114, 342
G Switch ..............................................................47 Introduction .....................................................10
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .................... 73 Hill Descent Control ...................................... 135 Inverter Outlet (115V) ......................................84
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................378 Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 135 iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................. 459
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................378 Hill Start Assist.............................................. 136
Gauges Hitches J
Voltage ......................................................195 Trailer Towing ........................................... 272 Jack Location ................................................ 305
Glass Cleaning ...............................................375 Hoisting......................................................... 355 Jump Starting ................................................ 314
Grocery Bag Retainer....................................... 38 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................73
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............................269 Hood Prop ........................................................70
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..........................269 Hood Release ..................................................70
Guide
Body Builders .............................................. 11 11
GVWR ............................................................268
476
K Lights ............................................................ 186 Security Alarm .......................................... 120

Key Fob Air Bag .................................... 119, 159, 185 Service ...................................................... 291
Panic Alarm ................................................. 16 Brake Assist Warning ............................... 134 Traction Control ........................................ 134
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 19, 24 Brake Warning .......................................... 119 Turn Signals ............49, 127, 186, 293, 295
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Bulb Replacement .................................... 291 Warning Instrument Cluster
Keyless Entry) .................................................. 17 Cargo ...........................................................49 Descriptions ................................ 120, 127
Key Fob Programming (Remote Center Mounted Stop ............................... 296 Limited-Slip Differential ....................... 222, 354
Keyless Entry) .................................................. 19 Courtesy/Reading .......................................50 Load Shed Battery Saver Mode..................... 117
Keyless Enter-N-Go ........................27, 187, 191 Cruise ....................................................... 128 Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 117
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ....... 397, 416, 437 Daytime Running .........................................47 Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 117
Passive Entry ............................................... 27 Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 117
Passive Entry Programming............. 416, 437 Indicator ............................................... 120 Loading Vehicle ............................................. 268
Keys................................................................. 15 Exterior ...............................................46, 186 Tires .......................................................... 359
Replacement ............................................... 24 Fog ........................................................... 294 Locks
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 286 Automatic Door ............................................30
L Headlights ............................................ 46, 48 Child Protection ...........................................30
Lane Change And Turn Signals ........................ 49 High Beam ...................................................47 Power Door ..................................................27
Lane Change Assist ......................................... 49 High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................47 Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 147
LaneSense ....................................................255 Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 135 Lubrication, Body .......................................... 346
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................154 Illuminated Entry .........................................51 Lug Nuts........................................................ 376
Latches ..........................................................186 Interior .........................................................50 Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 376
Hood ........................................................... 70 Lights On Reminder .....................................48
Lead Free Gasoline........................................377 Low Fuel ................................................... 123 M
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................186 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)....... 122 Maintenance .............................................67, 70
Life Of Tires ...................................................364 Park .......................................................... 127 Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 336
Light Bulbs ........................................... 186, 291 Passing ........................................................48 Maintenance Schedule ...............323, 327, 328
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 118 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .. 122
477
Manual Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 338 Passive Entry....................................................27

Service ......................................................471 Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 120 Pedals, Adjustable ...........................................41
Media Hub .....................................................459 Oil, Engine ...................................337, 384, 387 Pets ............................................................... 184
Memory Seat ................................................... 31 Capacity........................................... 383, 384 Pickup Box .......................................................87
Memory Settings ............................................. 31 Change Interval ........................................ 337 Pinch Protection ........................................67, 70
Methanol .......................................................378 Dipstick .................................................... 335 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 359
Mirrors ............................................................. 42 Disposal ................................................... 338 Power
Electric Powered ......................................... 43 Filter ....................................... 338, 384, 387 Distribution Center (Fuses) .............. 297, 301
Heated ........................................................ 45 Filter Disposal........................................... 338 Door Locks...................................................27
Memory ....................................................... 31 Identification Logo .................................... 337 Mirrors .........................................................43
Outside ........................................................ 43 Materials Added To .................................. 338 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)..........83, 84
Rearview ............................................42, 286 Pressure Warning Light ............................ 120 Seats ...........................................................35
Trailer Towing .............................................. 45 Recommendation ................... 337, 383, 384 Side Steps ...................................................27
Modifications/Alterations Synthetic .................................................. 338 Sliding Rear Window ....................................65
Vehicle ........................................................ 13 Viscosity ........................337, 338, 383, 384 Steering ............................................. 43, 222
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.......................147 Onboard Diagnostic System.......................... 129 Sunroof .................................................66, 68
Mopar Parts ...................................................470 Operating Precautions .................................. 129 Windows ......................................................64
MP3 Control ..................................................459 Operator Manual Power Seats
Multi-Function Control Lever............................ 47 Owner's Manual ..................................11, 471 Down ...........................................................35
Multifunction Tailgate ...................................... 72 Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................43 Forward .......................................................35
Overheating, Engine...................................... 317 Rearward .....................................................35
N Recline.........................................................35
New Vehicle Break-In Period..........................199 P Tilt................................................................35
Paint Care ..................................................... 371 Up ................................................................35
O Panic Alarm......................................................16 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 157
Occupant Restraints ......................................152 Parking Brake ............................................... 199 Pretensioners
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 377, 378 ParkSense Active Park Assist........................ 246 Seat Belts ................................................. 158
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ....................285 ParkSense System, Rear .............................. 240 11
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ....................285
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................338
478
R Remote Starting System ........................... 21, 23 Front Seat ...............................153, 154, 155
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................363 Remove, Tailgate .............................................93 Inspection ................................................. 184
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .. 349, 350 Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 291 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 155
Radio Operation ............................................461 Replacement Keys ...........................................24 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 156
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 53 Replacement Tires ........................................ 365 Lap/Shoulder Belts................................... 154
Rear Axle (Differential)...................................354 Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 470 Operating Instructions .............................. 155
Rear Camera .................................................260 Restraints, Child ........................................... 170 Pregnant Women ...................................... 157
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............................ 91 Restraints, Head ..............................................38 Pretensioners ........................................... 158
Rear Cross Path .............................................141 Rotation, Tires .............................................. 369 Rear Seat.................................................. 154
Rear ParkSense System ................................240 Reminder .................................................. 153
Rear Window, Sliding ....................................... 66 S Seat Belt Extender .................................... 157
Reclining Rear Seats ....................................... 34 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 184 Seat Belt Pretensioner.............................. 158
Recreational Towing ......................................280 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 186 Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 153
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....282 Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 470 Untwisting Procedure................................ 156
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N)..283 Safety Information, Tire ................................ 355 Seat Belts Maintenance ................................ 374
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................378 Safety Tips .................................................... 184 Seats ..................................................32, 34, 35
Refrigerant ....................................................343 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 184 Adjustment ...........................................32, 35
Release, Hood ................................................. 70 Schedule, Maintenance ..............323, 327, 328 Easy Entry ....................................................36
Release, Tailgate ............................................. 71 Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 118 Head Restraints ...........................................38
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................153 Seat Belts ............................................ 153, 184 Memory .......................................................31
Remote Keyless Entry...................................... 16 Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 156 Power...........................................................35
Panic Alarm ................................................. 16 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 156 Rear Folding ................................................32
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 19, 24 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Reclining Rear .............................................34
Remote Start (Diesel) ...................................... 23 Anchorage ............................................ 156 Tilting ...........................................................32
Remote Start (Gasoline) .................................. 21 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 158 Security Alarm ........................................ 25, 120
Remote Starting Child Restraints ........................................ 170 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......... 384, 387
Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 22 Energy Management Feature ................... 158 Sentry Key
Uconnect Customer Programmable Extender ................................................... 157 Key Programming ........................................24
Features............................. 399, 418, 439
Uconnect Settings .................. 399, 418, 439
479
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .................................. 24 Cold Weather ............................................ 190 T

Sentry Key Replacement ................................. 24 Engine Block Heater ........................ 194, 198 Tailgate ............................................................93
Service Assistance .........................................468 Engine Fails To Start................................. 190 Tailgate Removal .............................................93
Service Contract ............................................469 Starting And Operating......................... 188, 191 Tailgate, Electronic Lowering ...........................71
Service Manuals ............................................471 Starting Procedures ............................. 188, 191 Tailgate, Multifunction .....................................72
Shifting ..........................................................202 Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) ........... 191 Telescoping Steering Column ...........................40
Automatic Transmission ............................204 Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ............... 187 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............62
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Steering Tilt
Case Neutral (N) ...................................282 Power ....................................................... 222 Down ...........................................................35
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Tilt Column ..................................................40 Up ................................................................35
Case Neutral (N) ...................................283 Wheel, Heated .............................................40 Tilt Steering Column .........................................40
Shoulder Belts ...............................................154 Wheel, Tilt....................................................40 Tip Start ............................................... 187, 191
Side Steps, Power............................................ 27 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 459 Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 359
Signals, Turn ..................................49, 127, 186 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Tire Markings ................................................ 355
Siri .................................................................465 Controls ........................................................ 459 Tire Safety Information.................................. 355
Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................ 65 Steps, Power Side ............................................27 Tires .................................. 186, 362, 366, 370
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................368 Storage ............................................................77 Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................... 364
Snow Plow .....................................................279 Storage Compartment, Center Seat .................78 Air Pressure .............................................. 362
Snow Tires .....................................................366 Storage, Vehicle ......................................63, 371 Chains ...................................................... 368
Spare Tires .......................................... 366, 367 Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 371 Compact Spare ......................................... 366
Spark Plugs ...................................................384 Sun Roof ..................................... 66, 67, 68, 70 Dual .......................................................... 376
Speed Control Closing.........................................................69 General Information ........................ 362, 366
Accel/Decel ...............................................227 Sunglasses Storage .........................................86 High Speed ............................................... 363
Cancel .......................................................227 Sunshade Operation ........................................67 Inflation Pressure ..................................... 362
Resume .....................................................227 Suspension Life Of Tires .............................................. 364
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............ 225, 227 Air .................................................... 213, 217 Load Capacity ........................................... 359
Starting ....................................... 187, 188, 191 Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 138 Pressure Monitoring System
Automatic Transmission .................. 187, 191 Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 338 (TPMS) ......................................... 123, 147 11
Button ......................................................... 19
480
Quality Grading..........................................370 Trailer Towing ............................................... 269 U

Radial ........................................................363 Cooling System Tips ................................. 279 Uconnect
Replacement .............................................365 Hitches ..................................................... 272 Uconnect Settings ....... 391, 397, 399, 416,
Rotation ....................................................369 Minimum Requirements ........................... 273 418, 437, 439
Safety .............................................. 355, 362 Mirrors .........................................................45 Uconnect Phone
Sizes..........................................................356 Tips........................................................... 278 Call Continuation ...................................... 459
Snow Tires .................................................366 Trailer And Tongue Weight........................ 273 Uconnect Settings
Spare Tires ...................................... 366, 367 Wiring ....................................................... 277 Customer Programmable Features ... 27, 397,
Spinning ....................................................364 Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 273 399, 416, 418, 437, 439
Trailer Towing ............................................274 Trailer Weight................................................ 273 Passive Entry
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................364 Transfer Case ............................................... 354 Programming ...............27, 397, 416, 437
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................376 Electronically Shifted ....................... 208, 210 Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 370
To Open Hood .................................................. 70 Fluid ................................................ 386, 389 Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....73
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................273 Transmission ................................................ 204 Universal Transmitter .......................................73
Tonneau Cover .......................................95, 372 Automatic ........................................ 204, 353 Unleaded Gasoline ........................................ 377
Tonneau Cover Cleaning ................................372 Fluid ................................................ 386, 389 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt.................... 156
Towing ................................................. 269, 320 Maintenance ............................................ 353 USB ............................................................... 459
Disabled Vehicle........................................320 Shifting ..................................................... 202 Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ...........................91
Guide.........................................................273 Transporting Pets.......................................... 184
Recreational ..............................................280 Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 364 V
Weight .......................................................273 Turn Signals ......................... 49, 127, 293, 295 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 376
Towing Behind A Motorhome .........................280 Vehicle Loading .................................... 268, 359
Traction .........................................................283 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................13
Traction Control .............................................138 Vehicle Storage ...................................... 63, 371
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............................138
481
Vehicle User Guide Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 368
In Vehicle Help ............................................ 14 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 368
Navigation ................................................... 14 Wind Buffeting ................................... 66, 67, 70
Operating Instructions ................................. 14 Window Fogging ...............................................63
Searching User Guide.................................. 14 Windows ..........................................................64
Viscosity, Engine Oil ............................. 337, 338 Power ..........................................................64
Voice Recognition System (VR) ......................462 Rear Sliding .................................................66
Reset Auto-Up..............................................65
W Windshield Defroster .................................... 185
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Windshield Washers ...............................52, 335
Descriptions) .................................................123 Fluid ...................................................52, 335
Warnings And Cautions ................................... 11 Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 346
Warranty Information .....................................470 Windshield Wipers ...........................................52
Washers, Windshield ..............................52, 335 Wipers Blade Replacement .......................... 346
Washing Vehicle ............................................372 Wipers, Intermittent .........................................52
Water Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................53
Driving Through .........................................284 Wireless Charging Pad .....................................86
Water Separator
Diesel Fuel ................................................340
11
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S.), www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the WARNING
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
2020 RAM 1500
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
20_DT_OM_EN_USC_N2
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App
FOURTH EDITION V2
Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF `
RAM 1500
THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
20 20 OWNER’ S M ANUAL
RAMTRUCKS.COM (U.S.) RAMTRUCK.CA (CANADA)
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

2020 Ram 1500 DT

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2020 Ram 1500 DT

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2020 Ram 1500 DT

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2020 RAM 1500

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF `

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 14 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..................................................... 100 3

4 SAFETY .......................................................................................................................................... 131 4

5 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 187 5

INTRODUCTION SENTRY KEY............................................................24 HEAD RESTRAINTS................................................ 38

EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 46 CLIMATE CONTROLS .............................................53 Using HomeLink® ............................................76

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — DIESEL UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................468 WARRANTY INFORMATION ............................... 470

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

A — Forward Limit of Camper CG

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

 Available when and where you need it  Operating Instructions

 Customizable interface  Warranty Information

 Multilingual  Fluid Level Standards

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15

KEYS NOTE: 5 — Lock

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

Key Fob Back Cover Removal — Left Side

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

4. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key

Key Fob Battery Location Key Fob Battery Replacement

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

General Information La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The push button ignition can be placed in the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

SENTRY KEY CAUTION!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

MANUAL F RONT S EAT ADJUSTMENT WARNING!

Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment WARNING!

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped MANUAL R EAR S EAT ADJUSTMENT

Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped

Center Portion Folded Forward

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

POWER F RONT S EAT ADJUSTMENT — Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39